Nissan Automobile Z12 D User Manual
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
IMPORTANT INFORMATION ABOUT  
THIS MANUAL  
Arrows in an illustration that are similar to those  
above call attention to an item in the illustration.  
You will see various symbols in this manual. They  
are used in the following ways:  
CALIFORNIA PROPOSITION 65  
WARNING  
WARNING  
WARNING  
This is used to indicate the presence of  
a hazard that could cause death or  
serious personal injury. To avoid or  
reduce the risk, the procedures must  
be followed precisely.  
Engine exhaust, some of its constitu-  
ents, and certain vehicle components  
contain or emit chemicals known to the  
State of California to cause cancer and  
birth defects or other reproductive  
harm. In addition, certain fluids con-  
tained in vehicles and certain products  
of component wear contain or emit  
chemicals known to the State of Cali-  
fornia to cause cancer and birth defects  
or other reproductive harm.  
SIC0697  
CAUTION  
If you see the symbol above, it means “Do not  
do this” or “Do not let this happen”.  
This is used to indicate the presence of  
a hazard that could cause minor or  
moderate personal injury or damage to  
your vehicle. To avoid or reduce the risk,  
the procedures must be followed care-  
fully.  
CALIFORNIA PERCHLORATE ADVI-  
SORY  
If you see a symbol similar to those above in an  
illustration, it means the arrow points to the front  
of the vehicle.  
Some vehicle parts, such as lithium bat-  
teries, may contain perchlorate material.  
The following advisory is provided: “Per-  
chlorate Material - special handling may  
apply, See www.dtsc.ca.gov/  
Arrows in an illustration that are similar to those  
above indicate movement or action.  
hazardouswaste/perchlorate.”  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
BLUETOOTH® is  
a
trademark  
owned by Bluetooth SIG, Inc.,  
U.S.A. and licensed to Visteon  
Corporation.  
XM Radio® requires subscrip-  
tion, sold separately after first  
90 days. Not available in Alaska,  
Hawaii or Guam. For more in-  
formation, visit www.xmradio.  
com.  
C
* 2009 NISSAN MOTOR CO., LTD.  
All rights reserved. No part of this Owner’s  
Manual may be reproduced or stored in a  
retrieval system, or transmitted in any form, or  
by any means, electronic, mechanical, photo-  
copying, recording or otherwise, without the  
prior written permission of Nissan Motor Co.,  
Ltd.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
NISSAN CUSTOMER CARE  
PROGRAM  
NISSAN CARES ...  
Both NISSAN and your NISSAN dealer are dedicated to serving all your automotive needs. Your satisfaction with your vehicle and your NISSAN dealer are  
our primary concerns. Your NISSAN dealer is always available to assist you with all your automobile sales and service needs.  
However, if there is something that your  
NISSAN dealer cannot assist you with or you  
would like to provide NISSAN directly with  
comments or questions, please contact the  
NISSAN Consumer Affairs Department using  
our toll-free number:  
The Consumer Affairs Department will ask for  
the following information:  
You can write to NISSAN with the information at:  
For U.S. customers  
Nissan North America, Inc.  
Consumer Affairs Department  
P.O. Box 685003  
—
—
Your name, address, and telephone number  
Vehicle identification number (attached to  
the top of the instrument panel on the  
driver’s side)  
Franklin, TN 37068-5003  
For Canadian customers  
Nissan Canada Inc.  
5290 Orbitor Drive  
For U.S. customers  
1-800-NISSAN-1  
(1-800-647-7261)  
For Canadian customers  
1-800-387-0122  
—
Date of purchase  
Mississauga, Ontario L4W 4Z5  
—
Current odometer reading  
Your NISSAN dealer’s name  
Your comments or questions  
—
—
OR  
We appreciate your interest in NISSAN and thank you for buying a quality NISSAN vehicle.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Table of  
Contents  
Illustrated table of contents  
0
1
Safety — Seats, seat belts and supplemental  
restraint system  
Instruments and controls  
2
Pre-driving checks and adjustments  
Heater, air conditioner, audio and phone systems  
Starting and driving  
3
4
5
In case of emergency  
6
Appearance and care  
7
Maintenance and do-it-yourself  
Technical and consumer information  
8
9
Index  
10  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
0 Illustrated table of contents  
Seats, seat belts and Supplemental Restraint  
Cockpit............................................................ 0-7  
System (SRS) ................................................... 0-2  
Exterior front ..................................................... 0-3  
Exterior rear ...................................................... 0-4  
Instrument panel ................................................ 0-8  
Meters and gauges............................................. 0-9  
Engine compartment ......................................... 0-10  
MR18DE engine .......................................... 0-10  
¯
Exterior (Krom models) ........................................ 0-5  
Passenger compartment ...................................... 0-6  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
SEATS, SEAT BELTS AND  
SUPPLEMENTAL RESTRAINT  
SYSTEM (SRS)  
10. Seat belt with pretensioners (P.1-56)  
11. Rear seats* (P.1-4)  
— Child restraints (P.1-23)  
12. LATCH (Lower Anchors and Tethers for CHildren)  
system* (P.1-24)  
*: except for Cargo Van models  
SSI0659  
1. Supplemental front-impact air bags (Page 1-44)  
5. Roof-mounted curtain side-impact supplemental  
air bags (P.1-44)  
2. Front seat-mounted side-impact supplemental air  
bags (P.1-44)  
6. Rear headrests* (P.1-9)  
3. Seat belts (P.1-12)  
7. Rear center seat belt* (P.1-20)  
4. Head restraints (P.1-6)  
8. Occupant classification sensors (weight sensors)  
— Advanced Air Bag System (P.1-50)  
— Front-seat Active Head Restraints (P.1-9)  
9. Front seats (P.1-3)  
0-2 Illustrated table of contents  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
EXTERIOR FRONT  
6. Fog lights*  
— Switch operation (P.2-27)  
— Bulb replacement (P.8-27)  
7. License plate installation (P.9-11)  
8. Recovery hook (P.6-15)  
9. Tires  
— Wheels and tires (P.8-28, P.9-7)  
— Flat tire (P.6-2)  
— Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS)  
(P.2-13, P.5-3)  
10. Side turn signal lights  
— Switch operation (P.2-26)  
— Bulb replacement (P.8-27)  
11. Doors  
— Keys (P.3-2)  
— Door locks (P.3-4)  
— Remote keyless entry system* (P.3-6)  
— Intelligent Key system* (P.3-10)  
— Security system (P.2-17)  
12. Child safety rear door lock (P.3-6)  
*: if so equipped  
SSI0559  
1. Hood (P.3-21)  
3. Windshield wiper and washer  
— Switch operation (P.2-20)  
— Blade replacement (P.8-17)  
— Window washer fluid (P.8-12)  
2. Headlights and turn signal lights  
— Switch operation (P.2-23)  
— Bulb replacement (P.8-26)  
4. Outside mirrors (P.3-27)  
5. Power windows (P.2-36)  
Illustrated table of contents 0-3  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
EXTERIOR REAR  
9. Fuel-filler door  
— Operation (P.3-24)  
— Fuel recommendation (P.9-3)  
*: if so equipped  
SSI0660  
1. Rear window wiper and washer  
— Switch operation (P.2-22)  
4. Rear window defroster (P.2-23)  
5. Back door (P.3-22)  
— Window washer fluid (P.8-12)  
— Intelligent Key system* (P.3-10)  
2. High-mounted stop light  
— Bulb replacement (P.8-27)  
6. Rear combination lights  
— Bulb replacement (P.8-27)  
3. Antenna (P.4-42)  
7. Rearview camera* (P.4-2)  
— Satellite radio antenna* (P.4-14)  
8. Spare tire (under the vehicle) (P.6-4)  
0-4 Illustrated table of contents  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
¯
EXTERIOR (Krom models)  
¯
For Krom models, the vehicle parts listed below  
require special care or caution. Refer to addi-  
tional information in each section.  
1. Side sill extensions (P.3-23)  
2. Aluminum alloy wheels (P.7-4)  
3. Front bumper (P.3-23, P.6-14)  
4. Rear spoiler (P.7-3)  
5. Rear bumper (P.3-23, P.6-14)  
SSI0577  
Illustrated table of contents 0-5  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
PASSENGER COMPARTMENT  
9. Map lights* (P.2-38)  
10. Inside rearview mirror (P.3-26)  
11. Cargo area  
— Luggage hooks (P.2-34)  
— Cargo light* (P.2-40)  
12. Rear cup holders* (P.2-31)  
13. Front cup holders (P.2-31)  
*: if so equipped  
SSI0634  
1. Rear pillar pocket (P.2-34)  
2. Soft bottle holders (P.2-33)  
3. Ceiling light (P.2-39)  
6. Door armrest  
— Power window switch (P.2-36)  
— Power door lock switch (P.3-5)  
7. Microphone*  
4. Utility hooks* (P.2-35)  
5. Jack and tools (P.6-3)  
— Bluetooth® Hands-Free Phone System*  
(P.4-44)  
8. Sun visors (P.3-26)  
0-6 Illustrated table of contents  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
COCKPIT  
7. Vehicle Dynamic Control (VDC) OFF switch  
(P.5-28)  
8. Tilting steering wheel lever (P.3-25)  
9. Steering-wheel-mounted controls (left side)*  
— Audio control* (P.4-41)  
— Bluetooth® Hands-Free Phone System control*  
(P.4-44)  
10. Steering-wheel-mounted controls (right side)*  
— Cruise control switches* (P.5-20)  
11. Selector lever or Shift lever  
— Continuously Variable Transmission (CVT)  
(P.5-14)  
— Manual Transmission (MT) (P.5-18)  
12. Parking brake (P.5-20)  
*: if so equipped  
SSI0563  
1. Front cup holders (P.2-31)  
3. Steering wheel  
— Electric power steering system (P.5-25)  
— Horn (P.2-28)  
— Driver’s supplemental air bag (P.1-44)  
2. Headlight, fog light and turn signal switch  
— Headlight (P.2-23)  
— Turn signal light (P.2-26)  
— Fog light* (P.2-27)  
4. Wiper and washer switch (P.2-20)  
5. Fuse box cover (P.8-21)  
6. Outside mirror remote control switch (P.3-27)  
Illustrated table of contents 0-7  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
INSTRUMENT PANEL  
11. Push-button ignition switch (models with Intelli-  
gent Key system) (P.5-9)  
12. Heater and air conditioner* control (P.4-6)  
— Rear window and outside mirror* defroster  
switch (P.2-23)  
13. Utility hooks* (P.2-35)  
14. iPod® connector* (P.4-15)/USB connector*  
(P.4-17)  
15. Power outlet (P.2-31)  
16. Glove box (P.2-33)  
*: if so equipped  
SSI0562  
6. Front passenger air bag status light (P.1-51)  
1. Side ventilator (P.4-5)  
2. Meters and gauges (P.2-4)  
3. Center ventilator (P.4-5)  
7. Front passenger supplemental air bag (P.1-44)  
8. Fuel-filler door release handle (P.3-24)  
9. Hood release handle (P.3-21)  
4. Hazard warning flasher switch (P.2-27)  
5. Audio system* (P.4-13)  
— Clock* (P.2-28)  
10. Ignition switch (models without Intelligent Key  
system) (P.5-7)  
0-8 Illustrated table of contents  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
METERS AND GAUGES  
9. RESET switch for trip odometer (P.2-5)/Trip  
computer mode switch (P.2-8)  
*: if so equipped  
SIC4119  
1. Tachometer (P.2-6)  
5. Speedometer (P.2-5)  
2. Engine coolant temperature gauge (P.2-6)  
6. Warning/indicator lights (P.2-10)  
3. Vehicle information display (P.2-7)  
— Odometer/twin trip odometer (P.2-5)  
— Trip computer (P.2-8)  
7. Instrument brightness control knob (P.2-26)  
8. Continuously Variable Transmission (CVT) posi-  
tion indicator* (P.2-8)  
— Outside air temperature* (P.2-7)  
4. Fuel gauge (P.2-7)  
Illustrated table of contents 0-9  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
ENGINE COMPARTMENT  
*
Shown with the resonator removed. For removal  
instructions, see “ENGINE COMPARTMENT  
CHECK LOCATIONS” in the “8. Maintenance and  
do-it-yourself” section.  
*1: for Manual Transmission (MT) models  
SSI0564  
5. Window washer fluid reservoir (P.8-12)  
6. Engine drive belt location (P.8-15)  
7. Engine oil dipstick (P.8-9)  
MR18DE ENGINE*  
1. Engine oil filler cap (P.8-9)  
2. Brake and clutch (*1) fluid reservoir (P.8-11)  
3. Air cleaner (P.8-16)  
8. Engine coolant reservoir (P.8-8)  
9. Radiator filler cap (P.8-7)  
— Vehicle overheat (P.6-11)  
4. Battery (P.8-13)  
— Jump starting (P.6-8)  
10. Fuse/fusible link holder (P.8-20)  
0-10 Illustrated table of contents  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
1 Safety — Seats, seat belts and supple-  
mental restraint system  
Seats .............................................................. 1-2  
Front seats ................................................... 1-3  
Rear seats (if so equipped) .............................. 1-4  
Head restraints.............................................. 1-6  
Adjustable headrests (if so equipped) ................. 1-9  
Armrest (if so equipped) ................................ 1-12  
Seat belts ...................................................... 1-12  
Precautions on seat belt usage ....................... 1-12  
Child safety ................................................ 1-15  
Pregnant women.......................................... 1-16  
Injured persons............................................ 1-16  
Three-point type seat belt .............................. 1-16  
Seat belt extenders....................................... 1-22  
Seat belt maintenance................................... 1-22  
Child restraints ................................................ 1-23  
Precautions on child restraints......................... 1-23  
Child restraint installation using LATCH  
(except for Cargo Van models) ........................ 1-28  
Child restraint installation using the seat belts..... 1-33  
Booster seats.................................................. 1-39  
Precautions on booster seats.......................... 1-39  
Booster seat installation on front passenger seat  
and rear seat............................................... 1-41  
Supplemental restraint system............................. 1-44  
Precautions on supplemental restraint system ..... 1-44  
NISSAN Advanced Air Bag System  
(front seats) ................................................ 1-50  
Front seat-mounted side-impact supplemental  
air bag and roof-mounted curtain side-impact  
supplemental air bag systems ......................... 1-54  
Seat belts with pretensioners (front seats) ......... 1-56  
Supplemental air bag warning labels................. 1-57  
Supplemental air bag warning light................... 1-57  
Repair and replacement procedure................... 1-58  
Lower Anchors and Tethers for CHildren System  
(LATCH) (except for Cargo Van models)............ 1-24  
Top tether strap child restraint......................... 1-26  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
SEATS  
.
The seatback should not be reclined  
any more than needed for comfort.  
Seat belts are most effective when  
the passenger sits well back and  
straight up in the seat. If the seat-  
back is reclined, the risk of sliding  
under the lap belt and being injured  
is increased.  
CAUTION  
When adjusting the seat positions, be  
sure not to contact any moving parts to  
avoid possible injuries and/or damage.  
SSS0133  
well back in the seat with both feet  
on the floor and adjust the seat  
properly. See “PRECAUTIONS ON  
SEAT BELT USAGE” later in this  
section.  
WARNING  
.
Do not ride in a moving vehicle  
when the seatback is reclined. This  
can be dangerous. The shoulder belt  
will not be against your body. In an  
accident, you could be thrown into it  
and receive neck or other serious  
injuries. You could also slide under  
the lap belt and receive serious  
internal injuries.  
.
.
After adjustment, gently rock in the  
seat to make sure it is securely  
locked.  
Do not leave children unattended  
inside the vehicle. They could un-  
knowingly activate switches or con-  
trols. Unattended children could  
become involved in serious acci-  
dents.  
.
For the most effective protection  
when the vehicle is in motion, the  
seat should be upright. Always sit  
1-2 Safety — Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
SSS0793  
SSS0792  
The reclining feature allows adjustment of the  
seatback for occupants of different sizes for  
added comfort and to help obtain proper seat  
belt fit. (See “PRECAUTIONS ON SEAT BELT  
USAGE” later in this section.) Also, the seatback  
can be reclined to allow occupants to rest when  
the vehicle is stopped and the transmission is in  
the P (Park) position or N (Neutral) position with  
the parking brake fully applied.  
Seat lifter (for driver’s seat):  
FRONT SEATS  
Pull up or push down the adjusting lever to  
adjust the seat height until the desired position  
is achieved.  
Front manual seat adjustment  
Forward and backward:  
1
Pull the lever  
up and hold it while you slide  
*
the seat forward or backward to the desired  
position. Release the lever to lock the seat in  
position.  
Reclining:  
2
To recline the seatback, pull the lever  
up and  
*
lean back. To bring the seatback forward, pull  
the lever up and lean your body forward. Release  
the lever to lock the seatback in position.  
Safety — Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1-3  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
(except for Cargo Van models)” later in this  
section.)  
SSS0961  
seatback for occupants of different sizes for  
added comfort and to help obtain proper seat  
belt fit. (See “PRECAUTIONS ON SEAT BELT  
USAGE” later in this section.)  
REAR SEATS (if so equipped)  
Forward and backward  
1
Pull the lever  
up and hold it while you slide  
*
the seat forward or backward to the desired  
position. Release the lever to lock the seat in  
position.  
Folding  
Before folding the rear seats:  
Reclining  
To recline the seatback, pull the strap  
lean back. To bring the seatback forward, pull  
the strap up and lean your body forward.  
Release the strap to lock the seatback in  
position.  
.
Secure the seat belts on the seat belt hooks  
on the side wall. (See “Seat belt hooks  
(except for Cargo Van models)” later in this  
section.)  
2
*
and  
.
Release the connector tongue of the rear  
center seat belt from the buckle, and secure  
the connector and seat belt tongues on the  
seat belt hook. (See “Rear center seat belt  
The reclining feature allows adjustment of the  
1-4 Safety — Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
avoid injury to yourself and others:  
.
Make sure that the seat path is clear  
before moving the seat.  
.
The seatback is spring assisted and  
may move at a rapid rate. Be careful  
not to allow the seatback to pinch or  
hit any part of your body when you  
fold it.  
To return the seatback to the seating position, lift  
up each seatback and push it to the upright  
position until it is latched. Unstow the seat belt  
buckles by pulling the buckles out of the seat  
pockets.  
SSS0987  
.
Stow seat belt buckles by pushing the seat  
belt buckles into seat pockets.  
WARNING  
The seat belt buckles should only be stowed  
when the rear seat is folded. The rear seat belt  
buckles should be in the unstowed position at all  
other times.  
.
Do not use the rear seat belts when  
the buckles are stowed in the seat  
pockets. Failure to do so may re-  
duce the effectiveness of the entire  
restraint system and increase the  
chance or severity of injury in an  
accident.  
SSS0962  
To fold down the seatback of each rear seat, pull  
1
*
2
*
the strap  
or  
.
.
.
Do not fold down the rear seats  
when occupants are in the rear seat  
area or any objects are on the rear  
seats.  
CAUTION  
When folding or returning the  
seatback(s) to the upright position, to  
Never allow anyone to ride in the  
Safety — Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1-5  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
cargo area or on the rear seats  
when they are in the fold-down  
position. Use of these areas by  
passengers without proper re-  
straints could result in serious injury  
in an accident or sudden stop.  
this section. Check the adjustment after  
someone else uses the seat. Do not  
attach anything to the head restraint  
stalks or remove the head restraint. Do  
not use the seat if the head restraint  
has been removed. If the head restraint  
was removed, reinstall and properly  
adjust the head restraint before an  
occupant uses the seating position.  
Failure to follow these instructions  
can reduce the effectiveness of the  
head restraints. This may increase the  
risk of serious injury or death in a  
collision.  
.
.
Properly secure all cargo with ropes  
or straps to help prevent it from  
sliding or shifting. Do not place  
cargo higher than the seatbacks. In  
a sudden stop or collision, unse-  
cured cargo could cause personal  
injury.  
SSS1019  
When returning the seatbacks to the  
upright position, be certain they are  
completely secured in the latched  
position. If they are not completely  
secured, passengers may be injured  
in an accident or sudden stop.  
The illustration shows the seating positions  
equipped with head restraints. The head re-  
straints are adjustable.  
Indicates the seating position is equipped  
with a head restraint.  
HEAD RESTRAINTS  
WARNING  
Head restraints supplement the other  
vehicle safety systems. They may pro-  
vide additional protection against injury  
in certain rear end collisions. Adjust the  
head restraints properly, as specified in  
1-6 Safety — Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
SSS0992  
SSS0997  
SSS0993  
To raise the head restraint, pull it up.  
Components  
Adjustment  
1. Head restraint  
Adjust the head restraint so the center is level  
with the center of your ears.  
2. Adjustment notches  
3. Lock knob  
4. Stalks  
Safety — Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1-7  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
SSS0994  
SSS0995  
SSS0996  
To lower, push and hold the lock knob and push  
the head restraint down.  
Removal  
Install  
Use the following procedure to remove the  
adjustable head restraints.  
1. Align the head restraint stalks with the holes  
in the seat. Make sure that the head restraint  
is facing the correct direction. The stalk with  
1
1. Pull the head restraint up to the highest  
position.  
the adjustment notches  
must be in-  
*
2
stalled in the hole with the lock knob  
.
*
2. Push and hold the lock knob.  
2. Push and hold the lock knob and push the  
head restraint down.  
3. Remove the head restraint from the seat.  
3. Properly adjust the head restraint before an  
occupant uses the seating position.  
4. Store the head restraint properly in a secure  
place so it is not loose in the vehicle.  
5. Reinstall and properly adjust the head  
restraint before an occupant uses the  
seating position.  
1-8 Safety — Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Properly adjust the Active Head Restraints as  
described in this section.  
ADJUSTABLE HEADRESTS (if so  
equipped)  
WARNING  
The adjustable headrests supplement  
the other vehicle safety systems. They  
may provide additional protection  
against injury in certain rear end colli-  
sions. Adjust the headrest properly, as  
specified in this section. Check the  
adjustment after someone else uses  
the seat. Do not attach anything to the  
adjustable headrest stalks or remove  
the adjustable headrest. Do not use the  
seat if the adjustable headrest has  
been removed. If the adjustable head-  
rest was removed, reinstall and prop-  
erly adjust the headrest before an  
occupant uses the seating position.  
Failure to follow these instructions  
can reduce the effectiveness of the  
adjustable headrests. This may in-  
crease the risk of serious injury or  
death in a collision.  
SSS0508  
SSS1048  
The illustration shows the seating positions  
equipped with adjustable headrests.  
Front-seat Active Head Restraints  
The Active Head Restraint moves forward  
utilizing the force that the seatback receives  
from the occupant in a rear-end collision. The  
movement of the head restraint helps support  
the occupant’s head by reducing its backward  
movement and helping absorb some of the  
forces that may lead to whiplash-type injuries.  
Indicates the seating position is equipped  
with an adjustable headrest.  
Active Head Restraints are effective for colli-  
sions at low to medium speeds in which it is said  
that whiplash injury occurs most.  
Active Head Restraints operate only in certain  
rear-end collisions. After the collision, the head  
restraints return to their original positions.  
Safety — Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1-9  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
SSS1034  
SSS0997  
SSS1035  
To raise the headrest, pull it up.  
Components  
Adjustment  
1. Adjustable headrest  
Adjust the headrest so the center is level with  
the center of your ears.  
2. Adjustment notch  
3. Lock knob  
4. Stalks  
1-10 Safety — Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
SSS1036  
SSS1037  
SSS1038  
To lower, push and hold the lock knob and push  
the headrest down.  
Removal  
Install  
Use the following procedure to remove the  
adjustable headrests.  
1. Align the headrest stalks with the holes in  
the seat. Make sure that the headrest is  
facing the correct direction. The stalk with  
1
1. Pull the headrest up to the highest position.  
2. Push and hold the lock knob.  
the adjustment notch  
must be installed  
*
2
in the hole with the lock knob  
.
*
2. Push and hold the lock knob and push the  
3. Remove the headrest from the seat.  
headrest down.  
4. Store the headrest properly in a secure  
place so it is not loose in the vehicle.  
3. Properly adjust the headrest before an  
occupant uses the seating position.  
5. Reinstall and properly adjust the headrest  
before an occupant uses the seating posi-  
tion.  
Safety — Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1-11  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
SEAT BELTS  
PRECAUTIONS ON SEAT BELT  
USAGE  
If you are wearing your seat belt properly  
adjusted, and you are sitting upright and well  
back in your seat with both feet on the floor, your  
chances of being injured or killed in an accident  
and/or the severity of injury may be greatly  
reduced. NISSAN strongly encourages you and  
all of your passengers to buckle up every time  
you drive, even if your seating position includes a  
supplemental air bag.  
Most U.S. states and Canadian provinces  
or territories specify that seat belts be  
worn at all times when a vehicle is being  
driven.  
SSS0970  
SSS0963  
Rear  
ARMREST (if so equipped)  
Front  
Pull the armrest down until it is horizontal.  
Pull the armrest down until it is horizontal.  
1-12 Safety — Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
SSS0136  
SSS0016  
SSS0134  
SSS0014  
Safety — Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1-13  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
.
.
Be sure the seat belt tongue is  
securely fastened to the proper  
buckle.  
activated, it cannot be reused and  
must be replaced together with the  
retractor. See a NISSAN dealer.  
WARNING  
.
.
Every person who drives or rides in  
this vehicle should use a seat belt at  
all times. Children should be prop-  
erly restrained in the rear seat and,  
if appropriate, in a child restraint.  
Do not wear the seat belt inside out  
or twisted. Doing so may reduce its  
effectiveness.  
.
.
Removal and installation of the  
pretensioner system components  
should be done by a NISSAN dealer.  
.
.
.
Do not allow more than one person  
to use the same seat belt.  
All seat belt assemblies, including  
retractors and attaching hardware,  
should be inspected after any colli-  
sion by a NISSAN dealer. NISSAN  
recommends that all seat belt as-  
semblies in use during a collision be  
replaced unless the collision was  
minor and the belts show no da-  
mage and continue to operate prop-  
erly. Seat belt assemblies not in use  
during a collision should also be  
inspected and replaced if either  
damage or improper operation is  
noted.  
The seat belt should be properly  
adjusted to a snug fit. Failure to do  
so may reduce the effectiveness of  
the entire restraint system and in-  
crease the chance or severity of  
injury in an accident. Serious injury  
or death can occur if the seat belt is  
not worn properly.  
Never carry more people in the  
vehicle than there are seat belts.  
If the seat belt warning light glows  
continuously while the ignition is  
turned ON with all doors closed and  
all seat belts fastened, it may in-  
dicate a malfunction in the system.  
Have the system checked by a  
NISSAN dealer.  
.
.
Always route the shoulder belt over  
your shoulder and across your  
chest. Never put the belt behind  
your back, under your arm or across  
your neck. The belt should be away  
from your face and neck, but not  
falling off your shoulder.  
.
No changes should be made to the  
seat belt system. For example, do  
not modify the seat belt, add mate-  
rial, or install devices that may  
change the seat belt routing or  
tension. Doing so may affect the  
operation of the seat belt system.  
Modifying or tampering with the  
seat belt system may result in  
serious personal injury.  
.
All child restraints and attaching  
hardware should be inspected after  
any collision. Always follow the  
restraint manufacturer’s inspection  
instructions and replacement re-  
commendations. The child restraints  
should be replaced if they are  
damaged.  
Position the lap belt as low and  
snug as possible AROUND THE  
HIPS, NOT THE WAIST. A lap belt  
worn too high could increase the  
risk of internal injuries in an acci-  
dent.  
.
Once a seat belt pretensioner has  
1-14 Safety — Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
CHILD SAFETY  
that comply with Federal Motor Vehicle Safety  
Standards or Canadian Motor Vehicle Safety  
Standards. You should choose a child restraint  
that fits your vehicle and always follow the  
manufacturer’s instructions for installation and  
use.  
fit them properly. The shoulder belt may  
come too close to the face or neck. The  
lap belt may not fit over their small hip  
bones. In an accident, an improperly  
fitting seat belt could cause serious or  
fatal injury. Always use appropriate  
child restraints.  
Children need adults to help protect them.  
They need to be properly restrained.  
In addition to the general information in this  
manual, child safety information is available from  
many other sources, including doctors, teachers,  
government traffic safety offices, and community  
organizations. Every child is different, so be sure  
to learn the best way to transport your child.  
Small children  
Children that are over 1 year old and weigh at  
least 20 lb (9 kg) can be placed in a front-facing  
child restraint. Refer to the manufacturer’s  
instructions for minimum and maximum weight  
and height recommendations. NISSAN recom-  
mends that small children be placed in child  
restraints that comply with Federal Motor  
Vehicle Safety Standards or Canadian Motor  
Vehicle Safety Standards. You should choose a  
child restraint that fits your vehicle and always  
follow the manufacturer’s instructions for instal-  
lation and use.  
All U.S. states and Canadian provinces or  
territories require the use of approved child  
restraints for infants and small children. (See  
“CHILD RESTRAINTS” later in this section.)  
There are three basic types of child restraint  
systems:  
Also, there are other types of child restraints  
available for larger children for additional pro-  
tection.  
.
.
.
Rear-facing child restraint  
Front-facing child restraint  
Booster seat  
NISSAN recommends that all pre-teens  
and children be restrained in the rear seat.  
According to accident statistics, children  
are safer when properly restrained in the  
rear seat than in the front seat.  
The proper restraint depends on the child’s size.  
Generally, infants (up to about 1 year and less  
than 20 lb (9 kg)) should be placed in rear-  
facing child restraints. Front-facing child re-  
straints are available for children who outgrow  
rear-facing child restraints and are at least 1  
year old. Booster seats are used to help position  
a vehicle lap/shoulder belt on a child who can no  
longer use a front-facing child restraint.  
Larger children  
Children who are too large for child restraints  
should be seated and restrained by the seat  
belts which are provided. The seat belt may not  
fit properly if the child is less than 4 ft 9 in (142.5  
cm) tall and weighs between 40 lb (18 kg) and  
80 lb (36 kg). A booster seat should be used to  
obtain proper seat belt fit.  
This is especially important because your  
vehicle has a supplemental restraint sys-  
tem (air bag system) for the front passen-  
ger. (See “SUPPLEMENTAL RESTRAINT  
SYSTEM” later in this section.)  
Infants  
WARNING  
Infants up to at least 1 year old should be placed  
in a rear-facing child restraint. NISSAN recom-  
mends that infants be placed in child restraints  
NISSAN recommends that a child be placed in a  
commercially available booster seat if the  
shoulder belt in the child’s seating position fits  
Infants and children need special pro-  
tection. The vehicle’s seat belts may not  
Safety — Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1-15  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
close to the face or neck or if the lap portion of  
the seat belt goes across the abdomen. The  
booster seat should raise the child so that the  
shoulder belt is properly positioned across the  
top, middle portion of the shoulder and the lap  
belt is low on the hips. A booster seat can only  
be used in seating positions that have a three-  
point type seat belt. The booster seat should fit  
the vehicle seat and have a label certifying that it  
complies with Federal Motor Vehicle Safety  
Standards or Canadian Motor Vehicle Safety  
Standards. Once the child has grown so the  
shoulder belt is no longer on or near the face  
and neck, use the shoulder belt without the  
booster seat.  
your abdominal area. Contact your doctor for  
specific recommendations.  
properly.  
Fastening the seat belts  
1. Adjust the seat. (See “SEATS” earlier in this  
section.)  
INJURED PERSONS  
NISSAN recommends that injured persons use  
seat belts, depending on the injury. Check with  
your doctor for specific recommendations.  
2. Make sure rear seat belt buckles are  
removed from the stowed position. See  
“Rear seat belt buckles (except for Cargo  
Van models)” later in this section.  
THREE-POINT TYPE SEAT BELT  
WARNING  
.
.
Every person who drives or rides in  
this vehicle should use a seat belt at  
all times.  
Do not ride in a moving vehicle  
when the seatback is reclined. This  
can be dangerous. The shoulder belt  
will not be against your body. In an  
accident, you could be thrown into it  
and receive neck or other serious  
injuries. You could also slide under  
the lap belt and receive serious  
internal injuries.  
WARNING  
Never let a child stand or kneel on any  
seat and do not allow a child in the  
cargo areas while the vehicle is moving.  
The child could be seriously injured or  
killed in an accident or sudden stop.  
PREGNANT WOMEN  
NISSAN recommends that pregnant women use  
seat belts. The seat belt should be worn snug,  
and always position the lap belt as low as  
possible around the hips, not the waist. Place  
the shoulder belt over your shoulder and across  
your chest. Never put the lap/shoulder belt over  
.
For the most effective protection  
when the vehicle is in motion, the  
seat should be upright. Always sit  
well back in the seat with both feet  
on the floor and adjust the seat belt  
1-16 Safety — Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
allow the driver and passengers some freedom  
of movement in the seat. The ELR locks the seat  
belt when the vehicle slows down rapidly or  
during certain impacts.  
The Automatic Locking Retractor (ALR) mode  
(child restraint mode) locks the seat belt for  
child restraint installation.  
When ALR mode is activated the seat belt  
cannot be extended again until the seat belt  
tongue is detached from the buckle and fully  
retracted. The seat belt returns to the ELR mode  
after the seat belt fully retracts. For additional  
information, see “CHILD RESTRAINTS” later in  
this section.  
SSS0292  
SSS0290  
3. Slowly pull the seat belt out of the retractor  
and insert the tongue into the buckle until  
you hear and feel the latch engage.  
4. Position the lap belt portion low and snug  
The ALR mode should be used only for  
child restraint installation. During normal  
seat belt use by an occupant, the ALR  
mode should not be activated. If it is  
activated, it may cause uncomfortable seat  
belt tension.  
on the hips as shown.  
5. Pull the shoulder belt portion toward the  
retractor to take up extra slack. Be sure the  
shoulder belt is routed over your shoulder  
and across your chest.  
.
The retractor is designed to lock  
during a sudden stop or on impact.  
A slow pulling motion permits the  
belt to move and allows you some  
freedom of movement in the seat.  
The front passenger seat and the rear seating  
positions three-point seat belts have two modes  
of operation:  
WARNING  
.
If the seat belt cannot be pulled  
from its fully retracted position,  
firmly pull the belt and release it.  
Then smoothly pull the belt out of  
the retractor.  
When fastening the seat belts, be  
certain that seatbacks are completely  
secured in the latched position. If they  
are not completely secured, passengers  
may be injured in an accident or sudden  
stop.  
.
.
Emergency Locking Retractor (ELR)  
Automatic Locking Retractor (ALR)  
The Emergency Locking Retractor (ELR) mode  
allows the seat belt to extend and retract to  
Safety — Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1-17  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
tiveness of the entire restraint system  
and increase the chance or severity of  
injury in an accident.  
Checking seat belt operation  
Seat belt retractors are designed to lock seat  
belt movement by two separate methods:  
.
When the belt is pulled quickly from the  
retractor.  
.
When the vehicle slows down rapidly.  
To increase your confidence in the seat belts,  
check the operation as follows:  
SSS0326  
SSS0987  
.
Grasp the shoulder belt and pull forward  
quickly. The retractor should lock and  
restrict further belt movement.  
Unfastening the seat belts  
To unfasten the seat belt, push the button on the  
buckle. The seat belt automatically retracts.  
Rear seat belt buckles (except for Cargo  
Van models)  
The rear seat belt buckles can be stowed by  
pushing the buckles into the pockets of the seat  
cushion when the rear seatback is folded. The  
buckles should only be stowed when the seat-  
back is folded. At all other times the seat belt  
buckles must be pulled out of the pockets in the  
unstowed position.  
If the retractor does not lock during this check or  
if you have any question about seat belt  
operation, see a NISSAN dealer.  
WARNING  
Do not use the rear seat belts when the  
buckles are stowed in the seat pockets.  
Failure to do so may reduce the effec-  
1-18 Safety — Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
WARNING  
.
.
After adjustment, release the ad-  
justment button and try to move the  
shoulder belt anchor up and down  
to make sure it is securely fixed in  
position.  
The shoulder belt anchor height  
should be adjusted to the position  
best for you. Failure to do so may  
reduce the effectiveness of the  
entire restraint system and increase  
the chance or severity of injury in an  
accident.  
SSS0351A  
SSS0964  
Shoulder belt height adjustment (for front  
seats)  
Seat belt hooks (except for Cargo Van  
models)  
The shoulder belt anchor height should be  
adjusted to the position best for you. (See  
“PRECAUTIONS ON SEAT BELT USAGE”  
earlier in this section.)  
When the rear seat belts are not in use and  
when folding down the rear seats, hook the rear  
outer seat belts on the seat belt hooks.  
The hook for the rear center seat belt is located  
on the left wall behind the rear seat. (See “Rear  
center seat belt (except for Cargo Van models)”  
later in this section for details.)  
1
To adjust, pull the adjustment button  
, and  
*
then move the shoulder belt anchor to the  
2
desired position  
, so that the belt passes  
*
over the center of the shoulder. The belt should  
be away from your face and neck, but not falling  
off of your shoulder. Release the adjustment  
button to lock the shoulder belt anchor into  
position.  
Safety — Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1-19  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
SSS0391  
SSS0241  
SSS0703  
The center seat belt buckle and the tongue are  
identified by the CENTER mark. The center seat  
belt tongue can be fastened only into the center  
seat belt buckle.  
Rear center seat belt (except for Cargo  
Van models)  
The rear center seat belt has a connector tongue  
WARNING  
.
.
Always fasten the connector tongue  
and the seat belt in the order shown.  
1
2
and a seat belt tongue  
. Both the  
*
*
connector tongue and the seat belt tongue must  
be securely latched for proper seat belt opera-  
tion.  
Always make sure both the connec-  
tor tongue and the seat belt tongue  
are secured when using the seat  
belt or installing a child restraint. Do  
not use the seat belt or child  
restraint with only the seat belt  
tongue attached. This could result  
in serious personal injury in case of  
an accident or a sudden stop.  
1-20 Safety — Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Stowing rear center seat belt:  
When folding down the rear seat, the rear center  
seat belt can be retracted into a stowed position  
as follows:  
1
1. Hold the connector tongue  
so that the  
*
seat belt does not retract suddenly when the  
tongue is released from the connector  
1
buckle. Release the connector tongue  
*
2
by inserting a suitable tool such as key  
*
into the connector buckle.  
2. Retract the seat belt and secure the seat  
belt tongue and connector tongue on the  
3
*
seat belt hook  
.
WARNING  
.
.
Do not unfasten the rear center seat  
belt connector except when folding  
down the rear seat.  
When returning the seatback, be  
sure to attach the rear center seat  
belt connector.  
SSS0966  
Attaching rear center seat belt:  
Always be sure the rear center seat belt  
connector tongue and connector buckle are  
attached. Disconnect only when folding down  
the rear seat.  
SSS0965  
Safety — Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1-21  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
SEAT BELT EXTENDERS  
SEAT BELT MAINTENANCE  
To connect the buckle:  
If, because of body size or driving position, it is  
not possible to properly fit the lap-shoulder belt  
and fasten it, an extender that is compatible with  
the installed seat belts is available that can be  
purchased. The extender adds approximately 8  
in (200 mm) of length and may be used for either  
the driver or front passenger seating position.  
See a NISSAN dealer for assistance with  
purchasing an extender if an extender is  
required.  
.
To clean the seat belt webbing, apply a  
mild soap solution or any solution recom-  
mended for cleaning upholstery or carpets.  
Then wipe with a cloth and allow the seat  
belts to dry in the shade. Do not allow the  
seat belts to retract until they are completely  
dry.  
1. Remove the seat belt tongue and connector  
1
*
tongue from the seat belt hook  
.
2. Pull the seat belt and secure the connector  
2
*
buckle until it clicks  
.
The rear center seat belt connector tongue can  
be attached only into the rear center seat belt  
connector buckle.  
.
.
If dirt builds up in the shoulder belt  
guide of the seat belt anchors, the seat  
belts may retract slowly. Wipe the shoulder  
belt guide with a clean, dry cloth.  
To fasten the seat belt, see “Fastening the seat  
belts” earlier in this section.  
WARNING  
Periodically check to see that the seat  
belt and the metal components, such as  
buckles, tongues, retractors, flexible wires  
and anchors, work properly. If loose parts,  
deterioration, cuts or other damage on the  
webbing is found, the entire seat belt  
assembly should be replaced.  
WARNING  
.
.
.
Only NISSAN seat belt extenders,  
made by the same company which  
made the original equipment seat  
belts, should be used with NISSAN  
seat belts.  
.
.
When attaching the rear center seat  
belt connector, be certain that the  
seatbacks are completely secured in  
the latched position and the rear  
center seat belt connector is com-  
pletely secured.  
Adults and children who can use the  
standard seat belt should not use an  
extender. Such unnecessary use  
could result in serious personal  
injury in the event of an accident.  
If the rear center seat belt connector  
and the seatbacks are not secured  
in the correct position, serious per-  
sonal injury may result in an acci-  
dent or sudden stop.  
Never use seat belt extenders to  
install child restraints. If the child  
restraint is not secured properly, the  
child could be seriously injured in a  
collision or a sudden stop.  
1-22 Safety — Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
CHILD RESTRAINTS  
PRECAUTIONS ON CHILD  
RESTRAINTS  
seat. According to accident statis-  
tics, children are safer when prop-  
erly restrained in the rear seat than  
in the front seat. If you must install a  
front-facing child restraint in the  
front seat, see “CHILD RESTRAINT  
INSTALLATION USING THE SEAT  
BELTS” later in this section.  
WARNING  
.
.
Infants and small children should  
always be placed in an appropriate  
child restraint while riding in the  
vehicle. Failure to use a child re-  
straint can result in serious injury or  
death.  
.
.
Improper use or improper installa-  
tion of a child restraint can increase  
the risk or severity of injury for both  
the child and other occupants of the  
vehicle and can lead to serious  
injury or death in an accident.  
Infants and small children should  
never be carried on your lap. It is not  
possible for even the strongest  
adult to resist the forces of a severe  
accident. The child could be crushed  
between the adult and parts of the  
vehicle. Also, do not put the same  
seat belt around both your child and  
yourself.  
SSS0099  
Follow all of the child restraint  
manufacturer’s instructions for in-  
stallation and use. When purchasing  
a child restraint, be sure to select  
one which will fit your child and  
vehicle. It may not be possible to  
properly install some types of child  
restraints in your vehicle.  
.
.
Even with the NISSAN Advanced Air  
Bag System, never install a rear-  
facing child restraint in the front  
seat. An inflating front air bag could  
seriously injure or kill your child. A  
rear-facing child restraint must only  
be used in the rear seat.  
.
.
If the child restraint is not anchored  
properly, the risk of a child being  
injured in a collision or a sudden  
stop greatly increases.  
Child restraint anchor points are  
designed to withstand only those  
NISSAN recommends that the child  
restraint be installed in the rear  
SSS0100  
Safety — Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1-23  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Vehicle Safety Standard 213.  
loads imposed by correctly fitted  
child restraints. Under no circum-  
stances are they to be used for adult  
seat belts or harnesses.  
CAUTION  
.
.
Check the child restraint in your vehicle to  
be sure it is compatible with the vehicle’s  
seat and seat belt system.  
Remember that a child restraint left in a  
closed vehicle can become very hot.  
Check the seating surface and buckles  
before placing your child in the child  
restraint.  
.
.
Adjustable seatbacks should be  
positioned to fit the child restraint,  
but as upright as possible.  
If the child restraint is compatible with your  
vehicle, place your child in the child restraint  
and check the various adjustments to be  
sure the child restraint is compatible with  
your child. Choose a child restraint that is  
designed for your child’s height and weight.  
Always follow all recommended procedures.  
After attaching the child restraint,  
test it before you place the child in  
it. Push it from side to side while  
holding the seat near the LATCH  
attachment or near the seat belt  
path. The child restraint should not  
move more than 1 inch (25 mm) from  
side to side. Try to tug it forward and  
check to see if the belt holds the  
restraint in place. If the restraint is  
not secure, tighten the belt as  
necessary, or put the restraint in  
another seat and test it again. You  
may need to try a different child  
restraint. Not all child restraints fit  
in all types of vehicles.  
This vehicle is equipped with a universal child  
restraint lower anchor system, referred to as the  
Lower Anchors and Tethers for CHildren System  
or LATCH. Some child restraints include two  
rigid or webbing-mounted attachments that can  
be connected to these lower anchors. For  
details, see “Lower Anchors and Tethers for  
CHildren System (LATCH) (except for Cargo  
Van models)” later in this section.  
All U.S. states and Canadian provinces or  
territories require that infants and small  
children be restrained in an approved child  
restraint at all times while the vehicle is  
being operated. Canadian law requires the  
top tether strap on front-facing child  
restraints be secured to the designated  
anchor point on the vehicle.  
If you do not have a LATCH compatible child  
restraint, the vehicle seat belts can be used.  
(See “CHILD RESTRAINT INSTALLATION  
USING THE SEAT BELTS” later in this section.)  
In general, child restraints are also designed to  
be installed with a lap/shoulder seat belt.  
Lower Anchors and Tethers for CHildren  
System (LATCH) (except for Cargo Van  
models)  
Several manufacturers offer child restraints for  
infants and small children of various sizes. When  
selecting any child restraint, keep the following  
points in mind:  
Your vehicle is equipped with special anchor  
points that are used with Lower Anchors and  
Tethers for CHildren System (LATCH) compa-  
tible child restraints. This system may also be  
referred to as the ISOFIX or ISOFIX compatible  
system. With this system, you do not have to use  
a vehicle seat belt to secure the child restraint.  
.
When your child restraint is not in  
use, keep it secured with the LATCH  
system or a seat belt to prevent it  
from being thrown around in case of  
a sudden stop or accident.  
.
Choose only a restraint with a label certifying  
that it complies with Federal Motor Vehicle  
Safety Standard 213 or Canadian Motor  
1-24 Safety — Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
The LATCH anchor points are provided to install  
child restraints in the rear outboard seating  
positions only. Do not attempt to install a child  
restraint in the center position using the LATCH  
anchors.  
LATCH lower anchor point locations  
The LATCH anchors are located at the rear of  
the seat cushion near the seatback. A label is  
attached to the seatback to help you locate the  
LATCH anchors.  
WARNING  
.
Attach LATCH system compatible  
child restraints only at the locations  
shown in the illustration. If a child  
restraint is not secured properly,  
your child could be seriously injured  
or killed in an accident.  
SSS0801  
LATCH system anchor location  
.
.
Do not secure a child restraint in the  
center rear seating position using  
the LATCH anchors. The child re-  
straint will not be secured properly.  
Child restraint anchor points are  
designed to withstand only those  
loads imposed by correctly fitted  
child restraints. Under no circum-  
stances are they to be used for adult  
seat belts or harnesses.  
SSS0637  
LATCH system lower anchor  
Safety — Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1-25  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
TOP TETHER STRAP CHILD RE-  
STRAINT  
If the manufacturer of your child restraint  
requires the use of a top tether strap, it must  
be secured to an anchor point.  
WARNING  
.
.
Child restraint anchor points are  
designed to withstand only those  
loads imposed by correctly fitted  
child restraints. Under no circum-  
stances are they to be used for adult  
seat belts or harnesses.  
SSS0643  
LATCH webbing-mounted attachment  
SSS0644  
LATCH rigid-mounted attachment  
If the cargo cover contacts the top  
tether strap when it is attached to  
the top tether anchor, remove the  
cargo cover from the vehicle or  
secure it on the cargo floor below  
its attachment location. If the cargo  
cover is not removed, it may da-  
mage the top tether strap during a  
collision. Your child could be ser-  
iously injured or killed in a collision  
if the child restraint top tether strap  
is damaged.  
LATCH child restraints generally require the use  
of a top tether strap. (See “TOP TETHER  
STRAP CHILD RESTRAINT” later in this section  
for installation instructions.)  
Installing child restraint LATCH anchor  
attachments  
LATCH compatible child restraints include two  
rigid or webbing-mounted attachments that can  
be connected to two anchors located at certain  
seating positions in your vehicle. With this  
system, you do not have to use a vehicle seat  
belt to secure the child restraint. Check your  
child restraint for a label stating that it is  
compatible with LATCH system. This information  
may also be in the instructions provided by the  
child restraint manufacturer.  
When installing a child restraint, carefully read  
and follow the instructions in this manual and  
those supplied with the child restraint. (See  
“CHILD RESTRAINT INSTALLATION USING  
LATCH (except for Cargo Van models)” later in  
this section.)  
.
Do not allow cargo to contact the  
top tether strap when it is attached  
to the top tether anchor. Properly  
1-26 Safety — Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
secure the cargo so it does not  
contact the top tether strap. Cargo  
that is not properly secured or that  
contacts the top tether strap may  
damage the top tether strap during  
a collision. Your child could be  
seriously injured or killed in a colli-  
sion if the child restraint top tether  
strap is damaged.  
Top tether anchor point locations  
Anchor points are located in the following  
locations.  
SSS0986  
SSS0967  
.
.
On the seat cushion behind the outboard  
and center seating positions (except for  
Cargo Van models)  
Rear seats (except for Cargo Van models):  
WARNING  
1. Position the top tether strap over the top of  
the seatback and under the headrest.  
On the floor behind the front passenger seat  
(Cargo Van models)  
Do not attach upper tether anchors to  
the luggage hooks. The child restraint  
will not be properly installed. Your child  
could be injured or killed in a sudden  
stop or collision.  
2. Secure the tether strap to the tether anchor  
on the seat directly behind the child  
restraint.  
3. Tighten the tether strap according to the  
manufacturer’s instructions to remove any  
slack.  
Installing top tether strap  
First secure the child restraint with the LATCH  
system (except for Cargo Van models: rear  
outboard seating positions only) or the seat belt  
as applicable.  
For the best child restraint fit, see the child  
restraint installation instructions in this section  
and the child restraint manufacturer’s instruc-  
tions.  
Safety — Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1-27  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
If you have any questions when installing a  
top tether strap child restraint on the rear  
seat, consult your NISSAN dealer for de-  
tails.  
For the best child restraint fit, see the child  
restraint installation instructions in this section  
and the child restraint manufacturer’s instruc-  
tions.  
If you have any questions when installing a  
top tether strap child restraint on the front  
passenger’s seat, consult your NISSAN  
dealer for details.  
CHILD RESTRAINT INSTALLATION  
USING LATCH (except for Cargo Van  
models)  
SSS1039  
WARNING  
.
Attach LATCH system compatible  
child restraints only at the locations  
shown. For the LATCH lower anchor  
locations, see “Lower Anchors and  
Tethers for CHildren System  
(LATCH) (except for Cargo Van mod-  
els)” earlier in this section. If a child  
restraint is not secured properly,  
your child could be seriously injured  
or killed in an accident.  
Front passenger seat (Cargo Van models):  
For the front passenger seat in Cargo Van  
models, install the top tether strap according to  
the following procedure.  
1. Adjust the head restraint to its highest  
position.  
2. Route the top tether strap between the head  
restraint and the top of the seatback.  
3. Secure the tether strap to the tether anchor  
point on the floor behind the seat.  
.
The LATCH anchors are designed to  
withstand only those loads imposed  
by correctly fitted child restraints.  
Under no circumstance are they to  
be used for adult seat belts or  
4. Tighten the tether strap according to the  
manufacturer’s instructions to remove any  
slack.  
1-28 Safety — Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
harnesses.  
.
Inspect the lower anchors by insert-  
ing your fingers into the lower  
anchor area and feeling to make  
sure there are no obstructions over  
the LATCH anchors, such as seat  
belt webbing or seat cushion mate-  
rial. The child restraint will not be  
secured properly if the LATCH an-  
chors are obstructed.  
Front-facing  
Follow these steps to install a front-facing child  
restraint using LATCH system:  
SSS0645  
Front-facing (webbing-mounted) — step 3  
SSS0646  
Front-facing (rigid-mounted) — step 3  
3. Secure the child restraint anchor attach-  
ments to the LATCH lower anchors. Check  
to make sure the LATCH attachment is  
properly attached to the lower anchors.  
1. Adjust the rear seat to the upright and  
rearmost position.  
2. Position the child restraint on the seat.  
Always follow the child restraint manufac-  
turer’s instructions.  
Safety — Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1-29  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
4. The back of the child restraint should be  
secured against the seatback.  
If necessary, remove the headrest to obtain  
the correct child restraint fit. (See “ADJUS-  
TABLE HEADRESTS” earlier in this sec-  
tion.)  
If the headrest is removed, store it in a  
secure place. Be sure to reinstall the  
headrest when the child restraint is re-  
moved. If the seating position does not have  
a removal headrest and it is interfering with  
the proper child restraint fit, try another  
seating position or a different child restraint.  
SSS0647  
SSS0638  
Front-facing — step 5  
Front-facing — step 7  
5. For child restraints that are equipped with  
webbing-mounted attachments, remove any  
additional slack from the anchor attach-  
ments. Press downward and rearward firmly  
in the center of the child restraint with your  
knee to compress the vehicle seat cushion  
and seatback while tightening the webbing  
of the anchor attachments.  
7. After attaching the child restraint, test it  
before you place the child in it. Push it from  
side to side while holding the seat near the  
LATCH attachment path. The child restraint  
should not move more than 1 inch (25 mm)  
from side to side. Try to tug it forward and  
check to see if the LATCH attachment holds  
the restraint in place. If the restraint is not  
secure, tighten the LATCH attachment as  
necessary, or put the restraint in another  
seat and test it again. You may need to try a  
different child restraint. Not all child re-  
straints fit in all types of vehicles.  
6. If the child restraint is equipped with a top  
tether strap, route the top tether strap and  
secure the tether strap to the tether anchor  
point. (See “TOP TETHER STRAP CHILD  
RESTRAINT” earlier in this section.)  
1-30 Safety — Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
8. Check to make sure the child restraint is  
properly secured prior to each use. If the  
child restraint is loose, repeat steps 3  
through 7.  
Rear-facing  
Follow these steps to install a rear-facing child  
restraint using LATCH system:  
1. Adjust the rear seat to the upright and  
rearmost position.  
2. Position the child restraint on the seat.  
Always follow the child restraint manufac-  
turer’s instructions.  
SSS0648  
Rear-facing (webbing-mounted) — step 3  
SSS0649  
Rear-facing (rigid-mounted) — step 3  
3. Secure the child restraint anchor attach-  
ments to the LATCH lower anchors. Check  
to make sure the LATCH attachment is  
properly attached to the lower anchors.  
Safety — Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1-31  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
6. Check to make sure the child restraint is  
properly secured prior to each use. If the  
child restraint is loose, repeat steps 3  
through 5.  
SSS0639  
SSS0650  
Rear-facing — step 4  
Rear-facing — step 5  
4. For child restraints that are equipped with  
webbing-mounted attachments, remove any  
additional slack from the anchor attach-  
ments. Press downward and rearward firmly  
in the center of the child restraint with your  
hand to compress the vehicle seat cushion  
and seatback while tightening the webbing  
of the anchor attachments.  
5. After attaching the child restraint, test it  
before you place the child in it. Push it from  
side to side while holding the seat near the  
LATCH attachment path. The child restraint  
should not move more than 1 inch (25 mm)  
from side to side. Try to tug it forward and  
check to see if the LATCH attachment holds  
the restraint in place. If the restraint is not  
secure, tighten the LATCH attachment as  
necessary, or put the restraint in another  
seat and test it again. You may need to try a  
different child restraint. Not all child re-  
straints fit in all types of vehicles.  
1-32 Safety — Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
However, if you must install a front-  
facing child restraint in the front  
passenger seat, move the passen-  
ger seat to the rearmost position.  
Also, be sure the front passenger air  
bag status light is illuminated to  
indicate the passenger air bag is  
OFF. See “Front passenger air bag  
and status light” later in this section  
for details.  
.
A child restraint with a top tether  
strap should not be used in the front  
passenger seat (except for Cargo  
Van models).  
The instructions in this section apply to child  
restraint installation using the vehicle seat belts  
in the rear seat or the front passenger seat.  
.
.
The three-point seat belt in your  
vehicle is equipped with an Auto-  
matic Locking Retractor (ALR) which  
must be used when installing a child  
restraint.  
SSS0100  
CHILD RESTRAINT INSTALLATION  
USING THE SEAT BELTS  
Failure to use the ALR mode will  
result in the child restraint not being  
properly secured. The restraint  
could tip over or otherwise be un-  
secured and cause injury to the child  
in a sudden stop or collision.  
WARNING  
.
Even with the NISSAN Advanced Air  
Bag System, never install a rear-  
facing child restraint in the front  
passenger seat. Front air bags in-  
flate with great force. A rear-facing  
child restraint could be struck by the  
front air bag in a crash and could  
seriously injure or kill your child.  
.
When using the rear center seat belt  
to install a child restraint, make sure  
the connector tongue and the seat  
belt tongue are secured. Do not use  
the seat belt with only the seat belt  
tongue attached. This could result in  
serious personal injury in case of an  
accident or sudden stop.  
.
NISSAN recommends that child re-  
straints be installed in the rear seat.  
Safety — Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1-33  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
2. Position the child restraint on the seat.  
Always follow the child restraint manufac-  
turer’s instructions.  
The back of the child restraint should be  
secured against the seatback.  
If necessary, adjust the head restraint (front  
passenger seat only) or remove the head  
restraint/headrest to obtain the correct child  
restraint fit. (See “HEAD RESTRAINTS”  
earlier in this section and “ADJUSTABLE  
HEADRESTS” earlier in this section.)  
If the head restraint/headrest is removed,  
store it in a secure place. Be sure to reinstall  
the head restraint/headrest when the child  
restraint is removed.  
SSS0640  
Front-facing (front passenger seat) — step 1  
SSS0360B  
Front-facing — step 3  
3. Route the seat belt tongue through the child  
restraint and insert it into the buckle until you  
hear and feel the latch engage. Be sure to  
follow the child restraint manufacturer’s  
instructions for belt routing.  
Front-facing  
Follow these steps to install a front-facing child  
restraint using the vehicle seat belt in the rear  
seat (except for Cargo Van models) or in the  
front passenger seat:  
If the seating position does not have a  
removable head restraint/headrest and it is  
interfering with the proper child restraint fit,  
try another seating position or a different  
child restraint.  
1. Adjust the rear seat to the upright and  
rearmost position.  
If you must install a child restraint in  
the front seat, it should be placed in a  
front-facing direction only. Move the  
seat to the rearmost position. Child  
restraints for infants must be used in  
the rear-facing direction and therefore  
must not be used in the front seat.  
1-34 Safety — Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
SSS0651  
SSS0652  
SSS0653  
Front-facing — step 4  
Front-facing — step 5  
Front-facing — step 6  
4. Pull the shoulder belt until the belt is fully  
extended. At this time, the seat belt retractor  
is in the Automatic Locking Retractor (ALR)  
mode (child restraint mode). It reverts to the  
Emergency Locking Retractor (ELR) mode  
when the seat belt is fully retracted.  
5. Allow the seat belt to retract. Pull up on the  
shoulder belt to remove any slack in the belt.  
6. Remove any additional slack from the seat  
belt; press downward and rearward firmly in  
the center of the child restraint with your  
knee to compress the vehicle seat cushion  
and seatback while pulling up on the seat  
belt.  
7. If the child restraint is equipped with a top  
tether strap, route the top tether strap and  
secure the tether strap to the tether anchor  
point. (See “TOP TETHER STRAP CHILD  
RESTRAINT” earlier in this section.) Do not  
install child restraints that require the use of  
a top tether strap to seating positions that  
do not have a top tether anchor.  
Safety — Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1-35  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
9. Check that the retractor is in the ALR mode  
by trying to pull more seat belt out of the  
retractor. If you cannot pull any more belt  
webbing out of the retractor, the retractor is  
in the ALR mode.  
10. Check to make sure the child restraint is  
properly secured prior to each use. If the  
seat belt is not locked, repeat steps 3  
through 9.  
SSS0641  
SSS0481  
Front-facing — step 8  
Front-facing — step 11  
8. After attaching the child restraint, test it  
before you place the child in it. Push it from  
side to side while holding the seat near the  
seat belt path. The child restraint should not  
move more than 1 inch (25 mm) from side to  
side. Try to tug it forward and check to see if  
the belt holds the restraint in place. If the  
restraint is not secure, tighten the belt as  
necessary, or put the restraint in another  
seat and test it again. You may need to try a  
different child restraint. Not all child re-  
straints fit in all types of vehicles.  
11. If the child restraint is installed in the front  
passenger seat, place the ignition switch in  
the ON position. The front passenger air bag  
status light  
should illuminate. If this  
light is not illuminated, see “Front passenger  
air bag and status light” later in this section.  
Move the child restraint to another  
seating position. Have the system  
checked by a NISSAN dealer.  
After the child restraint is removed and the seat  
belt is fully retracted, the ALR mode (child  
restraint mode) is canceled.  
1-36 Safety — Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
SSS0100  
SSS0654  
SSS0655  
Rear-facing — step 2  
Rear-facing — step 3  
Rear-facing  
2. Route the seat belt tongue through the child  
restraint and insert it into the buckle until you  
hear and feel the latch engage. Be sure to  
follow the child restraint manufacturer’s  
instructions for belt routing.  
3. Pull the shoulder belt until the belt is fully  
extended. At this time, the seat belt retractor  
is in the Automatic Locking Retractor (ALR)  
mode (child restraint mode). It reverts to the  
Emergency Locking Retractor (ELR) mode  
when the seat belt is fully retracted.  
Follow these steps to install a rear-facing child  
restraint using the vehicle seat belt in the rear  
seat (except for Cargo Van models):  
1. Child restraints for infants must be  
used in the rear-facing direction and  
therefore must not be used in the front  
seat.  
Adjust the rear seat to the upright and  
rearmost position. Position the child restraint  
on the seat. Always follow the restraint  
manufacturer’s instructions.  
Safety — Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1-37  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
SSS0656  
SSS0657  
SSS0658  
Rear-facing — step 4  
Rear-facing — step 5  
Rear-facing — step 6  
4. Allow the seat belt to retract. Pull up on the  
shoulder belt to remove any slack in the belt.  
5. Remove any additional slack from the child  
restraint; press downward and rearward  
firmly in the center of the child restraint with  
your hand to compress the vehicle seat  
cushion and seatback while pulling up on  
the seat belt.  
6. After attaching the child restraint, test it  
before you place the child in it. Push it from  
side to side while holding the seat near the  
seat belt path. The child restraint should not  
move more than 1 inch (25 mm) from side to  
side. Try to tug it forward and check to see if  
the belt holds the restraint in place. If the  
restraint is not secure, tighten the belt as  
necessary, or put the restraint in another  
seat and test it again. You may need to try a  
different child restraint. Not all child re-  
straints fit in all types of vehicles.  
1-38 Safety — Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
BOOSTER SEATS  
7. Check that the retractor is in the ALR mode  
by trying to pull more seat belt out of the  
retractor. If you cannot pull any more seat  
belt webbing out of the retractor, the  
retractor is in the ALR mode.  
between the adult and parts of the  
vehicle. Also, do not put the same  
seat belt around both your child and  
yourself.  
.
NISSAN recommends that the boos-  
ter seat be installed in the rear seat.  
According to accident statistics,  
children are safer when properly  
restrained in the rear seat than in  
the front seat. If you must install a  
booster seat in the front seat, see  
“BOOSTER SEAT INSTALLATION ON  
FRONT PASSENGER SEAT AND  
REAR SEAT” later in this section.  
8. Check to make sure that the child restraint is  
properly secured prior to each use. If the  
seat belt is not locked, repeat steps 3  
through 7.  
After the child restraint is removed and the seat  
belt fully retracted, the ALR mode (child restraint  
mode) is canceled.  
SSS0099  
PRECAUTIONS ON BOOSTER SEATS  
.
.
.
A booster seat must only be in-  
stalled in a seating position that has  
a lap/shoulder belt. Failure to use a  
three-point type seat belt with a  
booster seat can result in a serious  
injury in sudden stop or collision.  
WARNING  
.
.
Infants and small children should  
always be placed in an appropriate  
child restraint while riding in the  
vehicle. Failure to use a child re-  
straint or booster seat can result in  
serious injury or death.  
Improper use or improper installa-  
tion of a booster seat can increase  
the risk or severity of injury for both  
the child and other occupants of the  
vehicle and can lead to serious  
injury or death in an accident.  
Infants and small children should  
never be carried on your lap. It is not  
possible for even the strongest  
adult to resist the forces of a severe  
accident. The child could be crushed  
Do not use towels, books, pillows or  
other items in place of a booster  
Safety — Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1-39  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
seat. Items such as these may move  
during normal driving or a collision  
and result in serious injury or death.  
Booster seats are designed to be  
used with a lap/shoulder belt. Boos-  
ter seats are designed to properly  
route the lap and shoulder portions  
of the seat belt over the strongest  
portions of a child’s body to provide  
the maximum protection during a  
collision.  
make sure the shoulder portion of  
the belt is away from the child’s face  
and neck and the lap portion of the  
belt does not cross the abdomen.  
.
.
Do not put the shoulder belt behind  
the child or under the child’s arm. If  
you must install a booster seat in  
the front seat, see “BOOSTER SEAT  
INSTALLATION ON FRONT PASSEN-  
GER SEAT AND REAR SEAT” later in  
this section.  
.
.
Follow all of the booster seat man-  
ufacturer’s instructions for installa-  
tion and use. When purchasing a  
booster seat, be sure to select one  
which will fit your child and vehicle.  
It may not be possible to properly  
install some types of booster seats  
in your vehicle.  
When your booster seat is not in  
use, keep it secured with a seat belt  
to prevent it from being thrown  
around in case of a sudden stop or  
accident.  
LRS0455  
Booster seats of various sizes are offered by  
several manufacturers. When selecting any  
booster seat, keep the following points in mind:  
.
Choose only a booster seat with a label  
certifying that it complies with Federal Motor  
Vehicle Safety Standard 213 or Canadian  
Motor Vehicle Safety Standard 213.  
CAUTION  
If the booster seat and seat belt is  
not used properly, the risk of a child  
being injured in a collision or a  
sudden stop greatly increases.  
Remember that a booster seat left in a  
closed vehicle can become very hot.  
Check the seating surface and buckles  
before placing your child in the booster  
seat.  
.
Check the booster seat in your vehicle to be  
sure it is compatible with the vehicle’s seat  
and seat belt system.  
.
.
Adjustable seatbacks should be  
positioned to fit the booster seat,  
but as upright as possible.  
After placing the child in the booster  
seat and fastening the seat belt,  
1-40 Safety — Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
BOOSTER SEAT INSTALLATION ON  
FRONT PASSENGER SEAT AND REAR  
SEAT  
WARNING  
NISSAN recommends that booster  
seats be installed in the rear seat.  
However, if you must install a booster  
seat in the front passenger seat, move  
the passenger’s seat to the rearmost  
position.  
LRS0453  
LRS0464  
CAUTION  
.
Make sure the child’s head will be properly  
supported by the booster seat or vehicle  
seat. The seatback must be at or above the  
center of the child’s ears. For example, if a  
1
.
If the booster seat is compatible with your  
vehicle, place your child in the booster seat  
and check the various adjustments to be  
sure the booster seat is compatible with  
your child. Always follow all recommended  
procedures.  
Do not use the lap/shoulder belt Auto-  
matic Locking Retractor (ALR) mode  
when using a booster seat with the  
seat belts.  
low back booster seat  
is chosen, the  
*
vehicle seatback must be at or above the  
center of the child’s ears. If the seatback is  
lower than the center of the child’s ears, a  
2
Follow these steps to install a booster seat in the  
rear seat or in the front passenger seat:  
All U.S. states and Canadian provinces or  
territories require that infants and small  
children be restrained in an approved child  
restraint at all times while the vehicle is  
being operated.  
high back booster seat  
should be used.  
*
The instructions in this section apply to booster  
seat installation in the rear seats or the front  
passenger seat.  
Safety — Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1-41  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
SSS0640  
LRS0451  
LRS0452  
Front passenger seat  
Rear center position  
Rear outboard position  
1. Adjust the rear seat to the upright and  
rearmost position.  
2. Position the booster seat on the seat. Only  
place it in a front-facing direction. Always  
follow the booster seat manufacturer’s  
instructions.  
If necessary, adjust the head restraint (front  
passenger seat only) or remove the head  
restraint/headrest to obtain the correct  
booster seat fit. (See “HEAD RESTRAINTS”  
earlier in this section and “ADJUSTABLE  
HEADRESTS” earlier in this section.)  
If you must install a booster seat in the  
front seat, move the seat to the rear-  
most position.  
3. The booster seat should be positioned on  
the vehicle seat so that it is stable.  
If the head restraint/headrest is removed,  
store it in a secure place. Be sure to reinstall  
the head restraint/headrest when the boos-  
ter seat is removed.  
If the seating position does not have a  
removable head restraint/headrest and it is  
interfering with the proper booster seat fit,  
try another seating position or a different  
booster seat.  
1-42 Safety — Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
6. Follow the warnings, cautions and instruc-  
tions for properly fastening a seat belt  
shown in the “THREE-POINT TYPE SEAT  
BELT” earlier in this section.  
LRS0454  
SSS0481  
Front passenger seat  
7. If the booster seat is installed in the front  
passenger seat, place the ignition switch in  
the ON position. The front passenger air bag  
4. Position the lap portion of the seat belt low  
and snug on the child’s hips. Be sure to  
follow the booster seat manufacturer’s  
instructions for adjusting the seat belt  
routing.  
status light  
may or may not be  
illuminated depending on the size of the  
child and the type of booster seat used.  
(See “Front passenger air bag and status  
light” later in this section.)  
5. Pull the shoulder belt portion of the seat belt  
toward the retractor to take up extra slack.  
Be sure the shoulder belt is positioned  
across the top, middle portion of the child’s  
shoulder. Be sure to follow the booster seat  
manufacturer’s instructions for adjusting the  
seat belt routing.  
Safety — Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1-43  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
SUPPLEMENTAL RESTRAINT  
SYSTEM  
cushion the impact force to the head of  
occupants in front and rear outboard seating  
positions in certain side impact collisions. The  
curtain air bags are designed to inflate on the  
side where the vehicle is impacted.  
PRECAUTIONS ON SUPPLEMENTAL  
RESTRAINT SYSTEM  
This Supplemental Restraint System (SRS)  
section contains important information concern-  
ing the following systems:  
These supplemental restraint systems are de-  
signed to supplement the crash protection  
provided by the driver and passenger seat belts  
and are not a substitute for them. Seat belts  
should always be correctly worn and the  
occupant seated a suitable distance away from  
the steering wheel, instrument panel and door  
finishers. (See “SEAT BELTS” earlier in this  
section for instructions and precautions on seat  
belt usage.)  
.
Driver and passenger supplemental front-  
impact air bag (NISSAN Advanced Air Bag  
System)  
.
.
.
Front seat-mounted side-impact supple-  
mental air bag  
Roof-mounted curtain side-impact supple-  
mental air bag  
Seat belt with pretensioner  
The supplemental air bags operate only  
when the ignition switch is in the ON  
position.  
Supplemental front-impact air bag system:  
The NISSAN Advanced Air Bag System can  
help cushion the impact force to the head and  
chest of the driver and front passenger in certain  
frontal collisions.  
After the ignition is placed in the ON  
position, the supplemental air bag warning  
light illuminates. The supplemental air bag  
warning light will turn off after about 7  
seconds if the systems are operational.  
Front seat-mounted side-impact supple-  
mental air bag system: This system can help  
cushion the impact force to the chest and pelvic  
area of the driver and front passenger in certain  
side impact collisions. The side air bag is  
designed to inflate on the side where the vehicle  
is impacted.  
Roof-mounted curtain side-impact supple-  
mental air bag system: This system can help  
1-44 Safety — Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
WARNING  
.
The front air bags ordinarily will not  
inflate in the event of a side impact,  
rear impact, rollover, or lower se-  
verity frontal collision. Always wear  
your seat belts to help reduce the  
risk or severity of injury in various  
kinds of accidents.  
.
.
The front passenger air bag will not  
inflate if the passenger air bag  
status light is lit or if the front  
passenger seat is unoccupied. See  
“Front passenger air bag and status  
light” later in this section.  
SSS0131  
The seat belts and the front air bags  
are most effective when you are  
sitting well back and upright in the  
seat with both feet on the floor. The  
front air bags inflate with great  
force. Even with the NISSAN Ad-  
vanced Air Bag System, if you are  
unrestrained, leaning forward, sit-  
ting sideways or out of position in  
any way, you are at greater risk of  
injury or death in a crash. You may  
also receive serious or fatal injuries  
from the front air bag if you are up  
against it when it inflates. Always sit  
SSS0132  
Safety — Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1-45  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
back against the seatback and as  
far-away as practical from the steer-  
ing wheel or instrument panel. Al-  
ways use the seat belts.  
crease the risk that they are injured  
if the front air bag inflates.  
.
The driver and front passenger seat  
belt buckles are equipped with  
sensors that detect if the seat belts  
are fastened. The Advanced Air Bag  
System monitors the severity of a  
collision and seat belt usage then  
inflates the air bags. Failure to  
properly wear seat belts can in-  
crease the risk or severity of injury  
in an accident.  
SSS0007  
.
The front passenger seat is  
equipped with occupant classifica-  
tion sensors (weight sensors) that  
turn the front passenger air bag  
OFF under some conditions. This  
sensor is only used in this seat.  
Failure to be properly seated and  
wearing the seat belt can increase  
the risk or severity of injury in an  
accident. See “Front passenger air  
bag and status light” later in this  
section.  
.
Keep hands on the outside of the  
steering wheel. Placing them inside  
the steering wheel rim could in-  
SSS0006  
1-46 Safety — Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
WARNING  
.
.
Never let children ride unrestrained  
or extend their hands or face out of  
the window. Do not attempt to hold  
them in your lap or arms. Some  
examples of dangerous riding posi-  
tions are shown in the illustrations.  
Children may be severely injured or  
killed when the front air bags, side  
air bags or curtain air bags inflate if  
they are not properly restrained.  
Pre-teens and children should be  
properly restrained in the rear seat,  
if possible.  
SSS0008  
SSS0099  
.
Even with the NISSAN Advanced Air  
Bag System, never install a rear-  
facing child restraint in the front  
seat. An inflating front air bag could  
seriously injure or kill your child.  
See “CHILD RESTRAINTS” earlier in  
this section for details.  
SSS0009  
SSS0100  
Safety — Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1-47  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
SSS0059A  
Do not lean against doors or windows.  
SSS0140  
SSS0159  
WARNING  
Front seat-mounted side-impact sup-  
plemental air bags and roof-mounted  
curtain side-impact supplemental air  
bags:  
.
The side air bags and curtain air  
bags ordinarily will not inflate in the  
event of a frontal impact, rear im-  
pact, rollover or lower severity side  
collision. Always wear your seat  
belts to help reduce the risk or  
severity of injury in various kinds  
of accidents.  
SSS0188A  
SSS0162  
1-48 Safety — Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
.
The seat belts, the side air bags and  
curtain air bags are most effective  
when you are sitting well back and  
upright in the seat. The side air bag  
and curtain air bag inflate with great  
force. Do not allow anyone to place  
their hand, leg or face near the side  
air bag on the side of the seatback  
of the front seat or near the side  
roof rails. Do not allow anyone  
sitting in the front seats or rear  
outboard seats to extend their hand  
out of the window or lean against  
the door. Some examples of dan-  
gerous riding positions are shown  
in the previous illustrations.  
.
When sitting in the rear seat, do not  
hold onto the seatback of the front  
seat. If the side air bag inflates, you  
may be seriously injured. Be espe-  
cially careful with children, who  
should always be properly re-  
strained. Some examples of danger-  
ous riding positions are shown in  
the illustrations.  
SSS1049  
1. Crash zone sensor  
6. Roof-mounted curtain side-impact supplemental  
air bags modules  
2. Supplemental front-impact air bag modules  
7. Roof-mounted curtain side-impact supplemental  
air bag inflators  
3. Front seat-mounted side-impact supplemental air  
bag modules  
.
Do not use seat covers on the front  
seatbacks. They may interfere with  
side air bag inflation.  
8. Seat belt with pretensioners  
9. Satellite sensors  
4. Occupant classification sensors (weight sensors)  
5. Occupant classification system control unit  
10. Air bag Control Unit (ACU)  
Safety — Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1-49  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
NISSAN ADVANCED AIR BAG SYS-  
TEM (front seats)  
passenger, the occupant classification sensors  
are also monitored. Based on information from  
the sensors, only one front air bag may inflate in  
a crash, depending on the crash severity and  
whether the front occupants are belted or  
unbelted. Additionally, the front passenger air  
bag may be automatically turned OFF under  
some conditions, depending on the information  
provided by the occupant classification sensors.  
If the front passenger air bag is OFF, the  
passenger air bag status light will be illuminated  
(if the seat is unoccupied, the light will not be  
illuminated, but the air bag will be off). (See  
“Front passenger air bag and status light” later  
in this section for further details.) One front air  
bag inflating does not indicate improper perfor-  
mance of the system.  
occupant classification system is  
working properly, position the occu-  
pants in the rear seating positions.  
WARNING  
This vehicle is equipped with the NISSAN  
Advanced Air Bag System for the driver and  
front passenger seats. This system is designed  
to meet certification requirements under U.S.  
regulations. It is also permitted in Canada.  
However, all of the information, cautions  
and warnings in this manual still apply and  
must be followed.  
To ensure proper operation of the  
passenger’s advanced air bag system,  
please observe the following items.  
.
Do not allow a passenger in the rear  
seat to push or pull on the seatback  
pocket.  
.
Do not place heavy loads heavier  
than 2.2 lb (4 kg) on the seatback,  
head restraint or in the seatback  
pocket.  
The driver supplemental front-impact air bag is  
located in the center of the steering wheel. The  
passenger supplemental front-impact air bag is  
mounted in the instrument panel above the glove  
box. The front air bags are designed to inflate in  
higher severity frontal collisions, although they  
may inflate if the forces in another type of  
collision are similar to those of a higher severity  
frontal impact. They may not inflate in certain  
frontal collisions. Vehicle damage (or lack of it) is  
not always an indication of proper front air bag  
operation.  
.
.
.
Do not store luggage behind the  
seat that can press into the seat-  
back.  
If you have any questions about your air bag  
system, contact NISSAN or a NISSAN dealer. If  
you are considering modification of your vehicle  
due to a disability, you may also contact  
NISSAN. Contact information is contained in  
the front of this Owner’s Manual.  
Confirm the operating condition  
with the front passenger air bag  
status light.  
When a front air bag inflates, a fairly loud noise  
may be heard, followed by release of smoke.  
This smoke is not harmful and does not indicate  
a fire. Care should be taken not to inhale it, as it  
may cause irritation and choking. Those with a  
history of a breathing condition should get fresh  
air promptly.  
If you notice that the front passen-  
ger air bag status light is not  
operating, please take your vehicle  
to your NISSAN dealer to check the  
occupant classification system.  
The NISSAN Advanced Air Bag System has  
dual stage air bag inflators. The system monitors  
information from the Air bag Control Unit (ACU),  
seat belt buckle sensors and the occupant  
classification sensors (weight sensors). Inflator  
operation is based on the severity of a collision  
and seat belt usage for the driver. For the front  
.
Until you have confirmed with your  
dealer that your passenger seat  
Front air bags, along with the use of seat belts,  
1-50 Safety — Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
help to cushion the impact force on the head  
and chest of the front occupants. They can help  
save lives and reduce serious injuries. However,  
an inflating front air bag may cause facial  
abrasions or other injuries. Front air bags do  
not provide restraint to the lower body.  
Status light:  
The front passenger air bag status light  
located on the instrument panel. The light  
operates as follows:  
is  
.
Unoccupied passenger seat: The  
light  
is OFF and the front passenger air bag is  
OFF and will not inflate in a crash.  
Even with NISSAN Advanced Air Bags, seat  
belts should be correctly worn and the driver  
and passenger seated upright as far as practical  
away from the steering wheel or instrument  
panel. The front air bags inflate quickly in order  
to help protect the front occupants. Because of  
this, the force of the front air bag inflating can  
increase the risk of injury if the occupant is too  
close to, or is against, the air bag module during  
inflation.  
.
Passenger’s seat occupied by a small adult,  
child or child restraint as outlined in this  
section: The  
light illuminates to indi-  
cate that the front passenger air bag is OFF  
and will not inflate in a crash.  
SSS0481  
Front passenger air bag status light  
.
Occupied passenger seat and the passen-  
ger meets the conditions outlined in this  
Front passenger air bag and status light  
section: The  
light is OFF to indicate  
The front air bags deflate quickly after a collision.  
that the front passenger air bag is opera-  
tional.  
WARNING  
The front air bags operate only when the  
ignition switch is in the ON position.  
Front passenger air bag:  
The front passenger air bag is designed  
to automatically turn OFF under some  
conditions. Read this section carefully  
to learn how it operates. Proper use of  
the seat, seat belt and child restraints is  
necessary for most effective protection.  
Failure to follow all instructions in this  
manual concerning the use of seats,  
seat belts and child restraints can  
increase the risk or severity of injury in  
an accident.  
After the ignition is placed in the ON  
position, the supplemental air bag warning  
light illuminates. The supplemental air bag  
warning light will turn off after about 7  
seconds if the system is operational.  
The front passenger air bag is designed to  
automatically turn OFF when the vehicle is  
operated under some conditions as described  
below as permitted by U.S. regulations. If the  
front passenger air bag is OFF, it will not inflate  
in a crash. The driver air bag and other air bags  
in your vehicle are not part of this system.  
The purpose of the regulation is to help reduce  
the risk of injury or death from an inflating air bag  
to certain front passenger seat occupants, such  
Safety — Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1-51  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
as children, by requiring the air bag to be  
automatically turned OFF.  
occupant classification sensors are designed to  
operate as described above to turn the front  
passenger air bag OFF for specified child  
restraints. Failing to properly secure child  
restrains and to use the Automatic Locking  
Retractor (ALR) mode (child restraint mode)  
may allow the restraint to tip or move in an  
accident or sudden stop. This can also result in  
the passenger air bag inflating in a crash instead  
of being OFF. (See “CHILD RESTRAINTS”  
earlier in this section for proper use and  
installation.)  
that the person is a small adult, or is not sitting  
on the seat properly.  
The occupant classification sensors (weight  
sensors) are on the seat cushion frame under  
the front passenger seat and are designed to  
detect an occupant and objects on the seat. For  
example, if a child is in the front passenger seat,  
the Advanced Air Bag System is designed to  
turn the passenger air bag OFF in accordance  
with the regulations. Also, if a child restraint of  
the type specified in the regulations is on the  
seat, the occupant classification sensors can  
detect it and cause the air bag to turn OFF.  
If a child restraint must be used in the front seat,  
the passenger air bag status light may or may  
not be illuminated, depending on the size of the  
child and the type of child restraint being used. If  
the air bag status light is not illuminated  
(indicating that the air bag might inflate in a  
crash), it could be that the child restraint or seat  
belt is not being used properly. Make sure that  
the child restraint is installed properly, the seat  
belt is used properly and the occupant is  
positioned properly. If the air bag status light is  
not illuminated, reposition the occupant or child  
restraint in a rear seat.  
If the front passenger seat is not occupied, the  
passenger air bag is designed not to inflate in a  
crash. However, heavy objects placed on the  
seat could result in air bag inflation, because of  
the object being detected by the occupant  
classification sensors. Other conditions could  
also result in air bag inflation, such as if a child is  
standing on the seat, or if two children are on the  
seat, contrary to the instructions in this manual.  
Always be sure that you and all vehicle  
occupants are seated and restrained properly.  
Front passenger seat adult occupants who are  
properly seated and using the seat belt as  
outlined in this manual should not cause the  
passenger air bag to be automatically turned  
OFF. For small adults it may be turned OFF,  
however, if the occupant does not sit in the seat  
properly (for example, by not sitting upright, by  
sitting on an edge of the seat, or by otherwise  
being out of position), this could cause the  
sensors to turn the air bag OFF. Always be sure  
to be seated and wearing the seat belt properly  
for the most effective protection by the seat belt  
and supplemental air bag.  
If the passenger air bag status light will not  
illuminate even though you believe that the child  
restraint, the seat belts and the occupant are  
properly positioned, the system may be sensing  
an unoccupied seat (in which case the air bag is  
OFF). Your NISSAN dealer can check that the  
system is OFF by using a special tool. However,  
until you have confirmed with your dealer that  
your air bag is working properly, reposition the  
occupant or child restraint in a rear seat.  
Using the passenger air bag status light, you can  
monitor when the front passenger air bag is  
automatically turned OFF with the seat occu-  
pied. The light will not illuminate when the front  
passenger seat is unoccupied.  
The air bag system and passenger air bag status  
light will take a few seconds to register a change  
in the passenger seat status. However, if the  
seat becomes unoccupied, the air bag status  
light will remain off.  
NISSAN recommends that pre-teens and chil-  
dren be properly restrained in a rear seat.  
NISSAN also recommends that appropriate  
child restraints and booster seats be properly  
installed in a rear seat. If this is not possible, the  
If an adult occupant is in the seat but the  
passenger air bag status light is illuminated  
(indicating that the air bag is OFF), it could be  
1-52 Safety — Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
If a malfunction occurs in the front passenger air  
bag system, the supplemental air bag warning  
(hot steam cleaners) on the seat.  
This can damage the seat or occu-  
pant classification sensors. This can  
also affect the operation of the air  
bag system and result in serious  
personal injury.  
placing material over the steering  
wheel pad and above the instrument  
panel or by installing additional trim  
material around the air bag system.  
light  
, located in the meter and gauges area,  
will blink. Have the system checked by a  
NISSAN dealer.  
.
Modifying or tampering with the  
front passenger seat may result in  
serious personal injury. For exam-  
ple, do not change the front seats by  
placing material on the seat cushion  
or by installing additional trim ma-  
terial, such as seat covers, on the  
seat that is not specifically designed  
to assure proper air bag operation.  
Additionally, do not stow any ob-  
jects under the front passenger seat  
or the seat cushion and seatback.  
Such objects may interfere with the  
proper operation of the occupant  
classification sensors.  
Other supplemental front-impact air bag  
precautions  
.
.
Immediately after inflation, several  
front air bag system components  
will be hot. Do not touch them; you  
may severely burn yourself.  
WARNING  
.
.
Do not place any objects on the  
steering wheel pad or on the instru-  
ment panel. Also, do not place any  
objects between any occupant and  
the steering wheel or instrument  
panel. Such objects may become  
dangerous projectiles and cause  
injury if the front air bags inflate.  
No unauthorized changes should be  
made to any components or wiring  
of the supplemental air bag system.  
This is to prevent accidental infla-  
tion of the supplemental air bag or  
damage to the supplemental air bag  
system.  
.
.
Do not make unauthorized changes  
to your vehicle’s electrical system,  
suspension system or front end  
structure. This could affect proper  
operation of the front air bag sys-  
tem.  
Do not place objects with sharp  
edges on the seat. Also, do not  
place heavy objects on the seat that  
will leave permanent impressions in  
the seat. Such objects can damage  
the seat or occupant classification  
sensors (weight sensors). This can  
affect the operation of the air bag  
system and result in serious perso-  
nal injury.  
.
.
No unauthorized changes should be  
made to any components or wiring  
of the seat belt system. This may  
affect the front air bag system.  
Tampering with the seat belt system  
may result in serious personal in-  
jury.  
Tampering with the front air bag  
system may result in serious perso-  
nal injury. Tampering includes  
changes to the steering wheel and  
the instrument panel assembly by  
Work on and around the front air  
bag system should be done by a  
NISSAN dealer. Installation of elec-  
.
Do not use water or acidic cleaners  
Safety — Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1-53  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
collisions, although they may inflate if the forces  
in another type of collision are similar to those of  
a higher severity side impact. They are designed  
to inflate on the side where the vehicle is  
impacted. They may not inflate in certain side  
collisions on the side where the vehicle is  
impacted.  
trical equipment should also be  
done by a NISSAN dealer. The  
Supplemental Restraint System  
(SRS) wiring harnesses* should not  
be modified or disconnected. Un-  
authorized electrical test equipment  
and probing devices should not be  
used on the air bag system.  
Vehicle damage (or lack of it) is not always an  
indication of proper side air bag and curtain air  
bag operation.  
.
A cracked windshield should be  
replaced immediately by a qualified  
repair facility. A cracked windshield  
could affect the function of the  
supplemental air bag system.  
When the side air bags and curtain air bags  
inflate, a fairly loud noise may be heard, followed  
by release of smoke. This smoke is not harmful  
and does not indicate a fire. Care should be  
taken not to inhale it, as it may cause irritation  
and choking. Those with a history of a breathing  
condition should get fresh air promptly.  
SSS0978  
*The SRS wiring harness connectors are  
yellow and orange for easy identification.  
FRONT SEAT-MOUNTED SIDE-IM-  
PACT SUPPLEMENTAL AIR BAG AND  
ROOF-MOUNTED CURTAIN SIDE-IM-  
PACT SUPPLEMENTAL AIR BAG SYS-  
TEMS  
When selling your vehicle, we request that you  
inform the buyer about the front air bag system  
and guide the buyer to the appropriate sections  
in this Owner’s Manual.  
Side air bags, along with the use of seat belts,  
help to cushion the impact force on the chest  
and pelvic area of the front occupants. Curtain  
air bags help to cushion the impact force to the  
head of occupants in the front and rear outboard  
seating positions. They can help save lives and  
reduce serious injuries. However, side air bags  
and curtain air bags may cause abrasions or  
other injuries. Side air bags and curtain air bags  
do not provide restraint to the lower body.  
The side air bags are located in the outside of  
the seatback of the front seats. The curtain air  
bags are located in the side roof rails. These  
systems are designed to meet voluntary guide-  
lines to help reduce the risk of injury to out-of-  
position occupants. However, all of the  
information, cautions and warnings in this  
manual still apply and must be followed.  
The side air bags and curtain air bags are  
designed to inflate in higher severity side  
The seat belts should be correctly worn and the  
driver and passenger seated upright as far as  
practical away from the side air bags. Rear seat  
1-54 Safety — Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
passengers should be seated as far away as  
practical from the door finishers and side roof  
rails. The side air bags and curtain air bags  
inflate quickly in order to help protect the  
occupants in the outboard seating positions.  
Because of this, the force of the side air bags  
and curtain air bags inflating can increase the  
risk of injury if the occupant is too close to, or is  
against, these air bag modules during inflation.  
The side air bags and curtain air bags will deflate  
quickly after the collision is over.  
.
.
Right after inflation, several side air  
bag and curtain air bag system  
components will be hot. Do not  
touch them; you may severely burn  
yourself.  
be done by a NISSAN dealer. In-  
stallation of electrical equipment  
should also be done by a NISSAN  
dealer. The Supplemental Restraint  
System (SRS) wiring harnesses*  
should not be modified or discon-  
nected. Unauthorized electrical test  
equipment and probing devices  
should not be used on the side air  
bag and curtain supplemental air  
bag systems.  
No unauthorized changes should be  
made to any components or wiring  
of the side air bag and curtain air  
bag systems. This is to prevent  
damage to or accidental inflation  
of the side air bag and curtain air  
bag systems.  
The side air bags and curtain air bags  
operate only when the ignition switch is in  
the ON position.  
*The SRS wiring harness connectors are  
yellow and orange for easy identification.  
.
.
Do not make unauthorized changes  
to your vehicle’s electrical system,  
suspension system or side panel.  
This could affect proper operation  
of the side air bag and curtain air  
bag systems.  
After turning the ignition switch to the ON  
position, the supplemental air bag warning  
light illuminates. The supplemental air bag  
warning light will turn off after about 7  
seconds if the systems are operational.  
When selling your vehicle, we request that you  
inform the buyer about the side air bag and  
curtain air bag systems and guide the buyer to  
the appropriate sections in this Owner’s Manual.  
Tampering with the side air bag  
system may result in serious perso-  
nal injury. For example, do not  
change the front seats by placing  
material near the seatbacks or by  
installing additional trim material,  
such as seat covers, around the side  
air bag.  
WARNING  
.
Do not place any objects near the  
seatback of the front seats. Also, do  
not place any objects (an umbrella,  
bag, etc.) between the front door  
finisher and the front seat. Such  
objects may become dangerous  
projectiles and cause injury if a side  
air bag inflates.  
.
Work around and on the side air bag  
and curtain air bag systems should  
Safety — Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1-55  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
SEAT BELTS WITH PRETENSIONERS  
(front seats)  
reduce forces against the chest.  
and probing devices should not be  
used on the pretensioner system.  
If any abnormality occurs in the pretensioner  
system, the supplemental air bag warning light  
will not come on, will flash intermittently or  
will turn on for 7 seconds and remain on after  
the ignition switch has been placed in the ON  
position. In this case, the pretensioner system  
may not function properly and must be checked  
and repaired. Take your vehicle to the nearest  
NISSAN dealer.  
.
If you need to dispose of a preten-  
sioner or scrap the vehicle, contact a  
NISSAN dealer. Correct preten-  
sioner disposal procedures are set  
forth in the appropriate NISSAN  
Service Manual. Incorrect disposal  
procedures could cause personal  
injury.  
WARNING  
.
.
The pretensioners cannot be reused  
after activation. They must be re-  
placed together with the retractor  
and buckle as a unit.  
If the vehicle becomes involved in a  
frontal collision but a pretensioner  
is not activated, be sure to have the  
pretensioner system checked and, if  
necessary, replaced by a NISSAN  
dealer.  
When selling your vehicle, we request that you  
inform the buyer about the pretensioner system  
and guide the buyer to the appropriate sections  
in this Owner’s Manual.  
The pretensioner system activates in conjunc-  
tion with the front air bag system. Working with  
the seat belt retractor, it helps tighten the seat  
belt when the vehicle becomes involved in  
certain types of collisions, helping to restrain  
front seat occupants.  
.
.
No unauthorized changes should be  
made to any components or wiring  
of the pretensioner system. This is  
to prevent damage to or accidental  
activation of the pretensioners.  
Tampering with the pretensioner  
system may result in serious perso-  
nal injury.  
The pretensioner is encased with the seat belt  
retractor. These seat belts are used the same  
way as conventional seat belts.  
When a pretensioner activates, smoke is re-  
leased and a loud noise may be heard. The  
smoke is not harmful and does not indicate a  
fire. Care should be taken not to inhale it, as it  
may cause irritation and choking. Those with a  
history of a breathing condition should get fresh  
air promptly.  
Work around and on the preten-  
sioner system should be done by a  
NISSAN dealer. Installation of elec-  
trical equipment should also be  
done by a NISSAN dealer. Un-  
authorized electrical test equipment  
After pretensioner activation, load limiters allow  
the seat belt to release webbing (if necessary) to  
1-56 Safety — Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
the supplemental air bag warning light illumi-  
nates for about 7 seconds and then turns off.  
This means the system is operational.  
If any of the following conditions occur, the front  
air bag, side air bag, curtain air bag and  
pretensioner systems need servicing:  
.
.
.
The supplemental air bag warning light  
remains on after approximately 7 seconds.  
The supplemental air bag warning light  
flashes intermittently.  
The supplemental air bag warning light does  
not come on at all.  
SSS1020  
SPA1097  
Under these conditions, the front air bag, side air  
bag, curtain air bag and pretensioner systems  
may not operate properly. They must be checked  
and repaired. Take your vehicle to the nearest  
NISSAN dealer.  
SUPPLEMENTAL AIR BAG WARNING  
LABELS  
SUPPLEMENTAL AIR BAG WARNING  
LIGHT  
Warning labels about the supplemental front-  
impact air bag system are placed in the vehicle  
as shown in the illustration.  
The supplemental air bag warning light, display-  
ing  
in the instrument panel, monitors the  
circuits of the supplemental front-impact air bag,  
front seat-mounted side-impact supplemental  
air bag, roof-mounted curtain side-impact sup-  
plemental air bag and seat belt pretensioner  
systems. The monitored circuits include Air bag  
Control Unit (ACU), crash zone sensor, satellite  
sensors, occupant classification system, front air  
bag modules, side air bag modules, curtain air  
bag modules, pretensioners and all related  
wiring.  
1 SRS air bag  
*
The warning labels are located on the surface of  
the sun visors.  
When the ignition switch is in the ON position,  
Safety — Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1-57  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
WARNING  
WARNING  
If the supplemental air bag warning  
light is on, it could mean that the front  
air bag, side air bag, curtain air bag  
and/or pretensioner systems will not  
operate in an accident. To help avoid  
injury to yourself or others, have your  
vehicle checked by a NISSAN dealer as  
soon as possible.  
.
Once a front air bag, side air bag or  
curtain air bag has inflated, the air  
bag module will not function again  
and must be replaced. Additionally,  
if any of the front air bags inflate,  
the activated pretensioners must  
also be replaced. The air bag mod-  
ule and pretensioner should be  
replaced by a NISSAN dealer. The  
air bag modules and pretensioner  
system cannot be repaired.  
REPAIR AND REPLACEMENT PRO-  
CEDURE  
The front air bags, side air bags, curtain air bags  
and pretensioners are designed to activate on a  
one-time-only basis. As a reminder, unless it is  
damaged, the supplemental air bag warning light  
will remain illuminated after inflation has oc-  
curred. Repair and replacement of these sys-  
tems should be done only by a NISSAN dealer.  
.
.
The front air bag, side air bag and  
curtain air bag systems, and preten-  
sioner system should be inspected  
by a NISSAN dealer if there is any  
damage to the front end or side  
portion of the vehicle.  
If you need to dispose of a supple-  
mental air bag or pretensioner or  
scrap the vehicle, contact a NISSAN  
dealer. Correct supplemental air  
bag and pretensioner system dis-  
posal procedures are set forth in the  
appropriate NISSAN Service Man-  
ual. Incorrect disposal procedures  
could cause personal injury.  
When maintenance work is required on the  
vehicle, the front air bags, side air bags, curtain  
air bags and pretensioners and related parts  
should be pointed out to the person performing  
the maintenance. The ignition switch should  
always be in the LOCK position when working  
under the hood or inside the vehicle.  
1-58 Safety — Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
2 Instruments and controls  
Cockpit............................................................ 2-2  
Instrument panel ................................................ 2-3  
Meters and gauges............................................. 2-4  
Speedometer and odometer ............................. 2-5  
Tachometer................................................... 2-6  
Engine coolant temperature gauge ..................... 2-6  
Fuel gauge ................................................... 2-7  
Vehicle information display................................ 2-7  
Outside air temperature (if so equipped).............. 2-7  
Headlight and turn signal switch .......................... 2-23  
Headlight switch .......................................... 2-23  
Turn signal switch ........................................ 2-26  
Fog light switch (if so equipped)...................... 2-27  
Hazard warning flasher switch............................. 2-27  
Horn ............................................................. 2-28  
Vehicle Dynamic Control (VDC) OFF switch ........... 2-28  
Clock (if so equipped)....................................... 2-28  
Adjusting the time ........................................ 2-29  
Resetting the time (Type B) ............................ 2-30  
Power outlet ................................................... 2-31  
Storage ......................................................... 2-31  
Cup holders................................................ 2-31  
Glove box .................................................. 2-33  
Rear pillar pocket......................................... 2-34  
Luggage hooks............................................ 2-34  
Utility hooks (if so equipped)........................... 2-35  
Windows ....................................................... 2-36  
Power windows ........................................... 2-36  
Interior lights................................................... 2-38  
Map lights (if so equipped)............................. 2-38  
Map light control switch (if so equipped) ........... 2-39  
Ceiling light ................................................ 2-39  
Cargo light (if so equipped)................................ 2-40  
Continuously Variable Transmission (CVT)  
position indicator (if so equipped) ...................... 2-8  
Trip computer................................................ 2-8  
Warning/indicator lights and audible reminders ....... 2-10  
Checking bulbs ........................................... 2-10  
Warning lights............................................. 2-10  
Indicator lights............................................. 2-15  
Audible reminders ........................................ 2-17  
Security systems.............................................. 2-17  
Vehicle Security System................................. 2-17  
NISSAN Vehicle Immobilizer System................. 2-19  
Windshield wiper and washer switch .................... 2-20  
Rear window wiper and washer switch.................. 2-22  
Rear window and outside mirror defroster switch..... 2-23  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
COCKPIT  
10. Steering-wheel-mounted controls (right side)*  
— Cruise control switches*  
11. Selector lever or Shift lever  
— Continuously Variable Transmission (CVT)  
— Manual Transmission (MT)  
12. Parking brake  
*: if so equipped  
SSI0563  
1. Front cup holders  
6. Outside mirror remote control switch  
2. Headlight, fog light and turn signal switch  
7. Vehicle Dynamic Control (VDC) OFF switch  
8. Tilting steering wheel lever  
3. Steering wheel  
— Horn  
9. Steering-wheel-mounted controls (left side)*  
— Audio control*  
— Driver’s supplemental air bag  
— Bluetooth® Hands-Free Phone System control*  
4. Wiper and washer switch  
5. Fuse box cover  
2-2 Instruments and controls  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
INSTRUMENT PANEL  
11. Push-button ignition switch (models with Intelli-  
gent Key system)  
12. Heater and air conditioner* control  
— Rear window and outside mirror* defroster  
switch  
13. Utility hooks*  
14. iPod® connector*/USB connector*  
15. Power outlet  
16. Glove box  
*: if so equipped  
SSI0562  
1. Side ventilator  
6. Front passenger air bag status light  
7. Front passenger supplemental air bag  
8. Fuel-filler door release handle  
9. Hood release handle  
2. Meters and gauges  
3. Center ventilator  
4. Hazard warning flasher switch  
5. Audio system*  
— Clock*  
10. Ignition switch (models without Intelligent Key  
system)  
Instruments and controls 2-3  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
METERS AND GAUGES  
*: if so equipped  
The needle indicators may move slightly  
after the ignition switch is placed in the  
OFF or LOCK position. This is not a  
malfunction.  
SIC4119  
1. Tachometer  
5. Speedometer  
2. Engine coolant temperature gauge  
6. Warning/indicator lights  
7. Instrument brightness control knob  
3. Vehicle information display  
— Odometer/twin trip odometer  
— Trip computer  
8. Continuously Variable Transmission (CVT) posi-  
tion indicator*  
— Outside air temperature*  
9. RESET switch for trip odometer/Trip computer  
mode switch  
4. Fuel gauge  
2-4 Instruments and controls  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
For trip computer information, see “TRIP COM-  
PUTER” later in this section.  
Resetting the trip odometer:  
3
Pushing the reset switch  
for approximately 1  
*
second resets the trip odometer to zero.  
SIC4120  
SIC4121  
Speedometer  
Odometer/twin trip odometer  
Odometer/twin trip odometer  
SPEEDOMETER AND ODOMETER  
1
2
The odometer  
/twin trip odometer  
are  
*
*
Speedometer  
displayed when the ignition switch is in the ON  
position.  
The speedometer indicates vehicle speed in  
miles per hour (MPH) and kilometers per hour  
(km/h).  
The odometer records the total distance the  
vehicle has been driven.  
The twin trip odometer records the distance of  
individual trips.  
Changing the display:  
3
Pushing the reset switch  
located on the  
*
meter panel changes the display as follows:  
TRIP A ? TRIP B ? Trip computer mode ?  
TRIP A  
Instruments and controls 2-5  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
CAUTION  
If the gauge indicates engine coolant  
temperature near the hot (H) end of the  
normal range, reduce vehicle speed to  
decrease temperature. If gauge is over  
the normal range, stop the vehicle as  
soon as safely possible. If the engine is  
overheated, continued operation of the  
vehicle may seriously damage the en-  
gine. See “IF YOUR VEHICLE OVER-  
HEATS” in the “6. In case of emergency”  
section for immediate action required.  
SIC4122  
SIC4123  
TACHOMETER  
ENGINE COOLANT TEMPERATURE  
GAUGE  
The tachometer indicates engine speed in  
revolutions per minute (RPM). Do not rev the  
1
*
The gauge  
temperature.  
indicates the engine coolant  
1
engine into the red zone  
.
*
The engine coolant temperature is within the  
normal range when the gauge is within the zone  
CAUTION  
2
*
shown in the illustration.  
When engine speed approaches the red  
zone, shift to a higher gear or reduce  
engine speed. Operating the engine in  
the red zone may cause serious engine  
damage.  
The engine coolant temperature varies with the  
outside air temperature and driving conditions.  
2-6 Instruments and controls  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
The  
indicates that the fuel-filler door is  
located on the front passenger’s side of the  
vehicle.  
CAUTION  
.
.
If the vehicle runs out of fuel, the  
malfunction indicator light  
(MIL) may come on. Refuel as soon  
as possible. After a few driving trips,  
the  
light should turn off. If the  
light remains on after a few driving  
trips, have the vehicle inspected by  
a NISSAN dealer.  
SIC4124  
SIC4125  
For additional information, see  
“Malfunction Indicator Light (MIL)”  
later in this section.  
FUEL GAUGE  
VEHICLE INFORMATION DISPLAY  
1
*
The gauge  
indicates the approximate fuel  
When the ignition switch is placed in the ON  
position, the vehicle information display shows  
the following information:  
level in the tank.  
The gauge may move slightly during braking,  
turning, acceleration, or going up or down hills.  
1. Outside air temperature (if so equipped)  
2. Continuously Variable Transmission (CVT) posi-  
tion indicator (if so equipped)  
Refill the fuel tank before the gauge  
registers 0 (empty).  
3. Odometer/Instrument brightness control display  
4. Twin trip odometer/Trip computer  
The low fuel warning light  
illuminates when  
the amount of fuel in the tank is getting low.  
Refuel as soon as it is convenient, preferably  
before the gauge reaches 0. There will be a  
small reserve of fuel in the tank when the fuel  
gauge reaches 0.  
OUTSIDE AIR TEMPERATURE (if so  
equipped)  
The outside air temperature is displayed in 8F or  
8C.  
Instruments and controls 2-7  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
When the outside air temperature becomes  
378F (38C) or lower, the outside air temperature  
display blinks to give a warning. The display will  
stop blinking after 1 minute or when the outside  
air temperature becomes 398F (48C) or above.  
Current fuel consumption  
The current fuel consumption mode shows the  
current fuel consumption.  
Distance to empty (dte — mls or km)  
The distance to empty (dte) mode provides you  
with an estimation of the distance that can be  
driven before refueling. The dte is constantly  
being calculated, based on the amount of fuel in  
the fuel tank and the actual fuel consumption.  
The display may differ from the actual outside  
temperature displayed on various signs or bill-  
boards.  
CONTINUOUSLY VARIABLE TRANS-  
MISSION (CVT) POSITION INDICATOR  
(if so equipped)  
The display is updated every 30 seconds.  
The dte mode includes a low range warning  
feature. When the fuel level is low, the dte mode  
is automatically selected and the dte display will  
The Continuously Variable Transmission (CVT)  
position indicator indicates the selector lever  
position when the ignition switch is in the ON  
position.  
SIC4126  
A
blink. Push the trip computer mode switch  
*
TRIP COMPUTER  
to return to the mode that was selected before  
the warning occurred.  
The switch for the trip computer is located on  
the meter panel.  
When the fuel level drops even lower, the dte  
display will change to “----”.  
When the ignition switch is placed in the ON  
position, modes of the trip computer can be  
selected by pushing the trip computer mode  
A
.
If the amount of fuel added is small, the  
display just before the ignition switch is  
turned off may continue to be displayed.  
switch  
.
*
A
Each time the trip computer mode switch  
is  
*
.
When driving uphill or rounding curves, the  
fuel in the tank shifts, which may momenta-  
rily change the display.  
pushed, the display will change as follows:  
(TRIP A ? TRIP B) ? Current fuel consumption  
? Distance to empty (dte) ? Average fuel  
consumption ? Average speed ? Elapsed time  
(Canada only) ? Maintenance information  
(Canada only) (? TRIP A)  
2-8 Instruments and controls  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
consumption, average speed, elapsed time and  
trip odometer (TRIP B only) displays will be reset  
at the same time.  
returns to the previous mode and the new  
interval is set.  
Average fuel consumption (mpg or l  
(liter)/100 km)  
If the interval distance is set to 0, the display will  
skip the maintenance information when the  
ignition switch is placed in the ON position.  
The average fuel consumption mode shows the  
average fuel consumption since the last reset.  
Resetting is done by pushing the trip computer  
A
Maintenance information (Canada only)  
When the ignition switch is placed in the ON  
position, maintenance information (the wrench  
mode switch  
for approximately 1 second.  
*
symbol  
and distance to change a main-  
The display is updated every 30 seconds. At  
about the first 1/3 mile (500 m) after a reset, the  
display shows “---”.  
tenance item) comes on for about 5 seconds  
and then turns off.  
The wrench symbol  
distance comes for changing an item, such as  
engine oil.  
appears when the set  
Average speed (mph or km/h)  
The average speed mode shows the average  
vehicle speed since the last reset. Resetting is  
done by pushing the trip computer mode switch  
To set the distance to change an item:  
A
*
for approximately 1 second.  
1. Place the ignition switch in the ON position.  
The display is updated every 30 seconds. The  
first 30 seconds after a reset, the display shows  
“---”.  
A
Push the trip computer mode switch  
for  
*
3 seconds while the wrench symbol  
and maintenance information are displayed.  
The symbol and distance display will start  
flashing and the display shows the current  
interval.  
Elapsed time (Canada only)  
The elapsed time mode shows the time since  
the last reset. The displayed time can be reset  
A
by pushing the trip computer mode switch  
*
A
*
2. Push the switch  
distance.  
to increase the interval  
for approximately 1 second.  
Resetting displays  
When the average fuel consumption, average  
speed, elapsed time or TRIP B is displayed,  
push the trip computer mode switch  
Each step increases the interval distance by  
1,000 km (500 miles). The interval distance  
can be set up to 30,000 km (18,000 miles)  
after the display returns to 0 (zero).  
A
*
for  
longer than 3 seconds. The average fuel  
3. If no further action is made, the display  
Instruments and controls 2-9  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
WARNING/INDICATOR LIGHTS AND  
AUDIBLE REMINDERS  
Low fuel warning light  
High beam indicator light  
Malfunction Indicator Light (MIL)  
Overdrive off indicator light*  
Security indicator light  
Anti-lock Braking System (ABS) warning  
light  
Low tire pressure warning light  
Low washer fluid warning light*  
P position selecting warning light*  
Seat belt warning light  
Brake warning light  
Charge warning light  
Slip indicator light  
Door open warning light  
Supplemental air bag warning light  
Front passenger air bag status light  
Cruise indicator light*  
Low beam indicator light  
Turn signal/hazard indicator lights  
Electric power steering warning light  
Engine oil pressure warning light  
Intelligent Key system warning light*  
Vehicle Dynamic Control (VDC) off indicator  
light  
Engine start operation indicator light*  
*: if so equipped  
off (if so equipped):  
CHECKING BULBS  
WARNING LIGHTS  
,
,
or  
,
,
,
,
,
With all doors closed, apply the parking brake  
and place the ignition switch in the ON position  
without starting the engine. The following lights  
will come on:  
,
or  
Anti-lock Braking System  
(ABS) warning light  
If any light does not come on, it may indicate a  
burned-out bulb or an open circuit in the  
electrical system. Have the system checked by  
a NISSAN dealer.  
When the ignition switch is in the ON position,  
the Anti-lock Braking System (ABS) warning  
light illuminates and then turns off. This indicates  
,
or  
,
,
,
,
The following lights come on briefly and then go  
2-10 Instruments and controls  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
the ABS is operational.  
AND CLUTCH FLUID” in the “8. Mainte-  
nance and do-it-yourself” section.)  
fluid level may increase your stop-  
ping distance and braking will re-  
quire greater pedal effort as well as  
pedal travel.  
If the ABS warning light illuminates while the  
engine is running, or while driving, it may  
indicate the ABS is not functioning properly.  
Have the system checked by a NISSAN dealer.  
2. If the brake fluid level is correct, have the  
warning system checked by a NISSAN  
dealer.  
.
If the brake fluid level is below the  
minimum or MIN mark on the brake  
fluid reservoir, do not drive until the  
brake system has been checked at a  
NISSAN dealer.  
If an ABS malfunction occurs, the anti-lock  
function is turned off. The brake system then  
operates normally, but without anti-lock assis-  
tance. (See “BRAKE SYSTEM” in the “5.  
Starting and driving” section.)  
Anti-lock Braking System (ABS) warning  
indicator:  
When the parking brake is released and the  
brake fluid level is sufficient, if both the brake  
warning light and the Anti-lock Braking System  
(ABS) warning light illuminate, it may indicate  
the ABS is not functioning properly. Have the  
brake system checked, and if necessary re-  
paired, by a NISSAN dealer promptly. (See  
“Anti-lock Braking System (ABS) warning light”  
earlier in this section.)  
Charge warning light  
or  
Brake warning light  
If the light illuminates while the engine is running,  
it may indicate the charging system is not  
functioning properly. Turn the engine off and  
check the alternator belt. If the belt is loose,  
broken, missing or if the light remains on, see a  
NISSAN dealer immediately.  
This light functions for both the parking brake  
and the foot brake systems.  
Parking brake indicator:  
When the ignition switch is in the ON position,  
the light illuminates when the parking brake is  
applied.  
WARNING  
CAUTION  
.
Your brake system may not be  
working properly if the warning light  
is on. Driving could be dangerous. If  
you judge it to be safe, drive care-  
fully to the nearest service station  
for repairs. Otherwise, have your  
vehicle towed because driving it  
could be dangerous.  
Low brake fluid warning light:  
Do not continue driving if the alternator  
belt is loose, broken or missing.  
When the ignition switch is in the ON position,  
the light warns of a low brake fluid level. If the  
light illuminates while the engine is running with  
the parking brake not applied, stop the vehicle  
and perform the following:  
Door open warning light  
This light illuminates when any of the doors and/  
or back door are not closed securely while the  
ignition switch is in the ON position.  
1. Check the brake fluid level. If brake fluid is  
necessary, add fluid and have the system  
checked by a NISSAN dealer. (See “BRAKE  
.
Pressing the brake pedal with the  
engine stopped and/or low brake  
Instruments and controls 2-11  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
pull off the road in a safe area, stop the engine  
immediately and call a NISSAN dealer or other  
authorized repair shop.  
Intelligent Key is inside the vehicle.  
Electric power steering warning  
light  
.
.
The light blinks in green when the Intelligent  
Key battery is running out of power. Replace  
the battery with a new one. (See “KEY  
BATTERY REPLACEMENT” in the “8. Main-  
tenance and do-it-yourself” section.)  
The engine oil pressure warning light is  
not designed to indicate a low oil level.  
Use the dipstick to check the oil level. (See  
“ENGINE OIL” in the “8. Maintenance and do-it-  
yourself” section.)  
When the ignition switch is in the ON position,  
the electric power steering warning light illumi-  
nates. After starting the engine, the electric  
power steering warning light turns off. This  
indicates the electric power steering system is  
operational.  
The light illuminates in yellow when it warns  
of a malfunction with the electrical steering  
lock system or the Intelligent Key system.  
CAUTION  
If the electric power steering warning light  
illuminates while the engine is running, it may  
indicate the electric power steering system is  
not functioning properly and may need servicing.  
Have the electric power steering system  
checked by a NISSAN dealer.  
If the warning light illuminates in yellow while the  
engine is stopped, it may be impossible to free  
the steering lock or to start the engine. If the  
light comes on while the engine is running, you  
can drive the vehicle. However in these cases,  
contact a NISSAN dealer for repair as soon as  
possible.  
Running the engine with the engine oil  
pressure warning light on could cause  
serious damage to the engine almost  
immediately. Such damage is not cov-  
ered by warranty. Turn off the engine as  
soon as it is safe to do so.  
When the electric power steering warning light  
illuminates with the engine running, the power  
assist to the steering will cease operation but  
you will still have control of the vehicle. At this  
time, greater steering efforts are required to  
operate the steering wheel, especially in sharp  
turns and at low speeds.  
Low fuel warning light  
Intelligent Key system warning light  
(if so equipped)  
This light illuminates when the fuel in the tank is  
getting low. Refuel as soon as it is convenient,  
preferably before the fuel gauge reaches the 0  
(empty) position.  
After the ignition switch is placed in the ON  
position, this light comes on for about 2 seconds  
and then turns off.  
See “ELECTRIC POWER STEERING SYS-  
TEM” in the “5. Starting and driving” section.  
There will be a small reserve of fuel  
remaining in the tank when the fuel gauge  
reaches the 0 position.  
This light illuminates or blinks as follows:  
Engine oil pressure warning light  
.
The light blinks in yellow when the door is  
closed with the Intelligent Key left outside  
the vehicle and the ignition switch in the  
ACC or ON position. Make sure that the  
This light warns of low engine oil pressure. If the  
light flickers or illuminates during normal driving,  
2-12 Instruments and controls  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
“5. Starting and driving” section and “TIRE  
PRESSURE MONITORING SYSTEM (TPMS)”  
in the “6. In case of emergency” section.  
likelihood of tire failure. Serious  
vehicle damage could occur and  
may lead to an accident and could  
result in serious personal injury.  
Check the tire pressure for all four  
tires. Adjust the tire pressure to the  
recommended COLD tire pressure  
shown on the Tire and Loading  
Information label to turn the low  
tire pressure warning light OFF. If  
the light still illuminates while driv-  
ing after adjusting the tire pressure,  
a tire may be flat. If you have a flat  
tire, replace it with a spare tire as  
soon as possible.  
Low tire pressure warning light  
Your vehicle is equipped with a Tire Pressure  
Monitoring System (TPMS) that monitors the tire  
pressure of all tires except the spare.  
TPMS malfunction:  
If the TPMS is not functioning properly, the low  
tire pressure warning light will flash for approxi-  
mately 1 minute when the ignition switch is  
placed in the ON position. The light will remain  
on after 1 minute. Have the system checked by a  
NISSAN dealer.  
The low tire pressure warning light warns of low  
tire pressure or indicates that the TPMS is not  
functioning properly.  
After the ignition switch is placed in the ON  
position, this light illuminates for about 1 second  
and turns off.  
For additional information, see “TIRE PRES-  
SURE MONITORING SYSTEM (TPMS)” in the  
“5. Starting and driving” section.  
Low tire pressure warning:  
If the vehicle is being driven with low tire  
pressure, the warning light will illuminate.  
WARNING  
.
When a spare tire is mounted or a  
wheel is replaced, the TPMS will not  
function and the low tire pressure  
warning light will flash for approxi-  
mately 1 minute. The light will  
remain on after 1 minute. Contact  
your NISSAN dealer as soon as  
possible for tire replacement and/  
or system resetting.  
When the low tire pressure warning light  
illuminates, you should stop and adjust the tire  
pressure to the recommended COLD tire  
pressure shown on the Tire and Loading  
Information label. The low tire pressure warning  
light does not automatically turn off when the tire  
pressure is adjusted. After the tire is inflated to  
the recommended pressure, the vehicle must be  
driven at speeds above 16 MPH (25 km/h) to  
activate the TPMS and turn off the low tire  
pressure warning light. Use a tire pressure  
gauge to check the tire pressure.  
.
.
If the light does not illuminate with  
the ignition switch placed in the ON  
position, have the vehicle checked  
by a NISSAN dealer as soon as  
possible.  
If the light illuminates while driving,  
avoid sudden steering maneuvers or  
abrupt braking, reduce vehicle  
speed, pull off the road to a safe  
location and stop the vehicle as  
soon as possible. Driving with un-  
der-inflated tires may permanently  
damage the tires and increase the  
.
Replacing tires with those not ori-  
ginally specified by NISSAN could  
affect the proper operation of the  
TPMS.  
For additional information, see “TIRE PRES-  
SURE MONITORING SYSTEM (TPMS)” in the  
Instruments and controls 2-13  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
to the P (Park) position or push the ignition  
switch to the ON position.  
Supplemental air bag warning light  
CAUTION  
An inside warning chime will also sound.  
After turning the ignition switch to the ON  
position, the supplemental air bag warning light  
will illuminate. The supplemental air bag warning  
light will turn off after about 7 seconds if the  
supplemental front air bag and supplemental  
side air bag, curtain side-impact air bag systems  
and/or pretensioner seat belt are operational.  
.
.
The TPMS is not a substitute for the  
regular tire pressure check. Be sure  
to check the tire pressure regularly.  
See “INTELLIGENT KEY SYSTEM” in the “3.  
Pre-driving checks and adjustments” section.  
If the vehicle is being driven at  
speeds of less than 16 MPH (25  
km/h), the TPMS may not operate  
correctly.  
Seat belt warning light  
The light and chime remind you to fasten seat  
belts. The light illuminates whenever the ignition  
switch is placed in the ON position, and will  
remain illuminated until the driver’s seat belt is  
fastened. At the same time, the chime will sound  
for about 6 seconds unless the driver’s seat belt  
is securely fastened.  
If any of the following conditions occur, the front  
air bag, side air bag, curtain air bag and  
pretensioner systems need servicing and your  
vehicle must be taken to your nearest NISSAN  
dealer.  
.
Be sure to install the specified size  
of tires to the four wheels correctly.  
Low washer fluid warning light  
(Canada only)  
.
.
.
The supplemental air bag warning light  
remains on after approximately 7 seconds.  
The seat belt warning light for the front  
passenger will illuminate if the seat belt is not  
fastened when the front passenger’s seat is  
occupied. For 5 seconds after the ignition  
switch is in the ON position, the system does  
not activate the warning light for the front  
passenger.  
This light illuminates when the washer fluid is at  
a low level. Add washer fluid as necessary. (See  
“WINDOW WASHER FLUID” in the “8. Main-  
tenance and do-it-yourself” section.)  
The supplemental air bag warning light  
flashes intermittently.  
The supplemental air bag warning light does  
not illuminate at all.  
P position selecting warning light  
(if so equipped)  
Unless checked and repaired, the Supplemental  
Restraint Systems and/or the pretensioners may  
not function properly.  
See “SEAT BELTS” in the “1. Safety — Seats,  
seat belts and supplemental restraint system”  
section for precautions on seat belt usage.  
The warning light blinks in red when the ignition  
switch is pushed to stop the engine with the  
selector lever in any position except the P (Park)  
position.  
For additional information, see “SUPPLEMEN-  
TAL RESTRAINT SYSTEM” in the “1. Safety —  
Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint  
system” section.  
If this warning appears, move the selector lever  
2-14 Instruments and controls  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
See “CRUISE CONTROL” in the “5. Starting  
and driving” section.  
Malfunction Indicator Light (MIL)  
WARNING  
If the malfunction indicator light illuminates  
steady or blinks while the engine is running, it  
may indicate a potential emission control and/or  
Continuously Variable Transmission (CVT) mal-  
function.  
If the supplemental air bag warning  
light is on, it could mean that the front  
air bag, side air bag, curtain air bag  
and/or pretensioner systems will not  
operate in an accident. To help avoid  
injury to yourself or others, have your  
vehicle checked by a NISSAN dealer as  
soon as possible.  
Front passenger air bag status  
light  
The front passenger air bag status light (located  
on the center of the instrument panel) will be lit  
and the passenger front air bag will be OFF  
depending on how the front passenger seat is  
being used.  
The malfunction indicator light may also illumi-  
nate steady if the fuel-filler cap is loose or  
missing, or if the vehicle runs out of fuel. Check  
to make sure the fuel-filler cap is installed and  
closed tightly, and that the vehicle has at least 3  
US gallons (11.4 liters) of fuel in the fuel tank.  
For front passenger air bag status light opera-  
tion, see “NISSAN ADVANCED AIR BAG  
SYSTEM (front seats)” in the “1. Safety —  
Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint  
system” section of this manual.  
INDICATOR LIGHTS  
After a few driving trips, the  
light should  
Cruise indicator light (if so  
equipped)  
turn off if no other potential emission control  
system malfunction exists.  
Engine start operation indicator  
light (if so equipped)  
Cruise main switch indicator:  
If this indicator light remains on for 20 seconds  
and then blinks for 10 seconds when the engine  
is not running, it indicates that the vehicle is not  
ready for an emission control system inspection/  
maintenance test. (See “READINESS FOR  
INSPECTION/MAINTENANCE (I/M) TEST” in  
the “9. Technical and consumer information”  
section.)  
This light illuminates when the cruise control  
main switch is pushed. The light turns off when  
the main switch is pushed again. When the  
cruise indicator light illuminates, the cruise  
control system is operational.  
This light appears when the selector lever is in  
the P (Park) position. This light means that the  
engine will start by pushing the ignition switch  
with the brake pedal depressed. You can start  
the engine directly in any position.  
Cruise malfunction:  
Operation:  
If the cruise indicator light blinks while the  
engine is running, it may indicate the cruise  
control system is not functioning properly. Have  
the system checked by a NISSAN dealer.  
High beam indicator light  
The malfunction indicator light will illuminate in  
one of two ways:  
This light illuminates when the headlight high  
beam is on and goes out when the low beam is  
selected.  
.
Malfunction indicator light illuminated steady  
Instruments and controls 2-15  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
— An emission control system and/or CVT  
malfunction has been detected. Check the  
fuel-filler cap. If the fuel-filler cap is loose or  
missing, tighten or install the cap and  
“SECURITY SYSTEMS” later in this section.  
Slip indicator light  
CAUTION  
Continued vehicle operation without  
having the emission control system  
and/or CVT system checked and re-  
paired as necessary could lead to poor  
driveability, reduced fuel economy, and  
possible damage to the emission con-  
trol system.  
continue to drive the vehicle. The  
light  
The light will blink when the Vehicle Dynamic  
Control (VDC) system is operating, thus alerting  
the driver that the vehicle is nearing its traction  
limits. The road surface may be slippery.  
should turn off after a few driving trips. If the  
light does not turn off after a few  
driving trips, have the vehicle inspected by a  
NISSAN dealer. You do not need to have  
your vehicle towed to the dealer.  
Low beam indicator light  
.
Malfunction indicator light blinking — An  
engine misfire has been detected which may  
damage the emission control system.  
The light illuminates when the headlight switch is  
Overdrive off indicator light (if so  
equipped)  
turned to the  
position.  
To reduce or avoid emission control system  
damage:  
Turn signal/hazard indicator lights  
The overdrive off indicator light illuminates when  
the overdrive off mode is selected.  
The light flashes when the turn signal switch  
lever or hazard switch is turned on.  
a) Do not drive at speeds above 45 MPH  
(72 km/h).  
For additional information, see ““CONTINU-  
OUSLY VARIABLE TRANSMISSION (CVT)” in  
the “5. Starting and driving” section of this  
manual.  
b) Avoid hard acceleration or deceleration.  
c) Avoid steep uphill grades.  
Vehicle Dynamic Control (VDC) off  
indicator light  
d) If possible, reduce the amount of cargo  
being hauled or towed.  
The light illuminates when the Vehicle Dynamic  
Control (VDC) off switch is pushed to OFF. This  
indicates that the VDC system is not operating.  
When the VDC off indicator light and slip  
indicator light illuminate with the VDC system  
turned on, this light alerts the driver to the fact  
that the VDC system’s fail-safe mode is operat-  
ing, for example the VDC system may not be  
functioning properly. Have the system checked  
Security indicator light  
The light blinks when the ignition switch is in the  
ACC, OFF or LOCK position. This function  
indicates the security system equipped on the  
vehicle is operational.  
The malfunction indicator light may stop  
blinking and remain illuminated.  
Have the vehicle inspected by a NISSAN  
dealer. You do not need to have your vehicle  
towed to the dealer.  
If the security system is malfunctioning, this light  
will remain on while the ignition switch is in the  
ON position. For additional information, see  
2-16 Instruments and controls  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
SECURITY SYSTEMS  
by a NISSAN dealer. If a malfunction occurs in  
the system, the VDC system function will be  
canceled but the vehicle is still driveable. For  
additional information, see “VEHICLE DYNAMIC  
CONTROL (VDC) SYSTEM” in the “5. Starting  
and driving” section of this manual.  
Turn the light switch off when you leave the  
vehicle.  
Brake pad wear warning  
The disc brake pads have audible wear warn-  
ings. When a brake pad requires replacement, it  
will make a high pitched scraping sound when  
the vehicle is in motion. This scraping sound will  
first occur only when the brake pedal is  
depressed. After more wear of the brake pad,  
the sound will always be heard even if the brake  
pedal is not depressed. Have the brakes  
checked as soon as possible if the warning  
sound is heard.  
AUDIBLE REMINDERS  
Key reminder chime  
Models with Intelligent Key system:  
A chime will sound if the driver side door is  
opened while the ignition switch is pushed to  
the ACC position.  
SIC4160  
Parking brake reminder chime  
Make sure the ignition switch is pushed to the  
OFF position, and take the Intelligent Key with  
you when leaving the vehicle.  
Your vehicle has two types of security systems,  
as follows:  
The parking brake reminder chime will sound if  
the vehicle is driven at more than 4 MPH (7  
km/h) with the parking brake applied. Stop the  
vehicle and release the parking brake.  
.
.
Vehicle security system  
Models without Intelligent Key system:  
NISSAN Vehicle Immobilizer System  
The key reminder chime sounds if the driver’s  
side door is opened while the key is left in the  
ignition switch and the ignition switch is in the  
ACC, OFF or LOCK position. Remove the key  
and take it with you when leaving the vehicle.  
Seat belt warning chime  
The security condition will be shown by the  
security indicator light.  
The seat belt warning chime will sound for about  
6 seconds unless the driver’s seat belt is  
securely fastened.  
VEHICLE SECURITY SYSTEM  
The vehicle security system provides visual and  
audio alarm signals if someone opens the doors,  
or back door when the system is armed. It is not,  
however, a motion detection type system that  
activates when a vehicle is moved or when a  
vibration occurs.  
Light reminder chime  
The light reminder chime will sound when the  
driver side door is opened with the light switch  
in the  
or  
position, and the ignition  
switch is in the ACC, OFF or LOCK position.  
Instruments and controls 2-17  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
The system helps deter vehicle theft but cannot  
prevent it, nor can it prevent the theft of interior  
or exterior vehicle components in all situations.  
Always secure your vehicle even if parking for a  
brief period. Never leave your keys in the vehicle,  
and always lock it when unattended. Be aware  
of your surroundings, and park in secure, well-lit  
areas whenever possible.  
3. Close all doors. Lock all doors. The doors  
can be locked with:  
.
the LOCK  
Intelligent Key (if so equipped)  
button on the keyfob or  
.
any request switch (Intelligent Key  
equipped model)  
.
.
the power door lock switch  
Many devices offering additional protection,  
such as component locks, identification markers,  
and tracking systems, are available at auto  
supply stores and specialty shops. Your  
NISSAN dealer may also offer such equipment.  
Check with your insurance company to see if  
you may be eligible for discounts for various  
theft protection features.  
the key — master or mechanical (In-  
telligent Key equipped model)  
4. Confirm that the security indicator light  
illuminates. The security indicator light stays  
on for about 30 seconds. The vehicle  
security system is now pre-armed. After  
about 30 seconds the vehicle security  
system automatically shifts into the armed  
phase. The security light begins to flash  
once every approximately 3 seconds. If,  
during this 30-second pre-arm time period,  
the door is unlocked, or the ignition switch is  
placed in the ACC or ON position, the  
system will not arm.  
SIC2045  
How to arm the vehicle security system  
1. Close all windows.  
The system can be armed even if the  
windows are open.  
2. Models with Intelligent Key system:  
Place the ignition switch in the OFF position  
and remove the Intelligent Key from the  
vehicle.  
Even when the driver and/or passengers  
are in the vehicle, the system will activate  
with all doors locked with the ignition  
switch in the LOCK position. When turning  
the ignition switch to the ACC or ON  
position, the system will be released.  
Models without Intelligent Key system:  
Place the ignition switch in the LOCK  
position and remove the key.  
2-18 Instruments and controls  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
NISSAN VEHICLE IMMOBILIZER SYS-  
TEM  
This device complies with part 15 of the  
FCC Rules and RSS-210 of Industry Cana-  
da. Operation is subject to the following  
two conditions;  
Vehicle security system activation  
The vehicle security system will give the follow-  
ing alarm:  
The NISSAN Vehicle Immobilizer System will not  
allow the engine to start without the use of the  
registered key.  
.
The headlights blink and the horn sounds  
intermittently.  
(1) This device may not cause harmful  
interference, and (2) this device must  
accept any interference received, including  
interference that may cause undesired  
operation of the device.  
If the engine fails to start using the registered  
key, it may be due to interference caused by  
another registered key, an automated toll road  
device or automated payment device on the key  
ring. Restart the engine using the following  
procedures:  
.
The alarm automatically turns off after  
approximately 50 seconds. However, the  
alarm reactivates if the vehicle is tampered  
with again.  
CHANGES OR MODIFICATIONS NOT EX-  
PRESSLY APPROVED BY THE PARTY  
RESPONSIBLE FOR COMPLIANCE COULD  
VOID THE USER’S AUTHORITY TO OPER-  
ATE THE EQUIPMENT.  
The alarm is activated by:  
1. Leave the ignition switch in the ON position  
for approximately 5 seconds.  
.
Unlocking the door without using the keyfob,  
the Intelligent Key (if so equipped) the  
request switch (if so equipped) or the key.  
(Even if the door is opened by releasing the  
door inside lock knob, the alarm will  
activate.)  
2. Place the ignition switch in the OFF or  
LOCK position and wait approximately 10  
seconds.  
3. Repeat step 1 and 2 again.  
How to stop an activated alarm  
4. Restart the engine while holding the device  
(which may have caused the interference)  
separate from the registered key.  
The alarm will stop by unlocking a door by  
pushing the UNLOCK  
button on the keyfob  
or Intelligent Key, pushing the request switch or  
using the key. The alarm will not stop if the  
ignition switch is placed in the ACC or ON  
position.  
If this procedure allows the engine to start,  
NISSAN recommends placing the regis-  
tered key on a separate key ring to avoid  
interference from other devices.  
If the system does not operate as de-  
scribed above, have it checked by a  
NISSAN dealer.  
Statement related to section 15 of FCC  
rules for NISSAN Vehicle Immobilizer  
System (CONT ASSY-BCM. ANT ASSY-  
IMMOBILISER)  
Instruments and controls 2-19  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
WINDSHIELD WIPER AND WASHER  
SWITCH  
service as soon as possible. Please bring  
all registered keys that you have when  
visiting a NISSAN dealer for service.  
WARNING  
In freezing temperatures the washer  
solution may freeze on the windshield  
and obscure your vision which may lead  
to an accident. Warm windshield with  
the defroster before you wash the  
windshield.  
CAUTION  
.
.
.
Do not operate the washer continu-  
ously for more than 30 seconds.  
SIC2045  
Do not operate the washer if the  
reservoir tank is empty.  
Security indicator light  
The security indicator light is located on the  
meter panel. It indicates the status of the  
NISSAN Vehicle Immobilizer System.  
Do not fill the window washer  
reservoir tank with washer fluid  
concentrates at full strength. Some  
methyl alcohol based washer fluid  
concentrates may permanently stain  
the grille if spilled while filling the  
window washer reservoir tank.  
The light blinks after the ignition switch was in  
the LOCK position. This function indicates the  
security systems equipped on the vehicle are  
operational.  
If the NISSAN Vehicle Immobilizer System is  
malfunctioning, this light will remain on while the  
ignition switch is in the ON position.  
.
Pre-mix washer fluid concentrates  
with water to the manufacturer’s  
recommended levels before pouring  
the fluid into the window washer  
reservoir tank. Do not use the  
window washer reservoir tank to  
If the light still remains on and/or the  
engine will not start, see a NISSAN dealer  
for NISSAN Vehicle Immobilizer System  
2-20 Instruments and controls  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
5
Pull the lever toward you  
to operate the  
*
mix the washer fluid concentrate  
and water.  
washer. Then the wiper will also operate several  
times.  
If the windshield wiper operation is inter-  
rupted by snow or ice, the wiper may stop  
moving to protect its motor. If this occurs,  
turn the wiper switch to the OFF position  
and remove the snow or ice that is on and  
around the wiper arms. In approximately 1  
minute, turn the switch on again to operate  
the wiper.  
SIC3664  
The windshield wiper and washer operates  
when the ignition switch is in the ON position.  
Push the lever down to operate the wiper at the  
following speed:  
1
*
Intermittent — intermittent operation can be  
A
adjusted by turning the knob toward  
*
B
*
(Slower) or  
(Faster).  
2
*
Low — continuous low speed operation  
3
High — continuous high speed operation  
*
4
Push the lever up  
operation of the wiper.  
to have one sweep  
*
Instruments and controls 2-21  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
REAR WINDOW WIPER AND  
WASHER SWITCH  
and water.  
WARNING  
If the rear window wiper operation is  
interrupted by snow or ice, the wiper may  
stop moving to protect its motor. If this  
occurs, turn the wiper switch to the OFF  
position and remove the snow or ice that is  
on and around the wiper arms. In approxi-  
mately 1 minute, turn the switch on again  
to operate the wiper.  
In freezing temperatures the washer  
solution may freeze on the rear window  
glass and obscure your vision. Warm  
the rear window with the defroster  
before you wash the rear window.  
CAUTION  
.
.
.
Do not operate the washer continu-  
ously for more than 30 seconds.  
SIC3666  
Do not operate the washer if the  
reservoir tank is empty.  
The rear window wiper and washer operate  
when the ignition switch is in the ON position.  
Do not fill the window washer  
reservoir tank with washer fluid  
concentrates at full strength. Some  
methyl alcohol based washer fluid  
concentrates may permanently stain  
the grille if spilled while filling the  
window washer reservoir tank.  
Turn the switch clockwise from the OFF position  
to operate the wiper.  
1
Intermittent (INT) — intermittent operation  
*
(not adjustable)  
2
*
Low (ON) — continuous low speed opera-  
tion  
.
Pre-mix washer fluid concentrates  
with water to the manufacturer’s  
recommended levels before pouring  
the fluid into the window washer  
reservoir tank. Do not use the  
window washer reservoir tank to  
mix the washer fluid concentrate  
3
*
Push the switch forward  
to operate the  
washer. Then the wiper will also operate several  
times.  
2-22 Instruments and controls  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
REAR WINDOW AND OUTSIDE  
MIRROR DEFROSTER SWITCH  
HEADLIGHT AND TURN SIGNAL  
SWITCH  
To defog/defrost the rear window glass and  
outside mirrors (if so equipped), start the engine  
1
and push the switch  
on. The indicator light  
*
2
will illuminate. Push the switch again to turn  
*
the defroster off.  
It will automatically turn off in approximately 15  
minutes.  
CAUTION  
When cleaning the inner side of the rear  
window, be careful not to scratch or  
damage the rear window defroster.  
SIC3668  
SIC4127  
Type A  
HEADLIGHT SWITCH  
Lighting  
1
*
Turn the switch to the  
position:  
The front park, side marker, tail, license  
plate and instrument lights will come on.  
2
*
Turn the switch to the  
position:  
Headlights will come on and all the other  
lights remain on.  
SIC4145  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Type B  
Instruments and controls 2-23  
 
automatically when it is dark and turn off the  
headlights when it is light.  
For US models: The headlights will also be  
turned on automatically at twilight or in rainy  
weather (when the windshield wiper is operated  
continuously).  
If the ignition switch is placed in the OFF  
position and one of the doors is opened and this  
condition is continued, the headlights remain on  
for 5 minutes.  
Automatic headlights off delay:  
You can keep the headlights on for up to 45  
seconds after you place the ignition switch in  
OFF and open any door then close all the doors.  
SIC3669  
SAA1232  
Be sure not to put anything on top of the  
Autolight system (if so equipped)  
1
*
photo sensor  
located on the top of the  
The autolight system allows the headlights to be  
set so they turn on and off automatically.  
instrument panel. The photo sensor con-  
trols the autolight; if it is covered, the  
photo sensor reacts as if it is dark and the  
headlights will illuminate.  
To set the autolight system:  
1. Make sure the headlight switch is in the  
1
*
AUTO position  
.
2. Place the ignition switch in the ON position.  
3. The autolight system automatically turns the  
headlights on and off.  
To turn the autolight system off, turn the switch  
to the OFF,  
or  
position.  
The autolight system can turn on the headlights  
2-24 Instruments and controls  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
has been placed in the OFF position.  
illumination when driving at night.  
.
When the headlight switch remains in the  
If the parking brake is applied before the engine  
is started, the daytime running lights do not  
illuminate. The daytime running lights illuminate  
once the parking brake is released. The daytime  
running lights will remain on until the ignition  
switch is placed in the OFF position.  
or  
position after the lights  
automatically turn off, the lights will turn on  
when the ignition switch is placed in the ON  
position.  
CAUTION  
WARNING  
.
.
When you turn on the headlight  
switch again after the lights auto-  
matically turn off, the lights will not  
turn off automatically. Be sure to  
turn the light switch to the OFF  
position when you leave the vehicle  
for extended periods of time, other-  
wise the battery will be discharged.  
When the daytime running light system  
is active, tail lights on your vehicle are  
not on. It is necessary at dusk to turn on  
your headlights. Failure to do so could  
cause an accident injuring yourself and  
others.  
SIC3670  
Headlight beam select  
1
*
To select the low beam, put the lever in the  
neutral position as shown.  
Never leave the light switch on  
when the engine is not running for  
extended periods of time even if the  
headlights turn off automatically.  
2
*
To select the high beam, push the lever  
forward while the switch is in the  
position. Pull it back to select the low beam.  
3
*
Pulling the lever toward you will flash the  
headlight high beam even when the head-  
light switch is in the OFF position.  
Daytime running light system (Canada  
only)  
The daytime running lights automatically illumi-  
nate when the engine is started with the parking  
brake released. The daytime running lights  
operate with the headlight switch in the OFF  
Battery saver system  
.
When the headlight switch is in the  
or  
position while the ignition switch is in  
the ON position, the lights will automatically  
turn off 5 minutes after the ignition switch  
position or in the  
position. Turn the  
position for full  
headlight switch to the  
Instruments and controls 2-25  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Instrument brightness control  
The instrument brightness control operates  
when the ignition switch is in the ON position.  
A
Push the control knob  
to adjust the bright-  
*
ness of the instrument panel lights. The bright-  
B
ness indicator  
will be shown briefly in the  
*
vehicle information display when the control is  
turned.  
When the brightness level reaches the maximum  
or minimum, a beep will sound.  
SIC3671  
SIC4128  
TURN SIGNAL SWITCH  
1 Turn signal  
*
Move the lever up or down to signal the turning  
direction. When the turn is completed, the turn  
signals cancel automatically.  
2 Lane change signal  
*
To indicate a lane change, move the lever up or  
down to the point where lights begin flashing.  
SIC4129  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
2-26 Instruments and controls  
 
HAZARD WARNING FLASHER  
SWITCH  
.
Turn signals do not work when the  
hazard warning flasher lights are  
on.  
The flasher can be actuated with the ignition  
switch in any position.  
Some state laws may prohibit the use of  
the hazard warning flasher switch while  
driving.  
SIC3672  
SIC2574  
Push the switch on to warn other drivers when  
you must stop or park under emergency condi-  
tions. All turn signal lights will flash.  
FOG LIGHT SWITCH (if so equipped)  
To turn the fog lights on, turn the headlight  
switch to the  
to the  
position, then turn the switch  
position. To turn them off, turn the  
WARNING  
switch to the OFF position.  
.
.
If stopping for an emergency, be  
sure to move the vehicle well off the  
road.  
The headlights must be on for the fog lights to  
operate.  
Do not use the hazard warning  
flashers while moving on the high-  
way unless unusual circumstances  
force you to drive so slowly that  
your vehicle might become a hazard  
to other traffic.  
Instruments and controls 2-27  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
VEHICLE DYNAMIC CONTROL (VDC)  
OFF SWITCH  
HORN  
CLOCK (if so equipped)  
The digital clock (in the audio unit) displays time  
when the ignition switch is in the ACC or ON  
position.  
The clock ON or OFF mode can be selected.  
If the power supply is disconnected, the  
clock will not indicate the correct time.  
Readjust the time.  
SIC4130  
SIC1881  
To sound the horn, push the center pad area of  
the steering wheel.  
The vehicle should be driven with the Vehicle  
Dynamic Control (VDC) system on for most  
driving conditions.  
WARNING  
If the vehicle is stuck in mud or snow, the VDC  
system reduces the engine output to reduce  
wheel spin. The engine speed will be reduced  
even if the accelerator is depressed to the floor.  
If maximum engine power is needed to free a  
stuck vehicle, turn the VDC system off.  
Do not disassemble the horn. Doing so  
could affect proper operation of the  
supplemental front air bag system.  
Tampering with the supplemental front  
air bag system may result in serious  
personal injury.  
To turn off the VDC system, push the VDC OFF  
switch. The  
indicator will illuminate.  
Push the VDC OFF switch again or restart the  
engine to turn on the system. (See “VEHICLE  
DYNAMIC CONTROL (VDC) SYSTEM” in the  
“5. Starting and driving” section.)  
2-28 Instruments and controls  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
The display will return to the regular clock  
display after 5 seconds.  
SIC4131  
SIC4146  
Type A  
Type B  
Type B  
ADJUSTING THE TIME  
1
Push the MENU button  
until the CLOCK  
*
Type A  
2
mode appears. Then push the TUNE  
button to select “CLK-ON” or “CLK-  
OFF” to turn the clock on or off.  
or  
*
1
Push the CLOCK button  
*
to turn the clock on  
3
SEEK  
*
or off.  
1
*
1. Push and hold the CLOCK button  
the clock display starts to flash.  
until  
“CLK-ON” needs to be selected before adjust-  
ing the clock display.  
2
2. Push the SEEK/TRACK button  
*
to adjust  
1
1. Push the MENU button  
.
*
the hours.  
1
*
2. Push the MENU button  
display starts to flash.  
again. The clock  
3
3. Push the TUNE/FF·REW button  
adjust the minutes.  
to  
*
2
*
3
*
3. Push the TUNE  
or SEEK  
button to  
1
*
4. Push the CLOCK button  
the clock set mode.  
again to exit  
adjust the hours.  
Instruments and controls 2-29  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
1
1
4. Push the MENU button  
again. The  
5. Push the ENTER SETTING button  
.
*
*
display will switch to the minute adjustment  
mode.  
The display will return to the regular clock  
display after 5 seconds.  
5. Push the TUNE or SEEK button to adjust the  
minutes.  
RESETTING THE TIME (Type B)  
By holding down the MENU button and then  
pushing the TUNE or SEEK button, the time will  
be reset as follows.  
6. Push the MENU button again to exit the  
clock mode.  
The display will return to the regular clock  
display after 5 seconds.  
.
In case the displayed minute is in the range  
of 00 - 29, the hour will stay the same and  
the minute will be reset to 00.  
.
In case the displayed minute is in the range  
of 30 - 59, the hour will be advanced by one  
hour and the minute will be reset to 00.  
SIC4275  
Type C  
Type C  
For example, if the MENU and TUNE buttons are  
pushed while the time is between “8:00” and  
“8:29”, the display will be reset to “8:00”. If  
pushed while the time is between “8:30” and  
“8:59”, the display will be reset to “9:00”. At the  
same time the display will return to the previous  
audio mode.  
1
Push the ENTER SETTING button  
“Setting Clock” and “On-screen Clock” appear  
on the display. Then turn the TUNE/SCROLL  
until  
*
2
*
knob  
to turn the clock on or off.  
1
*
1. Push the ENTER SETTING button  
until  
“Setting Clock” and “Clock Adjust” appear  
on the display.  
2
*
2. Turn the TUNE/SCROLL knob  
the hour.  
to adjust  
1
.
*
3. Push the ENTER SETTING button  
2
4. Turn the TUNE/SCROLL knob  
*
to adjust  
the minute.  
2-30 Instruments and controls  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
POWER OUTLET  
STORAGE  
CUP HOLDERS  
.
Avoid using power outlet when the  
air conditioner, headlights or rear  
window defroster is on.  
CAUTION  
.
.
This power outlet is not designed  
for use with a cigarette lighter unit.  
.
.
Avoid abrupt starting and braking  
when the cup holder is being used  
to prevent spilling the drink. If the  
liquid is hot, it can scald you or your  
passenger.  
Push the plug in as far as it will go.  
If good contact is not made, the plug  
may overheat or the internal tem-  
perature fuse may open.  
Use only soft cups in the cup holder.  
Hard objects can injure you in an  
accident.  
.
.
Before inserting or disconnecting a  
plug, be sure the electrical acces-  
sory being used is turned OFF.  
SIC4132  
When not in use, be sure to close  
the cap. Do not allow water to  
contact the outlet.  
The power outlet is located in the instrument  
panel.  
CAUTION  
.
.
The outlet and plug may be hot  
during or immediately after use.  
Do not use with accessories that  
exceed a 12 volt, 120W (10A) power  
draw. Do not use double adapters or  
more than one electrical accessory.  
.
Use power outlet with the engine  
running to avoid discharging the  
vehicle battery.  
Instruments and controls 2-31  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
SIC4133  
SIC4134  
SIC4135  
Driver’s side instrument panel  
Center console  
Rear (if so equipped)  
Front  
Pull the armrest down until it is horizontal.  
2-32 Instruments and controls  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Soft bottle holders  
CAUTION  
.
.
Do not use bottle holder for any  
other objects that could be thrown  
about in the vehicle and possibly  
injure people during sudden braking  
or an accident.  
Do not use bottle holder for open  
liquid containers.  
SIC4138  
SIC4137  
Door (front and rear)  
GLOVE BOX  
WARNING  
Keep glove box lid closed while driving  
to help prevent injury in an accident or a  
sudden stop.  
To open the glove box, pull the handle.  
To close, push the lid in until the lock latches.  
SIC4136  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Rear of center console  
Instruments and controls 2-33  
 
SIC4165  
SIC4147  
SIC4141  
REAR PILLAR POCKET  
LUGGAGE HOOKS  
WARNING  
CAUTION  
WARNING  
Do not store objects on the horizontal  
surface just above the glove box or on  
top of the instrument panel. Objects  
can become projectiles and/or interfere  
with passenger air bag deployment  
causing serious personal injury.  
Do not keep heavy or long objects in  
the pocket.  
.
Do not attach upper tether anchors  
to the luggage hooks. The child  
restraint will not be properly in-  
stalled. Your child could be injured  
or killed in a sudden stop or colli-  
sion.  
.
.
Always make sure that the luggage  
is properly secured. Use the suitable  
ropes and hooks.  
Unsecured luggage can become  
2-34 Instruments and controls  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
dangerous in an accident or sudden  
stop.  
CAUTION  
Do not apply a total load of more than 7  
A
B
lb (3 kg) * or 22 lb (10 kg) * to a  
single hook.  
SIC4142  
SIC4143  
Instrument panel  
Rear door  
The utility hooks can be attached to the holes as  
illustrated.  
UTILITY HOOKS (if so equipped)  
Two removable utility hooks are supplied with  
your vehicle. The utility hooks can be attached to  
or removed from the holes on the instrument  
panel and the rear doors.  
WARNING  
CHOKING HAZARD-Small parts. Not for  
children under 3 years. Do not allow  
children to play with utility hook.  
CAUTION  
Do not apply a total load of more than 3  
lb (1.5 kg) to a single hook.  
To remove the hook from the hole, pull it straight  
up. Do not twist or turn the hooks for  
installation or removal.  
Instruments and controls 2-35  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
WINDOWS  
Push it in again to cancel.  
POWER WINDOWS  
WARNING  
.
.
Make sure that all passengers have  
their hands, etc. inside the vehicle  
while it is in motion and before  
closing the windows. Use the win-  
dow lock switch to prevent unex-  
pected use of the power windows.  
Do not leave children unattended  
inside the vehicle. They could un-  
knowingly activate switches or con-  
trols and become trapped in the  
window. Unattended children could  
become involved in serious acci-  
dents.  
SIC3507  
Main power window switch (driver’s  
side)  
1. Window lock button  
2. Driver side window  
The power windows operate when the ignition  
switch is in the ON position, or for about 45  
seconds after the ignition switch is placed in the  
OFF position. If the driver’s or front passenger’s  
door is opened during this period of about 45  
seconds, power to the windows is canceled.  
3. Rear left passenger side window  
4. Front passenger side window  
5. Rear right passenger side window  
A
*
To open or close the window, push down  
or  
B
pull up  
the switch and hold it. The main  
*
switch (driver side switches) will open or close  
all the windows.  
Locking passengers’ windows  
C
When the lock button  
is pushed in, only the  
*
driver side window can be opened or closed.  
2-36 Instruments and controls  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Auto-reverse function  
WARNING  
There are some small distances imme-  
diately before the closed position which  
cannot be detected. Make sure that all  
passengers have their hands, etc., in-  
side the vehicle before closing the  
window.  
If the control unit detects something caught in  
the window as it is closing, the window will be  
immediately lowered.  
SIC3508  
SIC3509  
The auto reverse function can be activated when  
the window is closed by automatic operation  
when the ignition switch is in the ON position or  
for 45 seconds after the ignition switch is placed  
in the OFF position.  
Passenger side power window switch  
Automatic operation  
The automatic operation is available for the  
switch that has an mark on its surface.  
The passenger side switch will open or close  
only the corresponding window. To open or  
close the window, push down or pull up the  
switch and hold it.  
To fully open or close the window, completely  
push down or pull up the switch and release it;  
the switch need not be held. The window will  
automatically open or close all the way. To stop  
the window, just push or lift the switch in the  
opposite direction.  
Depending on the environment or driving  
conditions, the auto reverse function may  
be activated if an impact or load similar to  
something being caught in the window  
occurs.  
A light push or pull on the switch will cause the  
window to open or close until the switch is  
released.  
If the windows do not close automatically  
If the power window automatic function (closing  
only) does not operate properly, perform the  
following procedure to initialize the power  
window system.  
Instruments and controls 2-37  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
INTERIOR LIGHTS  
1. Place the ignition switch in the ON position.  
2. Close the door.  
CAUTION  
Do not use for extended periods of time  
with the engine stopped. This could  
result in a discharged battery.  
3. Open the window completely by operating  
the power window switch.  
4. Pull the power window switch and hold it to  
close the window, and then hold the switch  
more than 3 seconds after the window is  
closed completely.  
5. Release the power window switch. Operate  
the window by the automatic function to  
confirm the initialization is complete.  
If the power window automatic function does  
not operate properly after performing the pro-  
cedure above, have your vehicle checked by a  
NISSAN dealer.  
SIC4166  
MAP LIGHTS (if so equipped)  
Operate the map light switch to turn the map  
light on or off.  
1
*
: ON position  
2
*
: OFF position  
2-38 Instruments and controls  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
the map lights will illuminate under the following  
conditions:  
.
.
.
ignition switch is placed in the OFF position  
(models with Intelligent Key system)  
— remain on for about 15 seconds.  
the key is removed from the ignition switch  
(models without Intelligent Key system)  
— remain on for about 15 seconds.  
doors are unlocked by pushing the UN-  
LOCK  
button (on the keyfob or  
Intelligent Key) or the request switch (In-  
telligent Key system equipped model), with  
the ignition switch in the LOCK position  
SIC4167  
SIC4148  
MAP LIGHT CONTROL SWITCH (if so  
equipped)  
CEILING LIGHT  
— remain on for about 15 seconds.  
The ceiling light switch has three positions: ON  
.
.
any door is opened and then closed with the  
ignition switch in the LOCK position  
1
*
2
*
3
*
, center  
and OFF  
.
The map lights control switch has three posi-  
1
*
2
*
3
*
tions: ON  
, OFF  
and center  
.
ON position  
When the switch is in the ON position  
ceiling light will illuminate.  
— remain on for about 15 seconds.  
ON position  
1
, the  
*
any door is opened with the ignition switch  
in the ACC or ON position  
1
*
When the switch is in the ON position  
map lights will illuminate.  
, the  
Center position  
When the switch is in the center  
— remain on while the door is opened.  
When the door is closed, the lights go off.  
OFF position  
position  
2
, the ceiling light will illuminate under the  
2
When the switch is in the OFF position  
, the  
*
*
following conditions:  
map lights will not illuminate, regardless of the  
condition.  
The lights will turn off after 30 minutes  
when the lights remain illuminated to  
prevent the battery from becoming dis-  
charged.  
.
ignition switch is placed in the OFF position  
(models with Intelligent Key system)  
Center position  
3
When the switch is in the center position  
,
*
— remain on for about 15 seconds.  
Instruments and controls 2-39  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
CARGO LIGHT (if so equipped)  
.
.
the key is removed from the ignition switch  
(models without Intelligent Key system)  
— remain on for about 15 seconds.  
doors are unlocked by pushing the UN-  
LOCK  
button (on the keyfob or  
Intelligent Key) or the request switch (In-  
telligent Key system equipped model), with  
the ignition switch in the LOCK position  
— remain on for about 15 seconds.  
.
.
any door is opened and then closed with the  
ignition switch in the LOCK position  
— remain on for about 15 seconds.  
SIC4144  
any door is opened with the ignition switch  
in the ACC or ON position  
1
*
When the switch is in the ON position  
, the  
light illuminates while the back door is opened.  
When the back door is closed, the light will turn  
off.  
— remain on while the door is opened.  
When the door is closed, the lights go off.  
2
*
When the switch is in the OFF position  
light will turn off.  
, the  
The light will turn off after 30 minutes  
when the lights remain illuminated to  
prevent the battery from becoming dis-  
charged.  
OFF position  
3
When the switch is in the OFF position  
, the  
*
ceiling light will not illuminate, regardless of the  
condition.  
2-40 Instruments and controls  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
3 Pre-driving checks and adjustments  
Keys ............................................................... 3-2  
NISSAN Vehicle Immobilizer System keys ............ 3-2  
Intelligent Keys (if so equipped)......................... 3-3  
Doors.............................................................. 3-4  
Locking with key ............................................ 3-4  
Locking with inside lock knob ........................... 3-5  
Locking with power door lock switch .................. 3-5  
Automatic door locks ...................................... 3-5  
Child safety rear door lock ............................... 3-6  
Remote keyless entry system (if so equipped)........... 3-6  
How to use remote keyless entry system ............. 3-7  
Intelligent Key system (if so equipped) .................. 3-10  
Intelligent Key operating range ........................ 3-12  
Door locks/unlocks precaution ........................ 3-12  
Intelligent Key operation................................. 3-13  
Battery saver system..................................... 3-14  
Warning lights and audible reminders ............... 3-14  
Troubleshooting guide ................................... 3-15  
How to use remote keyless entry function .......... 3-17  
Hood ............................................................ 3-21  
Back door ...................................................... 3-22  
¯
Bumpers and side sill extensions (Krom models) ..... 3-23  
Fuel-filler door ................................................. 3-24  
Opening the fuel-filler door............................. 3-24  
Fuel-filler cap .............................................. 3-24  
Tilt steering column .......................................... 3-25  
Tilt operation............................................... 3-26  
Sun visors ...................................................... 3-26  
Mirrors........................................................... 3-26  
Inside mirror................................................ 3-26  
Outside mirrors............................................ 3-27  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
KEYS  
A key number plate is supplied with your keys.  
Record the key number and keep it in a safe  
place (such as your wallet), not in the vehicle. If  
you lose your keys, see a NISSAN dealer for  
duplicates by using the key number. NISSAN  
does not record any key numbers so it is very  
important to keep track of your key number plate.  
duplicate your existing key. As many as 5 keys  
can be used with one vehicle. You should bring  
all the registered keys that you have to a  
NISSAN dealer for registration. This is because  
the registration process will erase the memory of  
all key codes previously registered into the  
NISSAN Vehicle Immobilizer System. After the  
registration process, these components will only  
recognize keys coded into the NISSAN Vehicle  
Immobilizer System during registration. Any key  
that is not given to your dealer at the time of  
registration will no longer be able to start your  
vehicle.  
A key number is only necessary when you have  
lost all keys and do not have one to duplicate  
from. If you still have a key, this key can be  
duplicated by a NISSAN dealer.  
SPA2405  
CAUTION  
1. Master key (2 sets)  
2. Key number plate  
Do not allow the NISSAN Vehicle Im-  
mobilizer System key, which contains  
an electrical transponder, to come in  
contact with salt water. This could  
cause the system to malfunction.  
NISSAN VEHICLE IMMOBILIZER SYS-  
TEM KEYS  
Your vehicle can only be driven with the master  
keys which are registered to the NISSAN  
Vehicle Immobilizer System components in your  
vehicle. These keys have a transponder chip in  
the key head.  
Never leave these keys in the vehicle.  
Additional or replacement keys:  
If you still have a key, the key number is not  
necessary when you need extra NISSAN Vehicle  
Immobilizer System keys. Your dealer can  
3-2 Pre-driving checks and adjustments  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
nents when registering new keys, be sure to take  
all Intelligent Keys that you have to the NISSAN  
dealer.  
computer or cellular phone.  
— Do not allow the Intelligent Key  
to come into contact with water  
or salt water, and do not wash it  
CAUTION  
in  
a
washing machine. This  
could affect the system function.  
.
Be sure to carry the Intelligent Key  
with you when driving. The Intelli-  
gent Key is a precision device with a  
built-in transmitter. To avoid dama-  
ging it, please note the following.  
.
If an Intelligent Key is lost or stolen,  
NISSAN recommends erasing the ID  
code of that Intelligent Key. This will  
prevent the Intelligent Key from  
unauthorized use to unlock the  
vehicle. For information regarding  
the erasing procedure, please con-  
tact a NISSAN dealer.  
— The Intelligent Key is water  
resistant; however, wetting may  
damage the Intelligent Key. If  
the Intelligent Key gets wet,  
immediately wipe until it is com-  
pletely dry.  
SPA2406  
1. Intelligent Key (2 sets)  
2. Mechanical key (inside Intelligent Key) (2 sets)  
3. Key number plate  
— Do not bend, drop or strike it  
against another object.  
INTELLIGENT KEYS (if so equipped)  
Your vehicle can only be driven with the  
Intelligent Keys which are registered to your  
vehicle’s Intelligent Key system components and  
NISSAN Vehicle Immobilizer System compo-  
nents. As many as 4 Intelligent Keys can be  
registered and used with one vehicle. The new  
keys must be registered by a NISSAN dealer  
prior to use with the Intelligent Key system and  
NISSAN Vehicle Immobilizer System of your  
vehicle. Since the registration process requires  
erasing all memory in the Intelligent Key compo-  
— Do not place the Intelligent Key  
for an extended period in a  
place where temperatures ex-  
ceed 1408F (608C).  
— Do not change or modify the  
Intelligent Key.  
— Do not use a magnet key holder.  
— Do not place the Intelligent Key  
near an electric appliance such  
as a television set, personal  
Pre-driving checks and adjustments 3-3  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
DOORS  
WARNING  
.
Always have the doors locked while  
driving. Along with the use of seat  
belts, this provides greater safety in  
the event of an accident by helping  
to prevent persons from being  
thrown from the vehicle. This also  
helps keep children and others from  
unintentionally opening the doors,  
and will help keep out intruders.  
.
.
Before opening any door, always  
look for and avoid oncoming traffic.  
SPA2033  
SPA2602  
Do not leave children unattended  
inside the vehicle. They could un-  
knowingly activate switches or con-  
trols. Unattended children could  
become involved in serious acci-  
dents.  
Mechanical key  
LOCKING WITH KEY  
To remove the mechanical key, release the lock  
knob at the back of the Intelligent Key.  
The power door lock system allows you to lock  
or unlock all doors simultaneously.  
To install the mechanical key, firmly insert it into  
the Intelligent Key until the lock knob returns to  
the lock position.  
.
Turning the driver’s door key cylinder to the  
1
front of the vehicle  
the back door.  
will lock all doors and  
*
Use the mechanical key to lock or unlock the  
doors. (See “DOORS” later in this section.)  
.
Turning the driver’s door key cylinder once  
2
*
to the rear of the vehicle  
will unlock the  
driver’s door. After returning the key to the  
neutral position, turning it to the rear again  
within 5 seconds will unlock all doors and  
the back door.  
CAUTION  
Always carry the mechanical key in-  
stalled in the Intelligent Key.  
3-4 Pre-driving checks and adjustments  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Lockout protection  
Lockout protection function helps to prevent the  
keys from being accidentally locked inside the  
vehicle.  
For models with Intelligent Key system:  
.
When the power door lock switch (driver’s  
or front passenger’s) is moved to the lock  
position with the ignition switch placed in  
the ACC or ON position and any door open,  
all doors will lock and then unlock auto-  
matically.  
.
When the power door lock switch is moved  
to the lock position with the Intelligent Key  
left in the vehicle and any door open, all  
doors will unlock automatically and a chime  
will sound after the door is closed.  
SPA2603  
SPA2300  
LOCKING WITH INSIDE LOCK KNOB  
LOCKING WITH POWER DOOR LOCK  
SWITCH  
To lock the door without the key, move the inside  
1
lock knob to the lock position  
door.  
then close the  
Operating the power door lock switch will lock  
or unlock all the doors. The switches are located  
on the driver’s and front passenger’s door  
armrests.  
*
For models without Intelligent Key system:  
When the power door lock switch is moved to  
the lock position with the key in the ignition  
switch and any door open, all doors will lock and  
then unlock automatically.  
To unlock, move the inside lock knob to the  
2
unlock position  
.
*
To lock the doors, push the power door lock  
When locking the door without a key, be  
sure not to leave the key inside the vehicle.  
1
switch to the lock position  
with the driver’s  
*
or front passenger’s door open, then close the  
door.  
AUTOMATIC DOOR LOCKS  
.
All doors lock automatically when the vehicle  
speed reaches 15 MPH (24 km/h).  
When locking the door this way, be sure  
not to leave the key inside the vehicle.  
.
All doors unlock automatically when the  
ignition switch is placed in the OFF position  
(models with Intelligent Key system).  
To unlock the doors, push the power door lock  
2
*
switch to the unlock position  
.
Pre-driving checks and adjustments 3-5  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
REMOTE KEYLESS ENTRY SYSTEM  
(if so equipped)  
It is possible to lock/unlock all doors (including  
the back door), and activate the panic alarm by  
using the keyfob from outside the vehicle.  
Before locking the doors, make sure the  
key is not left in the vehicle.  
The keyfob can operate at a distance of  
approximately 33 ft (10 m) from the vehicle.  
(The effective distance depends upon the  
conditions around the vehicle.)  
.
All doors unlock automatically when the key  
is removed from the ignition switch (models  
without Intelligent Key system).  
The automatic unlock function can be  
deactivated or activated.  
To deactivate or activate the automatic door  
unlock system, perform the following procedure.  
1. Close all doors.  
As many as 5 keyfobs can be used with one  
vehicle. For information concerning the pur-  
chase and use of additional keyfobs, contact a  
NISSAN dealer.  
2. Place the ignition switch in the ON position.  
3. Within 20 seconds of performing step 2.  
The keyfob will not function:  
.
Push and hold the power door lock  
switch to the (UNLOCK) position  
for more than 5 seconds.  
SPA2604  
.
When the keyfob is not within the opera-  
tional range.  
CHILD SAFETY REAR DOOR LOCK  
4. When activated, the hazard warning lights  
will flash twice. When deactivated, the  
hazard warning lights will flash once.  
Child safety rear door locks help prevent the rear  
doors from being opened accidentally, espe-  
cially when small children are in the vehicle.  
.
When the doors are open or not closed  
securely.  
.
.
When the key is in the ignition switch.  
When the battery is discharged.  
5. The ignition switch must be placed in the  
OFF and ON position again between each  
setting change.  
When the levers are in the lock position  
1
, the rear doors can be opened only  
*
from the outside.  
WARNING  
When the automatic door unlock system is  
deactivated, the doors do not unlock when the  
ignition is placed in the OFF position. To unlock  
the door manually, use the inside lock knob or  
the power door lock switch (driver’s or front  
passenger’s side).  
To disengage, move the levers to the unlock  
2
position  
.
*
The remote keyless entry keyfob trans-  
mits radio waves when the buttons are  
pushed. The FAA advises that the radio  
waves may affect aircraft navigation  
and communication systems. Do not  
operate the keyfob while on an air-  
3-6 Pre-driving checks and adjustments  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
battery, see “KEY BATTERY REPLACEMENT”  
in the “8. Maintenance and do-it-yourself”  
section.  
plane. Make sure the buttons are not  
operated unintentionally when the unit  
is stored during a flight.  
CAUTION  
The following conditions or occur-  
rences will damage the keyfob.  
.
Do not allow the keyfob to become  
wet.  
.
.
Do not drop the keyfob.  
Do not strike the keyfob sharply  
against another object.  
SPA2416  
1
LOCK button  
UNLOCK button  
PANIC button  
*
.
Do not place the keyfob for an  
extended period in an area where  
temperatures exceed 1408F (608C).  
2
*
3
*
HOW TO USE REMOTE KEYLESS  
ENTRY SYSTEM  
If a keyfob is lost or stolen, NISSAN  
recommends erasing the ID code of that  
keyfob. This will prevent the keyfob  
from unauthorized use to unlock the  
vehicle. For information regarding the  
erasing procedure, please contact a  
NISSAN dealer.  
Locking doors  
1. Remove the key from the ignition switch.  
2. Close all the doors.  
1
*
3. Push the LOCK  
keyfob.  
button  
on the  
If the indicator light on the keyfob does not  
illuminate when pushing the buttons, the keyfob  
battery may be discharged.  
4. All the doors will lock.  
All of the doors will lock when the LOCK  
button is pushed even though a door  
For information regarding the replacement of a  
Pre-driving checks and adjustments 3-7  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
remains open.  
position.  
In hazard indicator only mode, when the LOCK  
button is pushed, the hazard indicator  
5. The hazard indicator flashes twice and the  
horn chirps once.  
Using panic alarm  
flashes twice. When the UNLOCK  
button  
is pushed, neither the hazard indicator nor the  
horn operates.  
If you are near your vehicle and feel threatened,  
you may activate the alarm to call attention as  
follows:  
.
When the LOCK  
button is pushed with  
all doors locked, the hazard indicator flashes  
twice and the horn chirps once as a  
reminder that the doors are already locked.  
3
*
1. Push the PANIC  
button  
on the  
keyfob for more than 1 second.  
.
Operate the door handles to confirm that the  
doors have been securely locked.  
2. The theft warning alarm and headlights will  
stay on for 25 seconds.  
Unlocking doors  
3. The panic alarm stops when:  
2
1. Push the UNLOCK  
keyfob.  
button  
on the  
*
.
.
It has run for 25 seconds, or  
Any of the buttons on the keyfob is  
pushed. (Note: the PANIC button must  
be pushed for more than 1 second.)  
.
.
The driver’s door unlocks.  
The hazard indicator flashes once if all  
doors are completely closed.  
Setting hazard indicator and horn mode  
This vehicle is set in hazard indicator and horn  
mode when you first receive the vehicle.  
2. Push the UNLOCK  
5 seconds.  
button again within  
.
.
All the doors and the back door unlock.  
In hazard indicator and horn mode, when the  
1
LOCK  
button  
is pushed, the hazard  
*
The hazard indicator flashes once if all  
doors are completely closed.  
indicator flashes twice and the horn chirps once.  
2
*
When the UNLOCK  
the hazard indicator flashes once.  
button  
is pushed,  
All doors will be locked automatically unless one  
of the following operations is performed within 1  
If the horn chirp is not necessary, you can switch  
to hazard indicator only mode by following the  
switching procedure.  
minute of pushing the UNLOCK  
button.  
Opening any door (including the back door).  
Placing the ignition switch in the ON  
.
.
3-8 Pre-driving checks and adjustments  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Mode (Pushing the  
or  
button)  
Switching procedure:  
DOOR LOCK  
HAZARD - twice  
HORN - once  
DOOR UNLOCK  
HAZARD - once  
To switch the hazard indicator and horn opera-  
tion, push the LOCK  
Hazard indicator and horn mode  
Hazard indicator mode  
HORN - none  
1
*
and UNLOCK  
2
buttons on the keyfob simultaneously  
HAZARD - twice  
HAZARD - none  
*
for more than 2 seconds.  
.
When the hazard indicator mode is set, the  
hazard indicator flashes 3 times.  
.
When the hazard indicator and horn mode is  
set, the hazard indicator flashes once and  
the horn chirps once.  
Pre-driving checks and adjustments 3-9  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
INTELLIGENT KEY SYSTEM (if so  
equipped)  
computer.  
CAUTION  
WARNING  
.
When the vehicle is parked near a parking  
meter.  
.
.
Be sure to carry the Intelligent Key  
with you when operating the vehi-  
cle.  
.
.
Radio waves could adversely affect  
electric medical equipment. Those  
who use a pacemaker should con-  
tact the electric medical equipment  
manufacturer for the possible influ-  
ences before use.  
In such cases, correct the operating conditions  
before using the Intelligent Key function or use  
the mechanical key.  
Never leave the Intelligent Key in  
the vehicle when you leave the  
vehicle.  
Although the life of the battery varies depending  
on the operating conditions, the battery’s life is  
approximately 2 years. If the battery is dis-  
charged, replace it with a new one.  
The Intelligent Key transmits radio  
waves when the buttons are  
pushed. The FAA advises that the  
radio waves may affect aircraft na-  
vigation and communication sys-  
t e m s . D o n o t o p e r a t e t h e  
Intelligent Key while on an airplane.  
Make sure the buttons are not  
operated unintentionally when the  
unit is stored during a flight.  
The Intelligent Key is always communicating with  
the vehicle as it receives radio waves. The  
Intelligent Key system transmits weak radio  
waves. Environmental conditions may interfere  
with the operation of the Intelligent Key system  
under the following operating conditions.  
Since the Intelligent Key is continuously receiv-  
ing radio waves, if the key is left near equipment  
which transmits strong radio waves, such as  
signals from a TV and personal computer, the  
battery life may become shorter.  
.
When operating near a location where  
strong radio waves are transmitted, such  
as a TV tower, power station and broad-  
casting station.  
For information regarding replacement of a  
battery, see “KEY BATTERY REPLACEMENT”  
in the “8. Maintenance and do-it-yourself”  
section.  
The Intelligent Key system can operate all the  
door locks using the remote controller function  
or pushing the request switch on the vehicle  
without taking the key out from a pocket or  
purse. The operating environment and/or condi-  
tions may affect the Intelligent Key system  
operation.  
.
When in possession of wireless equipment,  
such as a cellular phone, transceiver, and  
CB radio.  
Because the steering wheel is locked electri-  
cally, unlocking the steering wheel with the  
ignition switch in the LOCK position is impos-  
sible when the vehicle battery is completely  
discharged. Always be careful that the vehicle  
battery is not completely discharged.  
.
.
.
When the Intelligent Key is in contact with or  
covered by metallic materials.  
When any type of radio wave remote control  
is used nearby.  
Be sure to read the following before using the  
Intelligent Key system.  
As many as 4 Intelligent Keys can be registered  
and used with one vehicle. For information about  
the purchase and use of additional Intelligent  
When the Intelligent Key is placed near an  
electric appliance such as a personal  
3-10 Pre-driving checks and adjustments  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Keys, contact a NISSAN dealer.  
cellular phone.  
If an Intelligent Key is lost or stolen, NISSAN  
recommends erasing the ID code of that  
Intelligent Key from the vehicle. This may prevent  
the unauthorized use of the Intelligent Key to  
operate the vehicle. For information regarding  
the erasing procedure, contact a NISSAN deal-  
er.  
CAUTION  
.
Do not allow the Intelligent Key,  
which contains electrical compo-  
nents, to come into contact with  
water or salt water. This could affect  
the system function.  
The Intelligent Key function can be disabled. For  
information about disabling the Intelligent Key  
function, contact a NISSAN dealer.  
.
.
Do not drop the Intelligent Key.  
Do not strike the Intelligent Key  
sharply against another object.  
.
.
Do not change or modify the Intel-  
ligent Key.  
Wetting may damage the Intelligent  
Key. If the Intelligent Key gets wet,  
immediately wipe until it is comple-  
tely dry.  
.
.
.
Do not place the Intelligent Key for  
an extended period in an area where  
temperatures exceed 1408F (608C).  
Do not attach the Intelligent Key  
with a key holder that contains a  
magnet.  
Do not place the Intelligent Key near  
equipment that produces a mag-  
netic field, such as a TV, audio  
equipment, personal computers or  
Pre-driving checks and adjustments 3-11  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
SPA2407  
SPA2612  
DOOR LOCKS/UNLOCKS PRECAU-  
TION  
switches may not function.  
INTELLIGENT KEY OPERATING  
RANGE  
When the Intelligent Key is within the operating  
range, it is possible for anyone who does not  
carry the Intelligent Key to push the request  
switch to lock/unlock the doors including the  
back door.  
.
Do not push the door handle request switch  
with the Intelligent Key held in your hand as  
illustrated. The close distance to the door  
handle will cause the Intelligent Key system  
to have difficulty recognizing that the In-  
telligent Key is outside the vehicle.  
The Intelligent Key functions can only be used  
when the Intelligent Key is within the specified  
operating range from the request switch  
1
*
.
When the Intelligent Key battery is discharged or  
strong radio waves are present near the operat-  
ing location, the Intelligent Key system’s operat-  
ing range becomes narrower, and the Intelligent  
Key may not function properly.  
.
.
After locking with the door handle request  
switch, verify the doors are securely locked  
by testing them.  
The operating range is within 31.50 in (80 cm)  
To prevent the Intelligent Key from being left  
inside the vehicle, make sure you carry the  
key with you and then lock the doors.  
1
*
from each request switch  
.
If the Intelligent Key is too close to the door  
glass, handle or rear bumper, the request  
3-12 Pre-driving checks and adjustments  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
.
Do not pull the door handle before pushing  
the door handle request switch. The door  
will be unlocked but will not open. Release  
the door handle once and pull it again to  
open the door.  
SPA2408  
SPA2606  
INTELLIGENT KEY OPERATION  
You can lock or unlock the doors without taking  
the key out from your pocket or bag.  
When you carry the Intelligent Key with you, you  
can lock or unlock all doors by pushing the door  
handle request switch (driver’s or front passen-  
A
B
*
ger’s)  
or back door request switch  
*
within the range of operation.  
When you lock or unlock the doors, the hazard  
indicator will flash and the horn (or the outside  
chime) will sound as a confirmation. For details,  
see “Setting hazard indicator and horn mode”  
later in this section.  
SPA2605  
Pre-driving checks and adjustments 3-13  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
WARNING LIGHTS AND AUDIBLE  
REMINDERS  
2. The hazard indicator flashes once and out-  
side chime sounds once. The corresponding  
door or the back door will unlock.  
Locking doors  
1. Place the ignition switch in the OFF position  
and carry the Intelligent Key with you.*1  
To help prevent the vehicle from moving  
unexpectedly by erroneous operation of the  
Intelligent Key listed on the following chart or  
to help prevent the vehicle from being stolen,  
chime or beep sounds inside and outside the  
vehicle and a warning light illuminates or blinks.  
3. Push the request switch again within 1  
minute.  
2. Close all the doors.*2  
3. Push the door handle request switch (dri-  
4. The hazard indicator flashes once and out-  
side chime sounds once again. All the doors  
and the back door will unlock.  
A
ver’s or front passenger’s)  
or the back  
*
B
door request switch  
*
while carrying the  
Intelligent Key with you.*3  
When a chime or beep sounds or the warning  
light illuminates or blinks, be sure to check the  
vehicle and Intelligent Key.  
All doors will be locked automatically unless one  
of the following operations is performed within 1  
minute after pushing the request switch while  
the doors are locked.  
4. All the doors and the back door will lock.  
5. The hazard indicator flashes twice and the  
outside chime sounds twice.  
See “TROUBLESHOOTING GUIDE” later in  
this section and “WARNING/INDICATOR  
LIGHTS AND AUDIBLE REMINDERS” in the  
“2. Instruments and controls” section.  
.
.
Opening any door.  
*1: Doors will lock with the request switch while  
the ignition switch is in the ACC or ON  
position.  
Pushing the ignition switch.  
Intelligent Key system warning light:  
P position selecting warning light:  
During this 1-minute time period, if the UNLOCK  
button on the Intelligent Key is pushed, all  
doors will be locked automatically after another  
1 minute.  
*2: Doors will not lock with the request switch  
while any door is open.  
*3: Doors will not lock with the request switch  
when the Intelligent Key is left inside the  
vehicle. However, when an Intelligent Key is  
inside the vehicle, doors can be locked with  
another registered Intelligent Key.  
BATTERY SAVER SYSTEM  
When all the following conditions are met for 60  
minutes, the battery saver system will cut off the  
power supply to prevent battery discharge.  
Unlocking doors  
.
The ignition switch is in the ACC position,  
and  
A
1. Push the door handle request switch  
or  
*
B
the back door request switch  
*
while  
carrying the Intelligent Key with you.  
.
.
All doors are closed, and  
The selector lever is in the P (Park) position.  
3-14 Pre-driving checks and adjustments  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
TROUBLESHOOTING GUIDE  
Symptom  
Possible cause  
Action to take  
The P position selecting warning light in the  
meter illuminates and the inside warning chime  
sounds continuously.  
When pushing the ignition switch  
to stop the engine  
The selector lever is not in the P (Park) Shift the selector lever to the P (Park)  
position. position.  
When shifting the selector lever  
to the P (Park) position.  
The ignition switch is in the ACC or ON Push the ignition switch to the OFF posi-  
The inside warning chime sounds continuously.  
position.  
tion.  
When opening the driver’s door  
to get out of the vehicle  
The ignition switch is in the ACC  
position.  
Push the ignition switch to the OFF posi-  
tion.  
The inside warning chime sounds continuously.  
The Intelligent Key system warning light in the  
meter blinks in yellow, and the outside chime The ignition switch is in the ACC or ON Push the ignition switch to the OFF posi-  
sounds 3 times and the inside warning chime position.  
sounds for a few seconds.  
tion.  
When closing the door after get-  
ting out of the vehicle  
The P position selecting warning light in the  
meter illuminates and the outside chime  
sounds continuously.  
The ignition switch is in the ACC or OFF Move the selector lever to the P (Park)  
position and the selector lever is not in position and push the ignition switch to the  
the P (Park) position.  
OFF position.  
When closing the door with the The outside chime sounds for a few seconds  
inside lock knob turned to LOCK and all the doors unlock.  
The Intelligent Key is inside the vehicle. Carry the Intelligent Key with you.  
The Intelligent Key is inside the vehicle. Carry the Intelligent Key with you.  
When pushing the request switch  
or the LOCK  
button on the The outside chime sounds for a few seconds.  
Intelligent Key to lock the door  
A door is not closed securely.  
Close the door securely.  
Replace the battery with a new one. (See  
“KEY BATTERY REPLACEMENT” in the “8.  
Maintenance and do-it-yourself” section.)  
The Intelligent Key system warning light in the  
meter blinks in green.  
The battery charge is low.  
When pushing the ignition switch  
to start the engine  
The Intelligent Key system warning light in the  
meter blinks in yellow and the inside warning The Intelligent Key is not in the vehicle. Carry the Intelligent Key with you.  
chime sounds for a few seconds.  
Pre-driving checks and adjustments 3-15  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Symptom  
Possible cause  
Action to take  
It warns of a malfunction with the  
electrical steering lock system or the  
Intelligent Key system.  
The Intelligent Key system warning light in the  
meter illuminates in yellow.  
When pushing the ignition switch  
Contact a NISSAN dealer.  
3-16 Pre-driving checks and adjustments  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
HOW TO USE REMOTE KEYLESS  
ENTRY FUNCTION  
The remote keyless entry function will not  
operate:  
.
.
Do not drop the Intelligent Key.  
Do not strike the Intelligent Key  
sharply against another object.  
.
.
.
When the Intelligent Key is not within the  
operational range.  
WARNING  
.
.
Do not change or modify the Intel-  
ligent Key.  
When the doors are open or not closed  
securely.  
.
.
Radio waves could adversely affect  
electric medical equipment. Those  
who use a pacemaker should con-  
tact the electric medical equipment  
manufacturer for the possible influ-  
ences before use.  
Wetting may damage the Intelligent  
Key. If the Intelligent Key gets wet,  
immediately wipe until it is comple-  
tely dry.  
When the Intelligent Key battery is dis-  
charged.  
The remote keyless entry function can also  
operate the vehicle alarm.  
.
.
.
Do not place the Intelligent Key for  
an extended period in an area where  
temperatures exceed 1408F (608C).  
The Intelligent Key transmits radio  
waves when the buttons are  
pushed. The FAA advises that the  
radio waves may affect aircraft na-  
vigation and communication sys-  
t e m s . D o n o t o p e r a t e t h e  
Intelligent Key while on an airplane.  
Make sure the buttons are not  
operated unintentionally when the  
unit is stored during a flight.  
Do not attach the Intelligent Key  
with a key holder that contains a  
magnet.  
Do not place the Intelligent Key near  
equipment that produces a mag-  
netic field, such as a TV, audio  
equipment, personal computers or  
cellular phone.  
The remote keyless entry function can operate  
all door locks using the remote keyless entry  
function of the Intelligent Key. The remote  
keyless entry function can operate at a distance  
of approximately 33 ft (10 m) from the vehicle.  
(The operating distance depends upon the  
conditions around the vehicle.)  
CAUTION  
.
Do not allow the Intelligent Key,  
which contains electrical compo-  
nents, to come into contact with  
water or salt water. This could affect  
the system function.  
Pre-driving checks and adjustments 3-17  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Intelligent Key.  
.
Pushing the ignition switch.  
5. All the doors and the back door will lock.  
During this 1-minute time period, if the UNLOCK  
button is pushed, all doors will be locked  
automatically after another 1 minute.  
6. The hazard indicator flashes twice and the  
horn chirps once.  
Using panic alarm  
*1: Doors will lock with the Intelligent Key while  
the ignition switch is in the ACC or ON  
position.  
If you are near your vehicle and feel threatened,  
you may activate the alarm to call attention as  
follows:  
*2: Doors will not lock with the Intelligent Key  
while any door is open.  
3
*
1. Push the PANIC  
button  
on the  
Intelligent Key for more than 1 second.  
Operate the door handles to confirm that the  
doors have been securely locked.  
2. The theft warning alarm and headlights will  
stay on for 25 seconds.  
SPA2252  
Unlocking doors  
3. The panic alarm stops when:  
1
LOCK  
button  
button  
button  
*
2
1. Push the UNLOCK  
Intelligent Key once.  
button  
on the  
*
2
UNLOCK  
PANIC  
*
.
.
It has run for 25 seconds, or  
3
*
2. The hazard indicator flashes once. The  
driver’s door will unlock.  
Any of the buttons on the Intelligent Key  
is pushed. (Note: the PANIC button  
When you lock or unlock the doors, the hazard  
indicator will flash and the horn will sound as a  
confirmation. For details, see “Setting hazard  
indicator and horn mode” later in this section.  
must be pushed for more than  
second.)  
1
3. Push the UNLOCK  
1 minute.  
button again within  
Setting hazard indicator and horn mode  
This vehicle is set in hazard indicator and horn  
mode when you first receive the vehicle.  
Locking doors  
1. Place the ignition switch in the OFF position  
and carry the Intelligent Key with you.*1  
4. The hazard indicator flashes once. All the  
doors and the back door will unlock.  
All doors will be locked automatically unless one  
of the following operations is performed within 1  
In hazard indicator and horn mode, when the  
2. Carry the Intelligent Key with you.  
1
LOCK  
button  
is pushed, the hazard  
*
minute after pushing the UNLOCK  
while the doors are locked.  
button  
indicator flashes twice and the horn chirps once.  
3. Close all the doors.*2  
2
*
When the UNLOCK  
the hazard indicator flashes once.  
button  
is pushed,  
1
*
4. Push the LOCK  
button  
on the  
.
Opening any door (including the back door).  
3-18 Pre-driving checks and adjustments  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
If horns are not necessary, the system can be  
switched to the hazard indicator mode.  
Hazard indicator and horn mode:  
Operation  
DOOR LOCK  
HAZARD - twice  
DOOR UNLOCK  
HAZARD - once  
In hazard indicator mode, when the LOCK  
button is pushed, the hazard indicator flashes  
Pushing door handle request switch  
or back door request switch  
OUTSIDE CHIME - twice  
OUTSIDE CHIME - once  
twice. When the UNLOCK  
button is  
pushed, neither the hazard indicator nor the  
horn operates.  
HAZARD - twice  
HORN - once  
HAZARD - once  
HORN - none  
Pushing  
or  
button  
Hazard indicator mode:  
Operation  
DOOR LOCK  
DOOR UNLOCK  
Pushing door handle request switch  
or back door request switch  
HAZARD - none  
OUTSIDE CHIME - none  
HAZARD - twice  
OUTSIDE CHIME - none  
HAZARD - none  
HORN - none  
HAZARD - twice  
HORN - none  
Pushing  
or  
button  
Pre-driving checks and adjustments 3-19  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Switching procedure:  
To switch the hazard indicator and horn (chime)  
1
operation, push the LOCK  
and UN-  
*
2
LOCK  
buttons on the Intelligent Key  
simultaneously for more than 2 seconds.  
*
.
When the hazard indicator mode is set, the  
hazard indicator flashes 3 times.  
.
When the hazard indicator and horn mode is  
set, the hazard indicator flashes once and  
the horn chirps once.  
3-20 Pre-driving checks and adjustments  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
HOOD  
WARNING  
.
.
Make sure the hood is completely  
closed and latched before driving.  
Failure to do so could cause the  
hood to fly open and result in an  
accident.  
If you see steam or smoke coming  
from the engine compartment, to  
avoid injury do not open the hood.  
SPA2607  
When opening the hood:  
be hot immediately after the engine has  
been stopped.  
1
1. Pull the hood release handle  
located  
*
below the instrument panel; the hood will  
then spring up slightly.  
When closing the hood:  
1. Return the support rod to its original  
position.  
2
2. Locate the lever  
in between the hood  
*
and grille, and push the lever sideways with  
your fingertips.  
2. Slowly move the hood down to latch the  
lock.  
3
3. Raise the hood  
.
*
3. Push the hood down to lock the hood  
securely into place.  
4
4. Remove the support rod  
from the hood  
*
5
*
and insert it into the slot  
.
A
Hold the coated part  
*
when removing or  
resetting the support rod. Avoid direct  
contact with the metal parts, as they may  
Pre-driving checks and adjustments 3-21  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
BACK DOOR  
WARNING  
.
.
Always be sure the back door has  
been closed securely to prevent it  
from opening while driving.  
Do not drive with the back door  
open. This could allow dangerous  
exhaust gases to be drawn into the  
vehicle. See “EXHAUST GAS (car-  
bon monoxide)” in the “5. Starting  
and driving” section of this manual.  
.
Make sure that all passengers have  
their hands, etc. inside the vehicle  
before closing the back door.  
SPA2608  
SPA2609  
To open the back door, unlock it and pull the  
handle.  
CAUTION  
The back door can be unlocked by:  
Do not step or place heavy objects on  
the back door opening (over the rear  
combination lights). Doing so could  
cause damage to the rear combination  
lights and/or personal injury.  
—
pushing the UNLOCK  
button on the  
keyfob or the Intelligent Key (if so equipped)  
twice.  
—
—
—
pushing the back door request switch (if so  
equipped).  
pushing the power door lock switch to the  
unlock position.  
inserting the key into the driver’s door key  
cylinder and turning it to the rear of the  
vehicle twice.  
3-22 Pre-driving checks and adjustments  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
BUMPERS AND SIDE SILL  
¯
EXTENSIONS (Krom models)  
¯
The Krom models have unique front and rear  
bumpers and side sill extensions. These parts  
are close to the ground and may be damaged if  
they contact objects such as curbs, parking  
blocks, etc.  
CAUTION  
Reduce vehicle speed to decrease the  
possibility of damaging these parts  
when:  
.
.
driving on bumpy or rutted roads  
entering or exiting parking garages  
and driveways  
SPA2624  
.
driving over speed bumps.  
CAUTION  
The approach and departure angles are  
small. Reduce vehicle speed when the  
vehicle approaches or leaves a steep  
hill. Otherwise, the front and rear bum-  
pers may contact the road surface and  
be damaged.  
SPA2623  
Pre-driving checks and adjustments 3-23  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
FUEL-FILLER DOOR  
mishandled. Always stop engine  
and do not smoke or allow open  
flames or sparks near the vehicle  
when refueling.  
.
.
Do not attempt to top off the fuel  
tank after the fuel pump nozzle  
shuts off automatically. Continued  
refueling may cause fuel overflow,  
resulting in fuel spray and possibly  
a fire.  
Use only an original equipment type  
fuel-filler cap as a replacement. It  
has a built-in safety valve needed  
for proper operation of the fuel  
system and emission control sys-  
tem. An incorrect cap can result in a  
serious malfunction and possible  
injury. It could also cause the mal-  
function indicator light to come on.  
SPA2610  
SPA2336  
FUEL-FILLER CAP  
OPENING THE FUEL-FILLER DOOR  
The fuel-filler cap is a ratcheting type. Turn the  
To open the fuel-filler door, pull the release  
handle located below the instrument panel. To  
lock, close the fuel-filler door securely.  
1
cap counterclockwise  
turn the cap clockwise  
are heard.  
to remove. To tighten,  
until ratcheting clicks  
*
2
*
.
.
Never pour fuel into the throttle  
body to attempt to start your vehi-  
cle.  
A
Put the fuel-filler cap on the cap holder  
while refueling.  
*
Do not fill a portable fuel container  
in the vehicle or trailer. Static elec-  
tricity can cause an explosion of  
flammable liquid, vapor or gas in  
any vehicle or trailer. To reduce the  
risk of serious injury or death when  
WARNING  
.
Gasoline is extremely flammable  
and highly explosive under certain  
conditions. You could be burned or  
seriously injured if it is misused or  
3-24 Pre-driving checks and adjustments  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
TILT STEERING COLUMN  
filling portable fuel containers:  
off after a few driving trips, have the  
vehicle inspected by a NISSAN deal-  
er.  
WARNING  
— Always place the container on  
the ground when filling.  
Do not adjust the steering wheel while  
driving. You could lose control of your  
vehicle and cause an accident.  
— Do not use electronic devices  
when filling.  
For additional information, see  
“Malfunction Indicator Light (MIL)”  
in the “2. Instruments and controls”  
section.  
— Keep the pump nozzle in contact  
with the container while you are  
filling it.  
— Use only approved portable fuel  
containers for flammable liquid.  
CAUTION  
.
.
If fuel is spilled on the vehicle body,  
flush it away with water to avoid  
paint damage.  
Insert the cap straight into the fuel-  
filler tube, then tighten until the  
fuel-filler cap clicks. Failure to tight-  
en the fuel-filler cap properly may  
cause the  
malfunction indicator  
light (MIL) to illuminate. If the  
light illuminates because the fuel-  
filler cap is loose or missing, tighten  
or install the cap and continue to  
drive the vehicle. The  
should turn off after a few driving  
trips. If the light does not turn  
light  
Pre-driving checks and adjustments 3-25  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
SUN VISORS  
MIRRORS  
SPA2611  
SPA2447  
TILT OPERATION  
INSIDE MIRROR  
1
Push the lock lever down  
steering wheel up or down  
position.  
and adjust the  
to the desired  
Adjust the angle of the inside mirror to the  
desired position.  
*
2
*
3
Pull the lock lever up  
*
securely to lock the  
steering wheel in place.  
SIC2872  
1. To block out glare from the front, swing  
1
*
down the sun visor  
.
2. To block glare from the side, remove the sun  
visor from the center mount and swing it to  
2
*
the side  
.
3-26 Pre-driving checks and adjustments  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
The outside mirror will operate only when the  
ignition switch is in the ACC or ON position.  
1
2
Move the switch right  
or left  
to select  
*
*
3
the right or left side mirror, then adjust  
the control switch.  
using  
*
Defrosting outside mirrors (if so  
equipped)  
The outside mirrors will be heated when the rear  
window defroster switch is operated. (See  
“REAR WINDOW AND OUTSIDE MIRROR  
DEFROSTER SWITCH” in the “2. Instruments  
and controls” section.)  
SPA2143  
SPA2214  
Manual anti-glare type  
OUTSIDE MIRRORS  
1
The night position  
will reduce glare from the  
*
headlights of vehicles behind you at night.  
WARNING  
2
Use the day position  
hours.  
when driving in daylight  
*
Objects viewed in the outside mirror on  
the passenger side are closer than they  
appear. Be careful when moving to the  
right. Using only this mirror could cause  
an accident. Use the inside mirror or  
glance over your shoulder to properly  
judge distances to other objects.  
WARNING  
Use the night position only when ne-  
cessary, because it reduces rear view  
clarity.  
Adjusting outside mirrors  
The outside mirror control switch is located at  
the lower part of the instrument panel.  
Pre-driving checks and adjustments 3-27  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
SPA1829  
Foldable outside mirrors  
Fold the outside mirror by pushing it toward the  
rear of the vehicle.  
3-28 Pre-driving checks and adjustments  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
4 Heater, air conditioner, audio and phone  
systems  
Safety note....................................................... 4-2  
RearView monitor (if so equipped) ......................... 4-2  
How to read the displayed lines......................... 4-3  
How to adjust the screen................................. 4-4  
Operating tips ............................................... 4-4  
Ventilators ........................................................ 4-5  
Center ventilators........................................... 4-5  
Side ventilators.............................................. 4-5  
Heater and air conditioner .................................... 4-6  
Manual air conditioner (if so equipped)................ 4-6  
Automatic air conditioner (if so equipped) .......... 4-10  
Operating tips ............................................. 4-12  
In-cabin microfilter........................................ 4-12  
Servicing air conditioner ................................ 4-12  
Audio system .................................................. 4-13  
Audio operation precautions ........................... 4-13  
FM-AM radio with Compact Disc (CD) player  
(Type B)..................................................... 4-29  
FM-AM-SAT radio with Compact Disc (CD)  
player........................................................ 4-35  
CD care and cleaning ................................... 4-41  
Steering wheel switch for audio control  
(if so equipped) ........................................... 4-41  
Antenna ..................................................... 4-42  
Car phone or CB radio...................................... 4-44  
Bluetooth® Hands-Free Phone System  
(if so equipped) ............................................... 4-44  
Regulatory information................................... 4-46  
Using the system ......................................... 4-46  
Control buttons ........................................... 4-48  
Getting started ............................................ 4-49  
List of voice commands ................................. 4-50  
Speaker Adaptation (SA) mode ....................... 4-54  
Troubleshooting guide ................................... 4-56  
FM-AM radio with Compact Disc (CD) player  
(Type A)..................................................... 4-25  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
REARVIEW MONITOR (if so  
equipped)  
SAFETY NOTE  
When the selector lever is shifted into the R  
(Reverse) position, the monitor display shows  
the view to the rear of the vehicle.  
because of its monitoring range  
limitation.  
WARNING  
.
.
Do not put anything on the rear view  
camera.  
.
.
Do not disassemble or modify this  
system. If you do, it may result in  
accidents, fire, or electric shock.  
The system is designed as an aid to the driver in  
detecting large stationary objects to help avoid  
damaging the vehicle. The system will not detect  
small objects below the bumper and may not  
detect objects close to the bumper or on the  
ground.  
When washing the vehicle with  
high-pressure water, be sure not to  
spray it around the camera. Other-  
wise, water may enter the camera  
unit causing water condensation on  
the lens, a malfunction, fire or an  
electric shock.  
Do not use this system if you notice  
any abnormality, such as a frozen  
screen or lack of sound. Continued  
use of the system may result in  
accident, fire or electric shock.  
WARNING  
.
In case you notice any foreign  
object in the system hardware, spill  
liquid on it, or notice smoke or smell  
coming from it, stop using the  
system immediately and contact  
your nearest NISSAN dealer. Ignor-  
ing such conditions may lead to  
accidents, fire, or electric shock.  
.
.
The rear view camera is a conve-  
nience but it is not a substitute for  
proper backing up. Always turn and  
check that it is safe to do so before  
backing up. Always back up slowly.  
.
Do not strike the camera. It is a  
precision instrument. Otherwise, it  
may malfunction or cause damage  
resulting in a fire or an electric  
shock.  
Objects viewed in the RearView  
Monitor differ from actual distance  
because a wide-angle lens is used.  
Objects in the RearView Monitor  
will appear visually opposite than  
when viewed in the rear view and  
outside mirrors.  
CAUTION  
Do not attempt to operate the system in  
extreme temperature conditions [below  
−48F (−208C) and above 1588F (708C)].  
Operating this system under these condi-  
tions may result in system malfunctions.  
Do not scratch the camera lens when  
cleaning dirt or snow from the lens.  
.
.
Make sure that the back door is  
securely closed when backing up.  
Underneath the bumper and the  
corner areas of the bumper cannot  
be viewed on the RearView Monitor  
4-2 Heater, air conditioner, audio and phone systems  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
5
*
Vehicle width guide lines  
:
Indicate the vehicle width when backing up.  
SAA2776  
HOW TO READ THE DISPLAYED  
LINES  
Guiding lines which indicate the vehicle width  
and distances to objects with reference to the  
A
*
bumper line  
are displayed on the monitor.  
Distance guide lines:  
SAA2777  
Indicate distances from the vehicle body.  
Backing up on a steep uphill  
1
.
.
.
.
Red line  
: approx. 1.5 ft (0.5 m)  
*
When backing up the vehicle up a hill, the  
distance guide lines and the vehicle width guide  
lines are shown closer than the actual distance.  
For example, the display shows 3 ft (1.0 m) to  
A
2
*
Yellow line  
Green line  
Green line  
: approx. 3 ft (1 m)  
3
: approx. 7 ft (2 m)  
: approx. 10 ft (3 m)  
*
4
*
the place  
distance on the hill is the place  
, but the actual 3 ft (1.0 m)  
*
B
. Note that  
*
Heater, air conditioner, audio and phone systems 4-3  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
any object on the hill is viewed in the monitor  
further than it appears.  
any object on the hill is viewed in the monitor  
closer than it appears.  
HOW TO ADJUST THE SCREEN  
To adjust the Brightness and Contrast of the  
RearView Monitor, push the SETTING button  
until the desired mode is displayed with the  
RearView Monitor on, and turn the TUNE control  
dial to adjust the brightness and contrast of the  
screen to the preferred level.  
OPERATING TIPS  
.
When the selector lever is shifted to the R  
(Reverse) position, the monitor screen auto-  
matically changes to the RearView Monitor  
mode. However, the radio can be heard.  
.
It may take some time until the RearView  
Monitor or the normal screen is displayed  
after the selector lever has been shifted to R  
from another position or to another position  
from R. Objects may be distorted momenta-  
rily until the RearView Monitor screen is  
displayed completely.  
SAA2778  
.
.
When the temperature is extremely high or  
low, the screen may not clearly display  
objects. This is not a malfunction.  
Backing up on a steep downhill  
When backing up the vehicle down a hill, the  
distance guide lines and the vehicle width guide  
lines are shown further than the actual distance.  
For example, the display shows 3 ft (1.0 m) to  
A
When strong light directly enters the cam-  
era, objects may not be displayed clearly.  
This is not a malfunction.  
the place  
distance on the hill is the place  
, but the actual 3 ft (1.0 m)  
*
B
. Note that  
*
4-4 Heater, air conditioner, audio and phone systems  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
VENTILATORS  
.
Vertical lines may be seen in objects on the  
screen. This is due to strong reflected light  
from the bumper. This is not a malfunction.  
.
.
The screen may flicker under fluorescent  
light. This is not a malfunction.  
The colors of objects on the RearView  
Monitor may differ somewhat from those of  
the actual object.  
.
.
.
Objects on the monitor may not be clear in a  
dark place or at night. This is not a  
malfunction.  
If dirt, rain or snow attaches to the camera,  
the RearView Monitor may not clearly dis-  
play objects. Clean the camera.  
SAA2344  
SAA2343  
SIDE VENTILATORS  
CENTER VENTILATORS  
Do not use alcohol, benzine or thinner to  
clean the camera. This will cause discolora-  
tion. To clean the camera, wipe with a cloth  
dampened with diluted mild cleaning agent  
and then wipe with a dry cloth.  
Adjust the air flow direction of ventilators as  
illustrated.  
Open or close, and adjust the air flow direction  
of ventilators as illustrated.  
:
This symbol indicates that the vents are  
closed.  
.
.
Do not damage the camera as the monitor  
screen may be adversely affected.  
:
This symbol indicates that the vents are  
open.  
Do not use wax on the camera window.  
Wipe off any wax with a clean cloth  
dampened with mild detergent diluted with  
water.  
Heater, air conditioner, audio and phone systems 4-5  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
HEATER AND AIR CONDITIONER  
WARNING  
.
.
The air conditioner cooling function  
operates only when the engine is  
running.  
Do not leave children or adults who  
would normally require the support  
of others alone in your vehicle. Pets  
should not be left alone either. On  
hot, sunny days, temperatures in a  
closed vehicle could quickly become  
high enough to cause severe or  
possibly fatal injuries to people or  
animals.  
SAA2345  
1. Rear window defroster  
button (See “REAR  
MANUAL AIR CONDITIONER (if so  
.
Do not use the recirculation mode  
for long periods as it may cause the  
interior air to become stale and the  
windows to fog up.  
WINDOW AND OUTSIDE MIRROR DEFROS-  
TER SWITCH” in the “2. Instruments and con-  
trols” section.)  
equipped)  
Controls  
2. Fan speed control  
dial  
Outside air circulation:  
3. A/C (Air Conditioner) button  
4. Air flow control dial  
Start the engine and operate the heater and the  
air conditioner system.  
Push the air recirculation  
the indicator light on the button. The air flow is  
drawn from outside the vehicle.  
button to turn off  
5. Air recirculation  
button  
6. Temperature control dial  
To turn off the heater and air conditioner, turn the  
Air recirculation:  
fan speed control  
position.  
dial to the OFF (0)  
Push the air recirculation  
button to turn on  
the indicator light on the button. The air flow is  
circulated inside the vehicle.  
4-6 Heater, air conditioner, audio and phone systems  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
3. Turn the fan speed control  
desired position.  
dial to the  
Air flow control:  
Fan speed control:  
Turn the air flow control dial to change the air  
flow mode.  
Turn the fan speed control  
increase the fan speed.  
dial clockwise to  
dial counter-  
4. Turn the temperature control dial to the  
desired position between the middle and the  
hot (right) position.  
—
Air flows from the center and side  
ventilators.  
Turn the fan speed control  
clockwise to decrease the fan speed.  
Ventilation:  
—
Air flows from the center and side  
ventilators and foot outlets.  
A/C (Air Conditioner) operation:  
This mode directs outside air to the side and  
center ventilators.  
Push the A/C button to turn on or off the air  
conditioner. When the air conditioner is on, the  
A/C indicator light on the button illuminates.  
—
—
Air flows mainly from the foot outlets.  
1. Push the air recirculation  
button to  
Air flows from the defroster and foot  
outlets.  
switch to the outside air circulation mode.  
(The indicator light turns off.)  
Temperature control:  
—
Air flows mainly from the defroster  
outlets.  
Turn the temperature control dial to set the  
desired temperature. Turn the dial between the  
middle and the right position (in red) to select  
the hot temperature. Turn the dial between the  
middle and the left position (in blue) to select the  
cool temperature.  
2. Turn the air flow control dial to the  
position.  
.
When the  
or  
position is selected,  
3. Turn the fan speed control  
desired position.  
dial to the  
the air conditioner will automatically turn on.  
This will dehumidify the air and help to defog  
the windows. The A/C indicator light will  
illuminate when the air conditioner automa-  
tically turns on. The air conditioner and A/C  
indicator light will remain on in all flow  
control modes until the A/C button is  
pressed or the fan control dial is turned to  
off.  
Defrosting or defogging:  
Heater operation  
This mode directs the air to the defroster outlets  
to defrost/defog the windows.  
Heating:  
1. Turn the air flow control dial to the  
position.  
This mode is used to direct heated air to the foot  
outlets.  
2. Turn the fan speed control  
desired position.  
dial to the  
1. Push the air recirculation  
button to  
.
When the  
or  
position is selected,  
switch to the outside air circulation mode.  
(The indicator light turns off.)  
the air recirculation mode cannot be turned  
on to prevent the windows from being  
fogged up.  
3. Turn the temperature control dial to the  
desired position between the middle and the  
hot (right) position.  
2. Turn the air flow control dial to the  
position.  
Heater, air conditioner, audio and phone systems 4-7  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
.
.
To remove frost from the outside surface of  
the windshield quickly, turn the temperature  
control dial to the maximum hot position and  
4. Turn the temperature control dial to the  
desired position.  
Cooling:  
This mode is used to cool and dehumidify the air.  
Heating and defogging:  
the fan speed control  
(IIII) position.  
dial to maximum  
1. Push the air recirculation  
button to  
This mode heats the interior and defogs the  
windows.  
switch to the outside air circulation mode.  
(The indicator light turns off.)  
When the  
position is selected, the air  
conditioner will automatically turn on. This  
will dehumidify the air and help to defog the  
windows. The A/C indicator light will illumi-  
nate when the air conditioner automatically  
turns on. The air conditioner and A/C  
indicator light will remain on in all flow  
control modes until the A/C button is  
pressed or the fan control dial is turned to  
off.  
1. Turn the air flow control dial to the  
position.  
2. Turn the air flow control dial to the  
position.  
2. Turn the fan speed control  
desired position.  
dial to the  
3. Turn the fan speed control  
desired position.  
dial to the  
3. Turn the temperature control dial to the  
desired position.  
4. Push the A/C button on. (The A/C indicator  
light will illuminate.)  
When the  
position is selected, the air  
5. Turn the temperature control dial to the  
desired position between the middle and the  
cool (left) position.  
conditioner will automatically turn on. This will  
dehumidify the air and help to defog the  
windows. The A/C indicator light will illuminate  
when the air conditioner automatically turns on.  
The air conditioner and A/C indicator light will  
remain on in all flow control modes until the A/C  
button is pressed or the fan control dial is turned  
to off.  
Bi-level heating:  
This mode directs cool air from the side and  
center vents and warm air from the foot outlets.  
When the temperature control dial is turned to  
the maximum hot or cool position, the air  
between the ventilators and the foot outlets is  
the same temperature.  
.
For quick cooling when the outside tem-  
perature is high, push the air recirculation  
button to switch to the air recirculation  
mode. (The indicator light turns on.) Be sure  
to push the air recirculation button to the  
OFF position for normal cooling.  
Air conditioner operation  
1. Push the air recirculation  
button to  
.
A visible mist may be seen coming from the  
ventilators in hot, humid conditions as the air  
is cooled rapidly. This does not indicate a  
malfunction.  
switch to the outside air circulation mode.  
(The indicator light turns off.)  
The air conditioner system should be operated  
for approximately 10 minutes at least once a  
month. This helps prevent damage to the air  
conditioner system due to the lack of lubrication.  
2. Turn the air flow control dial to the  
position.  
3. Turn the fan speed control  
desired position.  
dial to the  
4-8 Heater, air conditioner, audio and phone systems  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
When the  
position is selected, the air  
Dehumidified heating:  
conditioner will automatically turn on. This will  
dehumidify the air and help to defog the  
windows. The A/C indicator light will illuminate  
when the air conditioner automatically turns on.  
The air conditioner and A/C indicator light will  
remain on in all flow control modes until the A/C  
button is pressed or the fan control dial is turned  
to off.  
This mode is used to heat and dehumidify the  
air.  
1. Push the air recirculation  
button to  
switch to the outside air circulation mode.  
(The indicator light turns off.)  
2. Turn the air flow control dial to the  
position.  
3. Turn the fan speed control  
desired position.  
dial to the  
4. Push the A/C button on. (The A/C indicator  
light will illuminate.)  
5. Turn the temperature control dial to the  
desired position between the middle and the  
hot (right) position.  
Dehumidified defogging:  
This mode is used to defog the windows and  
dehumidify the air.  
1. Turn the air flow control dial to the  
position.  
2. Turn the fan speed control  
desired position.  
dial to the  
3. Turn the temperature control dial to the  
desired position.  
Heater, air conditioner, audio and phone systems 4-9  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
light will illuminate.)  
3. Push the temperature control  
,
button to set the desired temperature. The  
temperature range is between 608F (188C)  
and 908F (328C).  
4. To set the automatic control mode, perform  
one of the following operations.  
.
.
When the outside air circulation mode is  
on, push and hold the outside air  
circulation  
button for more than  
1.5 seconds.  
When the air recirculation mode is on,  
push and hold the air recirculation  
button for more than 1.5 seconds.  
SAA2346  
1
2
3
Front defroster  
Display*  
button  
AUTOMATIC AIR CONDITIONER (if so  
equipped)  
When setting the automatic control mode,  
both indicator lights will blink twice indicat-  
ing that the system is in the automatic  
control mode.  
Rear window defroster  
button (See “REAR  
WINDOW AND OUTSIDE MIRROR DEFROS-  
TER SWITCH” in the “2. Instruments and con-  
trols” section.)  
Automatic operation (AUTO)  
The AUTO mode may be used year-round as the  
system automatically controls constant tempera-  
ture, air flow distribution and fan speed.  
A visible mist may be seen coming from the  
ventilators in hot, humid conditions as the air is  
cooled rapidly. This does not indicate a mal-  
function.  
4
5
6
7
8
9
AUTO button  
Temperature control  
Fan speed control  
OFF button  
,
button  
button  
To turn off the heater and air conditioner, push  
the OFF button.  
,
Heating (A/C off):  
MODE button  
Cooling and dehumidified heating:  
Air recirculation  
button  
1. Push the AUTO button. (The AUTO indicator  
will be displayed.)  
1. Push the AUTO button. (The AUTO indicator  
will be displayed.)  
10 Outside air circulation  
11 A/C (Air Conditioner) button  
*: Temperature is displayed 8F (US) or 8C (Canada).  
button  
2. If the A/C indicator light illuminates, push the  
A/C button. (The A/C indicator light will turn  
2. If the A/C indicator light does not illuminate,  
push the A/C button. (The A/C indicator  
4-10 Heater, air conditioner, audio and phone systems  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
off.)  
will be selected to improve the defog-  
ging performance.  
The temperature range is between 608F (188C)  
and 908F (328C).  
3. Push the temperature control  
,
button to set the desired temperature. The  
temperature range is between 608F (188C)  
and 908F (328C).  
Air recirculation:  
Manual operation  
The manual mode can be used to control the  
heater and air conditioner to your desired  
settings.  
Push the air recirculation  
button to change  
the air circulation mode. When the indicator light  
illuminates, the flowing air is recirculated inside  
the vehicle.  
.
Do not set the temperature lower than  
the outside air temperature. Doing so  
may cause the temperature to not be  
controlled properly.  
To turn off the heater and air conditioner, push  
the OFF button.  
Outside air circulation:  
Fan speed control:  
Push the outside air circulation  
button to  
.
If the windows fog up, use dehumidified  
heating instead of the A/C off heating.  
change the air circulation mode. When the  
indicator light illuminates, the flowing air is  
drawn from outside the vehicle.  
Turn the fan speed control  
adjust the fan speed.  
,
dial to  
Dehumidified defrosting/defogging:  
Air flow control:  
1. Push the front defroster  
indicator light will illuminate.)  
button. (The  
Automatic air intake control:  
Push the MODE button to change the air flow  
mode.  
To set the automatic control mode, perform one  
of the following operations.  
2. Turn the temperature control  
,
button to set the desired temperature.  
—
Air flows from the center and side  
ventilators.  
.
When the outside air circulation mode is on,  
push and hold the outside air circulation  
button for more than 1.5 seconds.  
.
To remove moisture or fog on the front  
window quickly, set the temperature to  
the high temperature and the fan speed  
to their maximum level.  
—
Air flows from the center and side  
ventilators and foot outlets.  
.
When the air recirculation mode is on, push  
—
—
Air flows mainly from the foot outlets.  
and hold the air recirculation  
more than 1.5 seconds.  
button for  
.
.
After the windshield is cleared, push the  
Air flows from the defroster outlets and  
foot outlets.  
front defroster  
button again. (The  
When setting the automatic control mode, both  
indicator lights will blink twice indicating that the  
system is in the automatic control mode.  
indicator light will turn off.)  
Temperature control:  
When the front defroster  
button is  
pushed, the air conditioner will auto-  
matically turn on to defog the wind-  
shield. The outside air circulation mode  
Push the temperature control  
to set the desired temperature.  
,
button  
Heater, air conditioner, audio and phone systems 4-11  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
OPERATING TIPS  
SERVICING AIR CONDITIONER  
.
When the engine coolant temperature and  
outside air temperature are low, the air flow  
from the foot outlets may not operate for a  
maximum of 150 seconds. This is not a  
malfunction. After the coolant temperature  
warms up, air will flow normally from the foot  
outlets.  
The air conditioner system in your NISSAN is  
charged with a refrigerant designed with the  
environment in mind. This refrigerant will not  
harm the earth’s ozone layer. Special char-  
ging equipment and lubricant are required when  
servicing your NISSAN air conditioner. Using  
improper refrigerants or lubricants will cause  
severe damage to your air conditioner system.  
(See “CAPACITIES AND RECOMMENDED  
FUEL/LUBRICANTS” in the “9. Technical and  
consumer information” section for air conditioner  
system refrigerant and lubricant recommenda-  
tions.)  
.
The automatic air conditioner is equipped  
A
with sensors as illustrated. The sensors  
*
B
and  
on the instrument panel help  
*
maintain a constant temperature. Do not  
put anything on or around these sensors.  
SAA2368  
IN-CABIN MICROFILTER  
A NISSAN dealer will be able to service your  
environmentally friendly air conditioner system.  
The air conditioning system is equipped with an  
in-cabin microfilter which collects dirt, pollen,  
dust, etc. To make sure the air conditioner heats,  
defogs, and ventilates efficiently, replace the  
filter according to the specified maintenance log  
shown in the NISSAN Service and Maintenance  
Guide. To replace the filter, contact a NISSAN  
dealer.  
WARNING  
The system contains refrigerant under  
high pressure. To avoid personal injury,  
any air conditioner service should be  
done only by an experienced technician  
with the proper equipment.  
The filter should be replaced if the air flow  
decreases significantly or if windows fog  
up easily when operating the heater or air  
conditioning system.  
SAA2369  
4-12 Heater, air conditioner, audio and phone systems  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
AUDIO SYSTEM  
function in your NISSAN radio system.  
AUDIO OPERATION PRECAUTIONS  
Radio  
Place the ignition switch in the ACC or ON  
position and push the PWR (power/VOL (vo-  
lume) control to turn on the radio. If you listen to  
the radio with the engine not running, the ignition  
switch should be placed in the ACC position.  
Reception conditions will constantly change  
because of vehicle movement. Buildings, terrain,  
signal distance and interference from other  
vehicles can work against ideal reception.  
Described below are some of the factors that  
can affect your radio reception.  
Some cellular phones or other devices may  
cause interference or a buzzing noise to come  
from the audio system speakers. Storing the  
device in a different location may reduce or  
eliminate the noise.  
Radio reception is affected by station signal  
strength, distance from radio transmitter, build-  
ings, bridges, mountains and other external  
influences. Intermittent changes in reception  
quality normally are caused by these external  
influences.  
SAA0306  
Using a cellular phone in or near the  
vehicle may influence radio reception  
quality.  
FM radio reception:  
Range: FM range is normally limited to 25 to 30  
miles (40 to 48 km), with monaural (single  
channel) FM having slightly more range than  
stereo FM. External influences may sometimes  
interfere with FM station reception even if the  
FM station is within 25 miles (40 km). The  
strength of the FM signal is directly related to the  
distance between the transmitter and receiver.  
FM signals follow a line-of-sight path, exhibiting  
many of the same characteristics as light. For  
example they will reflect off objects.  
Radio reception:  
Your NISSAN radio system is equipped with  
state-of-the-art electronic circuits to enhance  
radio reception. These circuits are designed to  
extend reception range, and to enhance the  
quality of that reception.  
However there are some general characteristics  
of both FM and AM radio signals that can affect  
radio reception quality in a moving vehicle, even  
when the finest equipment is used. These  
characteristics are completely normal in a given  
reception area, and do not indicate any mal-  
Fade and drift: As your vehicle moves away from  
a station transmitter, the signals will tend to fade  
and/or drift.  
Heater, air conditioner, audio and phone systems 4-13  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Static and flutter: During signal interference from  
buildings, large hills or due to antenna position,  
usually in conjunction with increased distance  
from the station transmitter, static or flutter can  
be heard. This can be reduced by lowering the  
treble setting to reduce the treble response.  
Satellite radio reception (if so equipped):  
When the satellite radio is first installed or the  
battery has been replaced, the satellite radio  
may not work properly. This is not a malfunction.  
Wait more than 10 minutes with the satellite  
radio ON and the vehicle away from any metal or  
large buildings for the satellite radio to receive all  
of the necessary data.  
Multipath reception: Because of the reflective  
characteristics of FM signals, direct and re-  
flected signals reach the receiver at the same  
time. The signals may cancel each other,  
resulting in momentary flutter or loss of sound.  
The satellite radio mode requires an active XM®  
Satellite Radio subscription. The satellite radio is  
not available in Alaska, Hawaii and Guam.  
AM radio reception:  
Satellite radio performance may be affected if  
cargo carried on the roof blocks the satellite  
radio signal.  
AM signals, because of their low frequency, can  
bend around objects and skip along the ground.  
In addition, the signals can be bounced off the  
ionosphere and bent back to earth. Because of  
these characteristics. AM signals are also  
subject to interference as they travel from  
transmitter to receiver.  
If possible, do not put cargo near the satellite  
antenna.  
A buildup of ice on the satellite radio antenna  
can affect satellite radio performance. Remove  
the ice to restore satellite radio reception.  
Fading: Occurs while the vehicle is passing  
through freeway underpasses or in areas with  
many tall buildings. It can also occur for several  
seconds during ionospheric turbulence even in  
areas where no obstacles exist.  
SAA0480  
Compact Disc (CD) player  
.
Do not force a compact disc into the CD  
insert slot. This could damage the CD  
and/or CD player.  
Static: Caused by thunderstorms, electrical  
power lines, electric signs and even traffic lights.  
.
During cold weather or rainy days, the  
player may malfunction due to the  
4-14 Heater, air conditioner, audio and phone systems  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
humidity. If this occurs, remove the CD  
and dehumidify or ventilate the player  
completely.  
tion.  
Unplayable Track:  
— 3.1 in (8 cm) discs  
— CDs that are not round  
— CDs with a paper label  
The file is unplayable in this audio  
system (only MP3 or WMA CD).  
.
.
The player may skip while driving on  
rough roads.  
Interface System for iPod® (vehicles  
without USB port) (if so equipped)  
The CD player sometimes cannot func-  
tion when the passenger compartment  
temperature is extremely high. De-  
crease the temperature before use.  
— CDs that are warped, scratched, or  
.
Some characters used in other languages  
(Chinese, Japanese, etc.) are not displayed  
properly on the vehicle audio display. We  
recommend using English language char-  
acters with an iPod®.  
have abnormal edges  
.
.
This audio system can only play pre-  
recorded CDs. It has no capabilities to  
record or burn CDs.  
.
Only use high quality 4.7 in (12 cm)  
round discs that have the “COMPACT  
disc DIGITAL AUDIO” logo on the disc  
or packaging.  
.
.
.
Large video podcast files cause slow  
responses in the iPod®. The vehicle audio  
display may momentarily black out, but it will  
soon recover.  
If the CD cannot be played, one of the  
following messages will be displayed.  
Check Disc:  
.
.
Do not expose the CD to direct sun-  
light.  
If the iPod® automatically selects large video  
podcast files while in the shuffle mode, the  
vehicle audio display may momentarily black  
out, but it will soon recover.  
— Confirm that the CD is inserted  
correctly (the label side is facing up,  
etc.).  
CDs that are of poor quality, dirty,  
scratched, covered with fingerprints,  
or that have pin holes may not work  
properly.  
— Confirm that the CD is not bent or  
Improperly plugging in the iPod® may cause  
a checkmark to be displayed on and off  
(flickering). Always make sure that the iPod®  
is connected properly.  
warped and it is free of scratches.  
.
.
The following CDs may not work prop-  
erly:  
Push Eject:  
This is an error due to the temperature  
inside the player is too high. Remove  
the CD by pushing the EJECT button,  
and after a short time reinsert the CD.  
The CD can be played when the tem-  
perature of the player returns to nor-  
mal.  
— Copy control compact discs (CCCD)  
— Recordable compact discs (CD-R)  
— Rewritable compact discs (CD-RW)  
.
.
The iPod nano® (2nd Generation) will  
continue to fast forward or rewind if it is  
disconnected during a seek operation.  
An incorrect song title may appear when the  
Play Mode is changed while using the iPod  
nano® (2nd Generation).  
Do not use the following CDs as they  
may cause the CD player to malfunc-  
Heater, air conditioner, audio and phone systems 4-15  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
.
.
Audiobooks may not play in the same order  
as they appear on the iPod®.  
water, allow the cable and/or connectors to  
dry completely before connecting the cable  
to the iPod® (wait 24 hours for it to dry).  
Compact Disc (CD) with MP3 or WMA  
(if so equipped)  
The iPod nano® (1st Generation) may remain  
in fast forward or rewind mode if it is  
connected during a seek operation. In this  
case, please manually reset the iPod®.  
Explanation of terms:  
.
If the connector is exposed to fluids other  
than water, evaporative residue may cause a  
short between the connector pins. In this  
case, replace the cable, otherwise damage  
to the iPod® and a loss of function may  
occur.  
.
MP3 — MP3 is short for Moving Pictures  
Experts Group Audio Layer 3. MP3 is the  
most well-known compressed digital audio  
file format. This format allows for near “CD  
quality” sound, but at a fraction of the size of  
normal audio files. MP3 conversion of an  
audio track from CD-ROM can reduce the  
file size by approximately 10:1 ratio (Sam-  
pling: 44.1 kHz, Bit rate: 128 kbps) with  
virtually no perceptible loss in quality. MP3  
compression removes the redundant and  
irrelevant parts of a sound signal that the  
human ear doesn’t hear.  
.
.
If you are using an iPod® (3rd Generation  
with Dock connector), do not use very long  
names for the song title, album name or  
artist name to avoid the iPod® from resetting  
itself.  
.
.
If the cable is damaged (insulation cut,  
connectors cracked, contamination such as  
liquids, dust, dirt, etc. in the connectors), do  
not use the cable and contact a NISSAN  
dealer to replace the cable with a new one.  
Be careful not to do the following, or the  
cable could be damaged and a loss of  
function may occur.  
When not in use for extended periods of  
time, store the cable in a clean, dust free  
environment at room temperature and with-  
out direct sun exposure.  
— Bend the cable excessively (1.6 in (40  
mm) radius minimum).  
.
.
WMA — Windows Media Audio (WMA) is a  
compressed audio format created by Micro-  
soft as an alternative to MP3. The WMA  
codec offers greater file compression than  
the MP3 codec, enabling storage of more  
digital audio tracks in the same amount of  
space when compared to MP3s at the same  
level of quality.  
— Twist the cable excessively (more than  
180 degrees).  
.
.
Do not use the cable for any other purposes  
other than its intended use in the vehicle.  
— Pull or drop the cable.  
iPod® charging is only possible for devices  
that support charging via a FireWire® con-  
nection.  
— Store objects with sharp edges in the  
storage where the cable is stored.  
— Spill liquids on the cable and connectors.  
* 12V-charge iPod®s are not chargeable with  
this system.  
Bit rate — Bit rate denotes the number of  
bits per second used by a digital music files.  
The size and quality of a compressed digital  
audio file is determined by the bit rate used  
when encoding the file.  
.
.
Do not connect the cable to the iPod® if the  
cable and/or connectors are wet. It may  
damage the iPod®.  
* iPod®, iPhone® and FireWire® are trademarks  
of Apple Inc., registered in the U.S. and other  
countries.  
If the cable and connectors are exposed to  
4-16 Heater, air conditioner, audio and phone systems  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
.
.
Sampling frequency — Sampling frequency  
is the rate at which the samples of a signal  
are converted from analog to digital (A/D  
conversion) per second.  
.
.
Do not force the memory stick or USB cable  
into the USB connector. This could damage  
the connector.  
.
Do not connect a USB device if a connector  
or cable is wet. Allow the cable and/or  
connectors to dry completely before con-  
necting the USB device. If the connector is  
exposed to fluids other than water, evapora-  
tive residue may cause a short between the  
connector pins.  
During cold weather or rainy days, the player  
may malfunction due to humidity. If this  
occurs, remove the USB device and dehu-  
midify or ventilate the USB player comple-  
tely.  
Multisession — Multisession is one of the  
methods for writing data to media. Writing  
data once to the media is called a single  
session, and writing more than once is  
called a multisession.  
.
.
Large video podcast files cause slow  
responses in an iPod®. The vehicle center  
display may momentarily black out, but it will  
soon recover.  
.
.
The USB player sometimes cannot function  
when the passenger compartment tempera-  
ture is extremely high. Decrease the tem-  
perature before use.  
.
ID3/WMA Tag — The ID3/WMA tag is the  
part of the encoded MP3 or WMA file that  
contains information about the digital music  
file such as song title, artist, album title,  
encoding bit rate, track time duration, etc.  
ID3 tag information is displayed on the  
Album/Artist/Track title line on the display.  
If an iPod® automatically selects large video  
podcast files while in the shuffle mode, the  
vehicle center display may momentarily  
black out, but it will soon recover.  
Do not leave USB memory in a place prone  
to static electricity or where the air condi-  
tioner blows directly. The data in the USB  
memory may be damaged.  
.
.
Audiobooks may not play in the same order  
as they appear on an iPod®.  
*
Windows® and Windows Media® are regis-  
tered trademarks or trademarks of Microsoft  
Corporation in the United States of America  
and other countries of Microsoft Corporation  
of the USA.  
.
.
The vehicle is not equipped with a USB  
memory stick.  
An iPod nano® (1st Generation) may remain  
in fast forward or rewind mode if it is  
connected during a seek operation. In this  
case, please manually reset the iPod®.  
A USB device cannot be formatted with this  
system. To format a USB device, use a  
personal computer.  
USB (Universal Serial Bus) (if so  
equipped)  
This system supports various USB memory  
sticks, USB hard drives and iPod® players.  
There are some USB devices which may not  
be supported with this system.  
.
.
An iPod nano® (2nd Generation) will con-  
tinue to fast forward or rewind if it is  
disconnected during a seek operation.  
.
.
Partitioned USB devices may not be played  
correctly.  
Some characters used in other languages  
(Chinese, Japanese, etc.) are not displayed  
properly on the vehicle center screen. Using  
English language characters with a USB  
device is recommended.  
An incorrect song title may appear when the  
Play Mode is changed while using the iPod  
nano® (2nd Generation)  
.
Make sure that the USB device is connected  
correctly into the USB connector.  
iPod® is a trademark of Apple Inc., registered in  
Heater, air conditioner, audio and phone systems 4-17  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
the U.S. and other countries.  
.
Bit rate — Bit rate denotes the number of  
bits per second used by a digital music file.  
The size and quality of a compressed digital  
audio file is determined by the bit rate used  
when encoding the file.  
Compressed Audio Files (MP3/WMA/  
AAC) (if so equipped)  
Explanation of terms:  
.
.
Sampling frequency — Sampling frequency  
is the rate at which the samples of a signal  
are converted from analog to digital (A/D  
conversion) per second.  
.
MP3 — MP3 is short for Moving Pictures  
Experts Group Audio Layer 3. MP3 is the  
most well known compressed digital audio  
file format. This format allows for near “CD  
quality” sound, but at a fraction of the size of  
normal audio files. MP3 conversion of an  
audio track can reduce the file size by  
approximately a 10:1 ratio (Sampling: 44.1  
kHz, Bit rate: 128 kbps) with virtually no  
perceptible loss in quality. The compression  
reduces certain parts of sound that seem  
inaudible to most people.  
Multisession — Multisession is one of the  
methods for writing data to media. Writing  
data once to the media is called a single  
session, and writing more than once is  
called a multisession.  
.
ID3/WMA Tag — The ID3/WMA tag is the  
part of the encoded MP3 or WMA file that  
contains information about the digital music  
file such as song title, artist, album title,  
encoding bit rate, track time duration, etc.  
ID3 tag information is displayed on the  
Album/Artist/Track title line on the display.  
.
.
WMA — Windows Media Audio (WMA) is a  
compressed audio format created by Micro-  
soft as an alternative to MP3. The WMA  
codec offers greater file compression than  
the MP3 codec, enabling storage of more  
digital audio tracks in the same amount of  
space when compared to MP3s at the same  
level of quality.  
* Windows® and Windows Media® are regis-  
tered trademarks or trademarks of Microsoft  
Corporation in the United States of America  
and/or other countries.  
SAA1025  
Playback order chart  
Playback order:  
Music playback order of a CD with MP3 or  
WMA files is as illustrated.  
AAC/M4A — Advanced Audio Coding  
(AAC) is a lossy audio compression format.  
Audio files that have been encoded with  
AAC are generally smaller in size and deliver  
a higher quality of sound than MP3.  
.
The names of folders not containing MP3 or  
WMA files are not shown in the display.  
4-18 Heater, air conditioner, audio and phone systems  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
.
.
If there is a file in the top level of the disc,  
“Root Folder” is displayed.  
The playback order is the order in which the  
files were written by the writing software.  
Therefore, the files might not play in the  
desired order.  
Heater, air conditioner, audio and phone systems 4-19  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Specification chart (for FM-AM Radio with  
Compact Disc (CD) player):  
Supported media  
Supported file systems  
Version  
CD, CD-R, CD-RW  
ISO9660 LEVEL1, ISO9660 LEVEL2, Romeo, Joliet  
* ISO9660 Level 3 (packet writing) is not supported.  
* Files saved using the Live File System component (on a Windows Vista-based computer) are  
not supported.  
MPEG1, MPEG2, MPEG2.5  
8 kHz - 48 kHz  
MP3  
Sampling frequency  
Bit rate  
8 kbps - 320 kbps, VBR*4  
Supported  
versions*1  
Version  
WMA7, WMA8, WMA9  
WMA*2  
Sampling frequency  
Bit rate  
32 kHz - 48 kHz  
32 kbps - 192 kbps, VBR*4  
ID3 tag VER1.0, VER1.1, VER2.2, VER2.3 (MP3 only)  
WMA tag (WMA only)  
Tag information (Song title and Artist name)  
Folder levels  
Folder levels: 8, Folders and files: 999 (Max. 255 files for one folder)  
64 characters  
Text character number limitation  
01: ASCII, 02: ISO-8859-1, 03: UNICODE (UTF-16 BOM Big Endian), 04: UNICODE (UTF-16  
Non-BOM Big Endian), 05: UNICODE (UTF-8), 06: UNICODE (Non-UTF-16 BOM Little  
Endian)  
Displayable character codes*3  
*1 Files created with a combination of 48 kHz sampling frequency and 64 kbps bit rate cannot be played.  
*2 Protected WMA files (DRM) cannot be played.  
*3 Available codes depend on what kind of media, versions and information are going to be displayed.  
*4 When VBR files are played, the playback time may not be displayed correctly.  
4-20 Heater, air conditioner, audio and phone systems  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Troubleshooting guide (for FM-AM Radio  
with Compact Disc (CD) player):  
Symptom  
Cause and Countermeasure  
Check if the disc was inserted correctly.  
Check if the disc is scratched or dirty.  
Check if there is condensation inside the player. If there is, wait until the condensation is gone (about 1 hour) before  
using the player.  
If there is a temperature increase error, the CD player will play correctly after it returns to the normal temperature.  
Cannot play  
Files with extensions other than “.MP3”, “.WMA”, “.mp3” or “.wma” cannot be played. In addition, the character codes  
and number of characters for folder names and file names should be in compliance with the specifications.  
Check if the disc or the file is generated in an irregular format. This may occur depending on the variation or the setting of  
MP3/WMA writing applications or other text editing applications.  
Check if the finalization process, such as session close and disc close, is done for the disc.  
Check if the disc is protected by copyright.  
Check if the disc is scratched or dirty.  
Poor sound quality  
Bit rate may be too low.  
It takes a relatively long time before the music  
starts playing.  
If there are many folder or file levels on the MP3/WMA disc, or if it is a multisession disc, some time may be required  
before the music starts playing.  
The writing software and hardware combination might not match, or the writing speed, writing depth, writing width, etc.,  
might not match the specifications. Try using the slowest writing speed.  
Music cuts off or skips  
Skipping with high bit rate files  
Skipping may occur with large quantities of data, such as for high bit rate data.  
When a non-MP3/WMA file has been given an extension of “.MP3”, “.WMA”, “.mp3” or “.wma”, or when play is  
Move immediately to the next song when playing. prohibited by copyright protection, there will be approximately 5 seconds of no sound and then the player will skip to the  
next song.  
The playback order is the order in which the files were written by the writing software. Therefore, the files might not play  
The songs do not play back in the desired order.  
in the desired order.  
Heater, air conditioner, audio and phone systems 4-21  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Specification chart (for FM-AM-SAT Radio  
with Compact Disc (CD) player):  
Supported media  
Supported file systems  
Version  
CD, CD-R, CD-RW, USB2.0  
CD, CD-R, CD-RW: ISO9660 LEVEL1, ISO9660 LEVEL2, Romeo, Joliet  
* ISO9660 Level 3 (packet writing) is not supported.  
* Files saved using the Live File System component (on a Windows Vista-based computer) are not supported.  
USB memory: FAT16, FAT32  
MPEG1 Audio Layer 3  
MP3  
Sampling frequency 8 kHz - 48 kHz  
Bit rate  
Version  
8 kbps - 320 kbps, VBR*4  
WMA7, WMA8, WMA9  
Supported  
versions*1  
WMA*2 Sampling frequency 32 kHz - 48 kHz  
Bit rate  
Version  
32 kbps - 192 kbps, VBR*4  
MPEG-AAC  
AAC  
Sampling frequency 8 kHz - 48 kHz  
Bit rate 16 kbps - 320 kbps, VBR*4  
ID3 tag VER1.0, VER1.1, VER2.2, VER2.3, VER2.4 (MP3 only)  
WMA tag (WMA only)  
Tag information (Song title and Artist name)  
AAC tag (AAC only)  
CD, CD-R, CD-RW Folder levels: 8, Folders and files: 999 (Max. 255 files for one folder)  
Folder levels: 8, Folders 255, Files: 2500 (Max. 255 files for one folder)  
Folder levels  
USB  
Memory size: 4GB  
4-22 Heater, air conditioner, audio and phone systems  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Text character number limitation  
Displayable character codes*3  
26 characters  
01: ASCII, 02: ISO-8859-1, 03: UNICODE (UTF-16 BOM Big Endian), 04: UNICODE (UTF-16 Non-BOM Big  
Endian), 05: UNICODE (UTF-8), 06: UNICODE (Non-UTF-16 BOM Little Endian), 07: SHIFT-JIS  
*1 Files created with a combination of 48 kHz sampling frequency and 64 kbps bit rate cannot be played.  
*2 Protected WMA files (DRM) cannot be played.  
*3 Available codes depend on what kind of media, versions and information are going to be displayed.  
*4 When VBR files are played, the playback time may not be displayed correctly.  
Heater, air conditioner, audio and phone systems 4-23  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Troubleshooting guide (for FM-AM-SAT  
Radio with Compact Disc (CD) player):  
Symptom  
Cause and Countermeasure  
Check if the disc or USB device was inserted correctly.  
Check if the disc is scratched or dirty.  
Check if there is condensation inside the player, and if there is, wait until the condensation is gone (about 1 hour) before using the  
player.  
If there is a temperature increase error, the player will play correctly after it returns to the normal temperature.  
If there is a mixture of music CD files (CD-DA data) and compressed audio files on a CD, only the music CD files (CD-DA data) will  
be played.  
Cannot play  
Files with extensions other than “.MP3 (.mp3)”, “.WMA (.wma)”, “.AAC (.aac)” or “.M4A (.m4a)” cannot be played. In addition, the  
character codes and number of characters for folder names and file names should be in compliance with the specifications.  
Check if the disc or the file is generated in an irregular format. This may occur depending on the variation or the setting of  
compressed audio writing applications or other text editing applications.  
Check if the finalization process, such as session close and disc close, is done for the disc.  
Check if the disc or USB device is protected by copyright.  
Check if the disc is scratched or dirty.  
Poor sound quality  
It takes a relatively long time before  
the music starts playing.  
If there are many folder or file levels on the disc or USB device, some time may be required before the music starts playing.  
The writing software and hardware combination might not match, or the writing speed, writing depth, writing width, etc., might not  
match the specifications. Try using the slowest writing speed.  
Music cuts off or skips  
Skipping with high bit rate files  
Skipping may occur with large quantities of data, such as for high bit rate data.  
Move immediately to the next song If an unsupported compressed audio file has been given a supported extension like .MP3, or when play is prohibited by copyright  
when playing.  
protection, the player will skip to the next song.  
The playback order is the order in which the files were written by the writing software, so the files might not play in the desired order.  
Random/Shuffle may be active on the audio system or on a USB device.  
The songs do not play back in the  
desired order.  
4-24 Heater, air conditioner, audio and phone systems  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
13. RPT (repeat) button  
14. TUNE/FF·REW button  
FM-AM RADIO WITH COMPACT DISC  
(CD) PLAYER (Type A)  
For all operation precautions, see “AUDIO  
OPERATION PRECAUTIONS” earlier in this  
section.  
Audio main operation  
Head unit:  
The auto loudness circuit enhances the low and  
high frequency ranges automatically in both  
radio reception and CD playback.  
ON·OFF/Volume control:  
Place the ignition switch in the ACC or ON  
position, and then push the PWR button while  
the system is off to call up the mode (radio, CD  
or AUX) which was playing immediately before  
the system was turned off. While the system is  
on, pushing the PWR button turns the system  
off.  
SAA2783  
Turn the VOL control knob to adjust the volume.  
1. FM·AM radio band select button  
2. CD EJECT button  
7. MENU button  
8. SEEK/APS (automatic program search) FF (fast  
forward)·APS REW (rewind) button  
MENU button:  
3. CD button  
9. RDM (random) button  
4. Station and preset select buttons  
5. Audio display  
Push the MENU button to change the selecting  
mode as follows.  
10. PWR (power) button/VOL (volume) control knob  
11. SCAN tuning button  
6. AUX (auxiliary) button  
12. AUX IN jack  
Heater, air conditioner, audio and phone systems 4-25  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
The last station played will also come on when  
the PWR button is pushed to ON.  
station.  
to  
Station memory operations:  
If another audio source is playing when the radio  
band select button is pushed, the audio source  
will automatically be turned off and the last radio  
station played will come on.  
Push the TUNE  
or  
or SEEK  
or  
Twelve stations can be set for the FM band (6  
each for FM1 and FM2) and 6 stations can be  
set for the AM band.  
button to adjust Bass, Treble, Fade and  
Balance to the desired level. Fade adjusts the  
sound level between the front and rear speakers  
and Balance adjusts the sound between the  
right and left speakers.  
1. Choose the radio band AM, FM1 or FM2  
using the radio band select button.  
When the stereo broadcast signal is weak, the  
radio will automatically change from stereo to  
monaural reception.  
2. Tune to the desired station using the SEEK,  
SCAN or TUNE button.  
Once you have adjusted the sound quality to the  
desired level, push the MENU button repeatedly  
until the radio or CD display reappears (normal  
mode). Otherwise, the radio or CD display will  
automatically reappear after approximately 10  
seconds.  
TUNE (Tuning):  
3. Select the desired station and push and  
hold the desired station preset buttons 1 to  
6 until a beep sound is heard. (The radio  
mutes when the select button is pushed.)  
Push the TUNE button  
tuning.  
or  
for manual  
SEEK tuning:  
For information about adjusting the clock dis-  
play, see “CLOCK” in the “2. Instruments and  
controls” section.  
4. The station indicator will then come on and  
the sound will resume. Memorizing is now  
complete.  
Push the SEEK button  
low to high or high to low frequencies and to  
stop at the next broadcasting station.  
or  
to tune from  
FM-AM radio operation  
5. Other buttons can be set in the same  
manner.  
Radio (FM/AM) band select:  
SCAN tuning:  
If the battery cable is disconnected, or if the fuse  
blows, the radio memory will be erased. In that  
case, reset the desired stations.  
Push the SCAN tuning button to tune from low  
to high frequencies and stops at each broad-  
casting station for 5 seconds. Pushing the  
button again during this 5 seconds period will  
stop SCAN tuning and the radio will remain  
tuned to that station.  
Pushing the radio band select button will  
change the band as follows:  
Compact Disc (CD) player operation  
AM ? FM1 ? FM2 ? AM  
Place the ignition switch in the ACC or ON  
position, and insert the CD into the slot with the  
label side facing up. The CD will be guided  
automatically into the slot and start playing.  
When the radio band select button is pushed  
while the ignition switch is in the ACC or ON  
position, the radio will come on at the station last  
played.  
If the SCAN tuning button is not pushed within 5  
seconds, SCAN tuning moves to the next  
4-26 Heater, air conditioner, audio and phone systems  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
After loading the disc, the number of tracks on  
the disc will appear on the display.  
being played, the CD will play while fast  
forwarding or rewinding.  
RPT button:  
1 Disc Repeat (Normal play) ↔ 1 Track Repeat  
RDM button:  
If the radio is already operating, it will auto-  
matically turn off and the CD will play.  
When the button is released, the CD will return  
to normal play speed.  
1 Disc Repeat (Normal play) ↔ 1 Disc Random  
The display shows the following symbols:  
If the system has been turned off while the CD  
was playing, pushing the PWR button will start  
the CD.  
APS (Automatic Program Search)  
FF, APS REW:  
(No mark): 1 Disc Repeat  
1: 1 Track Repeat  
MP3 or WMA CDs are not supported with this  
CD player. If an MP3 or WMA CD is inserted  
into the slot, the counter on the audio display  
automatically advances without sound. However  
this is a specification of the CD mechanism and  
not a malfunction.  
When the  
(APS FF) of the SEEK button is  
pushed while the CD is being played, the next  
track or the current track on the CD will start to  
play from its beginning. Push several times to  
skip through tracks. The CD will advance the  
number of times the button is pushed. (When  
the last track on the CD is skipped through, the  
first track will be played.)  
RDM: 1 Disc Random  
CD EJECT:  
When the CD EJECT button is pushed with the  
CD loaded, the CD will be ejected.  
Do not use 3.1 in (8 cm) discs.  
When this button is pushed while the CD is  
being played, the CD will come out and the  
system will turn off.  
When the  
(APS REW) button is pushed,  
CD PLAY:  
the track being played returns to its beginning.  
Push several times to skip back through tracks.  
The CD will go back the number of times the  
button is pushed.  
When the CD button is pushed with the system  
off and the CD loaded, the system will turn on  
and the CD will start to play.  
If the CD comes out and is not removed, it  
will be pulled back into the slot to protect  
it.  
When the CD button is pushed with the CD  
loaded and the radio playing, the radio will  
automatically be turned off and the CD will start  
to play.  
REPEAT (RPT)/RANDOM  
(RDM) play:  
SCAN tuning:  
When the RPT or RDM button is pushed while a  
CD is being played, the play pattern can be  
changed as follows:  
When the SCAN tuning button is pushed while  
the CD is being played, the beginning of all the  
tracks of the CDs will be played for 10 seconds  
in sequence.  
FF (Fast Forward), REW (Rewind):  
When the  
(fast forward) or  
(rewind) of  
the TUNE button is pushed while the CD is  
Heater, air conditioner, audio and phone systems 4-27  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Pushing the button again during this 10 second  
period will stop SCAN tuning.  
If the SCAN tuning button is not pushed within  
10 seconds, SCAN tuning continues to move to  
the next CD track.  
AUX (Auxiliary) input  
AUX IN jack:  
The AUX IN jack is located on the audio unit.  
The AUX IN audio input jack accepts any  
standard analog audio input such as from a  
portable cassette tape/CD player, MP3 player or  
laptop computer.  
AUX (Auxiliary) button:  
Push the AUX button to play a compatible  
device when it is plugged into the AUX IN jack.  
When the AUX button is pushed with no device  
plugged into the jack, the audio system does not  
change to the AUX mode (the AUX button is  
invalid).  
4-28 Heater, air conditioner, audio and phone systems  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
13. ENTER button  
14 BACK button  
15. PWR (power) button/VOL (volume) control knob  
16 AUX IN jack  
17. AUDIO button  
18. TUNE/FF·REW button  
19. SCAN/RPT (repeat) button  
FM-AM RADIO WITH COMPACT DISC  
(CD) PLAYER (Type B)  
For all operation precautions, see “AUDIO  
OPERATION PRECAUTIONS” earlier in this  
section.  
Audio main operation  
Head unit:  
The auto loudness circuit enhances the low and  
high frequency ranges automatically in both  
radio reception and CD playback.  
ON·OFF/Volume control:  
Place the ignition switch in the ACC or ON  
position, and then push the PWR button while  
the system is off to call up the normal mode  
(radio, CD, AUX and iPod®) which was playing  
immediately before the system was turned off.  
While the system is on, pushing the PWR button  
turns the system off.  
SAA2782  
1. MUTE button  
7. AUX (auxiliary) button  
8. Audio display  
2. DISP (display)/TEXT button  
3. FM·AM radio band select button  
4. CD PLAY button  
9. CLOCK button  
10. CD EJECT button  
11. iPod® MENU button  
12. SEEK/TRACK button  
5. Station preset buttons  
6. iPod® button  
Turn the VOL control knob to adjust the volume.  
Heater, air conditioner, audio and phone systems 4-29  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
desired level, push the AUDIO button repeatedly  
until the normal mode display reappears. Other-  
wise, the normal mode display will automatically  
reappear after approximately 5 seconds.  
MUTE button:  
TUNE (Tuning):  
Push the TUNE button or  
tuning. To move quickly through the stations,  
push and hold the TUNE button.  
for manual  
Push the  
button to mute the audio sound.  
button again to release the mute  
Push the  
setting.  
CLOCK button:  
SEEK tuning:  
Push the CLOCK button to turn on or off the  
CLOCK display.  
AUDIO button:  
Push the SEEK button  
or  
to tune from  
Push the AUDIO button to change the selecting  
mode as follows.  
low to high or high to low frequencies and to  
stop at the next broadcasting station.  
See “CLOCK” in the “2. Instruments and  
controls” section for the detailed clock adjust-  
ment operation.  
SCAN tuning:  
Radio operation  
Push the SCAN button to tune from low to high  
frequencies and stops at each broadcasting  
station for 5 seconds. Pushing the button again  
during this 5 seconds period will stop SCAN  
tuning and the radio will remain tuned to that  
station.  
Push the TUNE (  
,
) or SEEK (  
,
Radio (FM/AM) band select:  
) button to adjust Bass and Treble to the  
desired level. Use the TUNE or SEEK button  
also to adjust Fade or Balance modes. Fade  
adjusts the sound level between the front and  
rear speakers and Balance adjusts the sound  
between the right and left speakers.  
Pushing the FM·AM radio band select button will  
change the band as follows:  
AM ? FM1 ? FM2 ? AM  
If the SCAN tuning button is not pushed within 5  
seconds, SCAN tuning moves to the next  
station.  
When the stereo broadcast signal is weak, the  
radio will automatically change from stereo to  
monaural reception.  
To turn the beep sound off or on, push the TUNE  
or SEEK button until the desired mode is  
displayed. This turns on or off the beep sound  
when audio buttons are pushed.  
to  
Station memory operations:  
When the radio band select button is pushed  
while the ignition switch is in the ACC or ON  
position, the radio will come on at the station last  
played.  
12 stations can be set for the FM band (6 each  
for FM1 and FM2), and 6 can be set for the AM  
band for easy access.  
To change the Speed Sensitive Volume (Spd  
Sen Vol) mode to OFF, LOW, MID or HIGH,  
push the TUNE or SEEK button until the desired  
mode is displayed.  
1. Choose the radio band using the radio band  
select button.  
Once you have adjusted the sound quality to the  
4-30 Heater, air conditioner, audio and phone systems  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
2. Tune to the desired station using the SEEK,  
SCAN or TUNE button.  
sical”, “Country” or “Rock”.  
If the radio is already operating, it will auto-  
matically turn off and the CD will play.  
.
Traffic reports about delays or construction.  
3. Push and hold the desired radio station  
If the system has been turned off while the CD  
was playing, pushing the PWR button will start  
the CD.  
If the station broadcasts RDS information, the  
RDS icon is displayed.  
preset button  
to  
until a beep sound is  
heard. (The radio mutes when the radio  
station preset button is pushed.)  
Do not use 3.1 in (8 cm) discs.  
RADIO DISPLAY change:  
4. The station indicator will then come on and  
the sound will resume. Memorizing is now  
complete.  
When the DISP button is pushed during the FM  
radio mode, the radio display will change in the  
following order.  
CD PLAY:  
When the CD button is pushed with the system  
off and the CD loaded, the system will turn on  
and the CD will start to play.  
5. Other buttons can be set in the same  
manner.  
FM radio:  
Frequency ↔ PS/PTY  
If the battery cable is disconnected, or if the fuse  
opens, the radio memory will be erased. In that  
case, reset the desired stations.  
When the CD button is pushed with the CD  
loaded and the radio playing, the radio will  
automatically be turned off and the CD will start  
to play.  
In the FM radio mode, pressing the DISP button  
will switch the frequency display to the PTY  
display (if available), and if the DISP button is  
not pushed again within 5 seconds, it will  
automatically switch to the PS display. If PTY  
is not available, pressing the DISP button will  
only switch between the frequency display and  
the PS display.  
Radio Data System (RDS):  
RDS stands for Radio Data System, and is a  
data information service transmitted by some  
radio stations on the FM band (not AM band)  
encoded within a regular radio broadcast.  
Currently, most RDS stations are in large cities,  
but many stations are now considering broad-  
casting RDS data.  
CD play information:  
When the DISP button is pushed for less than  
1.5 seconds while the CD is being played, the  
disc information display will change as follows:  
Compact Disc (CD) player operation  
CD:  
Place the ignition switch in the ACC or ON  
position, and insert the CD into the slot with the  
label side facing up. The CD will be guided  
automatically into the slot and start playing.  
RDS can display:  
.
.
.
Station call sign, such as “WHFR 98.3”.  
Station name, such as “The Groove”.  
Music or programming type such as “Clas-  
After loading the disc, the number of tracks on  
the disc will appear on the display.  
Heater, air conditioner, audio and phone systems 4-31  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
CD with MP3 or WMA:  
APS (Automatic Program  
Search) FF, APS REW:  
RANDOM (RDM)/REPEAT (RPT):  
When the RPT button is pushed for less than  
1.5 seconds while the CD is being played, the  
play pattern can be changed as follows:  
When the  
(APS FF) button is pushed while  
the CD is being played, the program next to the  
present one will start to play from its beginning.  
Push several times to skip through programs.  
The CD will advance the number of times the  
button is pushed. (When the last program on the  
CD is skipped through, the first program will be  
played.)  
CD:  
FF (Fast Forward), REW (Re-  
wind):  
CD:  
CD with MP3 or WMA:  
When the  
(fast forward) or  
(rewind)  
When the  
(APS REW) button is pushed,  
button is pushed while the CD is being played,  
the CD will play while fast forwarding or  
rewinding. When the button is released, the  
CD will return to normal play speed.  
the program being played returns to its begin-  
ning. Push several times to skip back through  
programs. The CD will go back the number of  
times the button is pushed.  
CD EJECT:  
CD with MP3 or WMA:  
SCAN tuning:  
When the CD EJECT button is pushed with the  
CD loaded, the CD will be ejected.  
When the  
or  
button is pushed for less  
When the SCAN tuning button is pushed for  
more than 1.5 seconds while the CD is being  
played, the beginning of all the tracks of CD will  
be played for 10 seconds in sequence.  
than 1.5 seconds while the CD is being played,  
the folders in the CD will change.  
When this button is pushed while the CD is  
being played, the CD will come out and the  
system will turn off.  
When the  
or  
button is pushed for  
more than 1.5 seconds while the CD is being  
played, the CD will play while forwarding or  
rewinding. When the button is released, the CD  
will return to the normal play speed.  
Pushing the button again during this 10 second  
period will stop SCAN tuning.  
If the CD comes out and is not removed, it  
will be pulled back into the slot to protect  
it.  
If the SCAN tuning button is not pushed within  
10 seconds, SCAN tuning moves to the next  
disc program.  
4-32 Heater, air conditioner, audio and phone systems  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
can only be operated by the vehicle audio  
controls.  
iPhone® 3G may not work with the system in  
some cases.  
To disconnect the cable from the vehicle outlet,  
fully depress the center connector button to  
unlatch the connector and pull the connector  
straight out of the outlet. To disconnect the  
cable from the iPod®, fully depress the side  
connector buttons and pull the iPod® connector  
straight out of the iPod®.  
Make sure that your iPod® firmware is updated.  
* 12V-charge iPod®s are not chargeable with  
this system.  
iPod® button:  
Place the ignition switch in the ACC or ON  
position. Then, push the iPod® button to switch  
to the iPod® mode.  
* iPod®, iPhone® and FireWire® are a trademark  
of Apple Inc., registered in the U.S. and other  
countries.  
If another audio source is playing and the iPod®  
is connected, pushing the iPod® button changes  
to the iPod® mode.  
Compatibility:  
SAA2352  
The following models are available:  
Interface system for iPod® operation  
Connecting iPod®:  
If the system has been turned off while the iPod®  
was playing, pushing the PWR button will start  
the iPod®.  
.
Third generation iPod® (Firmware version  
2.3 or later) (Audiobook and Podcast are not  
available)  
The iPod® outlet connector is on the lower  
center of the instrument panel. Connect the  
Top menu item selecting:  
.
.
Fourth generation iPod® (Firmware version  
3.1.1 or later)  
1
cable  
as illustrated, and then connect the  
*
other end of the cable to your iPod®  
. Your  
When the iPod® MENU button is pushed while  
the iPod® is connected, the interface for iPod®  
operation is shown on the audio display. The  
items on the menu list can be scrolled by  
2
*
Fifth generation iPod® (Firmware version  
1.1.2 or later)  
vehicle is equipped with the specialized cable  
for connecting the iPod® to your vehicle audio  
unit. The battery of your iPod® is charged while it  
is connected to the vehicle if the iPod® supports  
charging via a FireWire® connection.  
.
.
.
iPod mini® (Firmware version 1.41 or later)  
iPod photo® (Firmware version 1.2.1 or later)  
iPod nano® (Firmware version 1.2 or later)  
pushing the SEEK button  
TUNE button or  
or  
and the  
while the iPod® is  
operational. To select an item, push ENTER. The  
display can be changed as follows:  
When the connection is complete, a NISSAN  
logo will be displayed on the iPod® and an iPod®  
icon on the audio display illuminates. While  
connecting the iPod® to the vehicle, the iPod®  
The fourth generation iPod nano®, iPod touch®,  
the second generation iPod classic® and  
Heater, air conditioner, audio and phone systems 4-33  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Except Podcast and Audiobook:  
FF (Fast Forward), REW (Re-  
wind) button:  
For more information about each item, see the  
iPod® Owner’s Manual.  
When the  
or  
button is pushed for  
more than 1.5 seconds while the iPod® is  
playing, the iPod® will play while fast forwarding  
or rewinding. When the button is released, the  
iPod® will return to the normal play speed.  
Podcast:  
ALL REPEAT ↔ TRACK REPEAT  
Audiobook:  
BACK, ENTER button:  
.
When the ENTER button is pushed while  
the top menu is displayed, program details  
are shown on the audio display.  
When the  
or  
button is pushed for less  
than 1.5 seconds while the iPod® is playing, the  
next track or the beginning of the current track  
on the iPod® will be played.  
.
.
To select the program, push to search using  
AUX (Auxiliary) input  
the SEEK  
or  
and ENTER button.  
AUX IN jack:  
When the BACK button is pushed, it returns  
to the previous display.  
APS (Automatic Program  
Search) FF, APS REW button:  
The AUX IN jack is located on the audio unit.  
The AUX IN audio input jack accepts any  
standard analog audio input such as from a  
portable cassette tape/CD player, MP3 player or  
laptop computer.  
iPod® play information:  
When the  
or  
button is pushed for  
more than 1.5 seconds while the iPod® is  
playing, numbers of tracks can be skipped  
through.  
When the DISP button is pushed while a  
program is being played, the program informa-  
tion display will change as follows:  
AUX (Auxiliary) button:  
When the  
or  
button is pushed for less  
than 1.5 seconds while iPod® is playing, the next  
track or the beginning of the current track on the  
iPod® will be played.  
With an AUX device plugged in, push the AUX  
button repeatedly until the display changes to  
the AUX mode.  
* Artist Name will not be displayed for a Podcast.  
When the AUX button is pushed with no device  
plugged into the jack, the audio system does not  
change to the AUX mode.  
REPEAT (RPT), RANDOM (RDM):  
When the RPT button is pushed while a track is  
being played, the play pattern can be changed  
as follows:  
4-34 Heater, air conditioner, audio and phone systems  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
13. AUX IN jack  
14. TUNE/SCROLL CONTROL dial  
15. ENTER/SETTING button  
FM-AM-SAT RADIO WITH COMPACT  
DISC (CD) PLAYER  
For all operation precautions, see “AUDIO  
OPERATION PRECAUTIONS” earlier in this  
section.  
No satellite radio reception is available when the  
SAT band option is selected unless the optional  
satellite receiver and antenna are installed, and  
there is an active XM Satellite Radio subscrip-  
tion.  
The satellite radio mode requires an active XM  
Satellite Radio subscription. The satellite radio is  
not available in Alaska, Hawaii and Guam.  
It may take some time to receive the activation  
signal after subscribing the XM Satellite Radio.  
After receiving the activation signal, an available  
channel list will be automatically updated in the  
radio. For XM, push the ignition switch from  
LOCK to ACC to update the channel list.  
SAA2779  
1. CD RDM (random) play button  
2. Radio SCAN tuning button  
7. CD EJECT button  
Audio main operation  
8. Radio CAT (category)/FF (fast forward) button for  
SEEK/TRACK  
Head unit:  
3. Radio station preset select buttons  
4. CD RPT (repeat) play button  
9. ON·OFF button/VOL (volume) control knob  
10. FM·AM band select button  
11. CD button  
The auto loudness circuit enhances the low and  
high frequency ranges automatically in both  
radio reception and CD playback.  
5. Radio CAT (category)/REW (rewind) button for  
SEEK/TRACK  
6. iPod® MENU button  
12. AUX (auxiliary) button  
Heater, air conditioner, audio and phone systems 4-35  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
displayed.  
When the radio band select button is pushed  
while the ignition switch is in the ACC or ON  
position, the radio will come on at the channel  
last played.  
ON·OFF/Volume control:  
Turn the TUNE control dial to adjust the bright-  
ness and contrast of the screen to the preferred  
level.  
Push the ignition switch to the ACC or ON  
position, and then push the ON·OFF button  
while the system is off to turn on the last audio  
source (i.e. FM or CD), which was playing  
immediately before the system was turned off.  
While the system is on, pushing the ON·OFF  
button turns the system off.  
The last channel played will also come on when  
the ON·OFF button is pushed to ON.  
See “CLOCK” in the “2. Instruments and  
controls” section for the detailed clock adjust-  
ment operation.  
The satellite radio is not available in Alaska,  
Hawaii and Guam.  
Switching the display:  
Turn the VOL control knob to adjust the volume.  
If another audio source is playing when the radio  
band select button is turned to ON, the audio  
source will automatically be turned off and the  
last radio channel played will come on.  
Pushing the AUX button will switch the displays  
as follows:  
SETTING button:  
XM1 ? XM2 ? iPod®/USB ? AUX ? XM1  
Push the button to change the selecting mode  
as follows.  
When the stereo broadcast signal is weak, the  
radio will automatically change from stereo to  
monaural reception.  
FM-AM-SAT radio operation  
radio (FM/AM) band select:  
TUNE (Tuning):  
Pushing the radio band select button will  
change the band as follows:  
.
For AM and FM radio  
Turn the radio TUNE dial for manual tuning.  
For XM Satellite Radio  
AM ? FM1 ? FM2 ? AM  
.
Push the TUNE control dial to adjust Bass and  
Treble to the desired level. Use the TUNE  
control dial also to adjust Fade or Balance  
modes. Fade adjusts the sound level between  
the front and rear speakers and Balance adjusts  
the sound between the right and left speakers.  
radio (SAT) band select:  
Turn the radio TUNE dial to seek channels  
from all of the categories when any category  
is not selected.  
Pushing the radio band select button will  
change the band as follows:  
To change the Speed Sensitive Volume (Spd  
Sen Vol) mode from off (0) to 5, and push the  
TUNE control dial until the desired mode is  
4-36 Heater, air conditioner, audio and phone systems  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
1. Choose the radio band using the radio band  
select button.  
If the system has been turned off while the CD  
was playing, pushing the ON·OFF button will  
start the CD.  
SEEK tuning/CATEGORY  
(CAT):  
2. Tune to the desired station/channel using  
the SEEK/CAT, SCAN button or the radio  
TUNE dial.  
Do not use 3.1 in (8 cm) discs.  
.
.
For AM and FM radio  
Push the SEEK button  
or  
to tune  
PLAY:  
3. Push and hold the desired station preset  
from low to high or high to low frequencies  
and to stop at the next broadcasting station.  
1
*
6
*
button  
to  
until the radio mutes.  
When the CD button is pushed with the system  
off and the CD loaded, the system will turn on  
and the CD will start to play.  
4. The station indicator will then come on and  
the sound will resume. Memorizing is now  
complete.  
For XM Satellite Radio  
Push the SEEK button  
or  
to tune  
When the CD button is pushed with the CD  
loaded and the radio playing, the radio will  
automatically be turned off and the CD will start  
to play.  
to the first channel of the next or previous  
category.  
5. Other buttons can be set in the same  
manner.  
SCAN tuning:  
If the battery cable is disconnected, or if the fuse  
opens, the radio memory will be erased. In that  
case, reset the desired stations/channels.  
Push the SCAN tuning button to tune from low  
to high frequencies and stop at each broad-  
casting station/channel for 5 seconds. Pushing  
the button again during this 5 seconds period  
will stop SCAN tuning and the radio will remain  
tuned to that station/channel.  
Next/Previous Track and Fast  
Forward/Rewind:  
Compact Disc (CD) player operation  
When the  
(fast forward) or  
(rewind)  
Push the ignition switch to the ACC or ON  
position and insert the Compact Disc (CD) into  
the slot with the label side facing up. The CD will  
be guided automatically into the slot and start  
playing.  
button is pushed for more than 1.5 seconds  
while the CD is being played, the CD will play  
while fast forwarding or rewinding. When the  
button is released, the CD will return to normal  
play speed.  
If the SCAN tuning button is not pushed within 5  
seconds, SCAN tuning moves to the next  
station/channel.  
After loading the CD, the number of tracks on  
the CD and the play time will appear on the  
display.  
When the  
or  
button is pushed for less  
1
*
6
*
to  
Station memory operations:  
than 1.5 seconds while the CD is being played,  
the next track or the beginning of the current  
track on the CD will be played.  
12 stations/channels can be set for the FM band  
(6 each for FM1 and FM2), 12 for XM radio (6  
each for XM1 and XM2) and 6 stations can be  
set for the AM band.  
If the radio is already operating, it will auto-  
matically turn off and the CD will play.  
Heater, air conditioner, audio and phone systems 4-37  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
being played, the CD will be ejected.  
REPEAT (RPT):  
If the CD comes out and is not removed, it  
will be pulled back into the slot to protect  
it.  
When the RPT button is pushed while the CD is  
played, the play pattern can be changed as  
follows:  
AUX (Auxiliary) input  
(CD)  
AUX IN jack:  
Normal Û 1 Track Repeat  
(CD with compressed audio files)  
The AUX IN jack is located on the audio unit.  
The AUX IN audio input jack accepts any  
standard analog audio input such as from a  
portable cassette tape/CD player, MP3 player or  
laptop computer.  
Normal ? 1 Folder Repeat ? 1 Track Repeat ?  
Normal  
RANDOM (RDM):  
SAA2780  
AUX (Auxiliary) button:  
When the RDM button is pushed while a CD is  
being played, the play pattern can be changed  
as follows:  
USB memory operation  
When the AUX button is pushed with no device  
plugged into the jack, the audio system does not  
change to the AUX mode.  
Audio main operation:  
(CD)  
The USB outlet connector is on the lower center  
of the instrument panel. Open the lid and  
connect a USB memory as illustrated. Then,  
switch to the USB memory mode automatically.  
Normal Û 1 Disc Random  
(CD with compressed audio files)  
If the system has been turned off while the USB  
memory was playing, pushing the ON·OFF/VOL  
control knob will start the USB memory.  
Normal ? 1 Disc Random ? 1 Folder Random  
? Normal  
CD EJECT:  
PLAY:  
When the CD EJECT button is pushed with the  
CD loaded, the CD will be ejected.  
When the AUX button is pushed with the system  
off and the USB memory inserted, the system  
will turn on.  
When this button is pushed while the CD is  
4-38 Heater, air conditioner, audio and phone systems  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
If another audio source is playing and a USB  
memory is inserted, push the AUX button  
repeatedly until the center display changes to  
the USB memory mode.  
REPEAT (RPT):  
When the RPT button is pushed while the USB  
memory is played, the play pattern can be  
change as follows.  
Next/Previous File and Fast  
Forward/Rewind:  
To change the play mode, push the RPT button  
repeatedly and the mode will change as follows.  
When the  
(Rewind) or  
(Fast Forward)  
Normal ? 1 Folder Repeat ? 1 Track Repeat ?  
button is pushed for more than 1.5 seconds  
while a USB memory is being played, the USB  
memory will play while forwarding or rewinding.  
When the button is released, the USB memory  
will return to normal play speed.  
Normal  
RANDOM (RDM):  
When the RDM button is pushed while a USB  
memory is being played, the play pattern can be  
changed as follows.  
SAA2781  
When the  
or  
button is pushed for less  
iPod® player operation  
Connecting iPod®:  
than 1.5 seconds while the USB memory is  
being played, the next track or the beginning of  
the current track on the USB memory will be  
played.  
To change the play mode, push the RDM button  
repeatedly, and the mode will change as follows.  
The USB outlet connector is on the lower center  
of the instrument panel. Open the lid and  
connect the iPod® cable to the USB connector.  
The battery of the iPod® is charged while the  
connection to the vehicle.  
Normal ? All Random ? 1 Folder Random ?  
Normal  
The multi-function controller can also be used to  
select tracks when the USB memory is being  
played.  
Folder selection:  
Depending on the version of the iPod®, the  
display on the iPod® shows a NISSAN or  
Accessory Attached screen when the connec-  
tion is completed. When the iPod® is connected  
to the vehicle, the iPod® music library can only  
be operated by the vehicle audio controls.  
To change to another folder in the USB memory,  
turn the folder selector or choose a folder  
displayed on the screen using the multi-function  
controller.  
* iPod® and iPhone® are a trademark of Apple  
Heater, air conditioner, audio and phone systems 4-39  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Inc., registered in the U.S. and other countries.  
Compatibility:  
iPod® MENU button:  
Next/Previous Track and Fast  
Forward/Rewind:  
Place the ignition switch in the ACC or ON  
position. Then, push the iPod® button to switch  
to the iPod® mode.  
The following models are available:  
When the  
or  
button is pushed for  
more than 1.5 seconds while the iPod® is  
playing, the iPod® will play while fast forwarding  
or rewinding. When the button is released, the  
iPod® will return to the normal play speed.  
.
.
.
Fifth generation iPod® (version 1.2.1 or later)  
iPod Classic® (version 1.1 or later)  
If another audio source is playing and the iPod®  
is connected, pushing the iPod® button changes  
to the iPod® mode.  
First generation iPod touch® (version 2.1 or  
later)  
If the system has been turned off while the iPod®  
was playing, pushing the PWR button will start  
the iPod®.  
When the  
or  
button is pushed for less  
than 1.5 seconds while the iPod® is playing, the  
next track or the beginning of the current track  
on the iPod® will be played.  
.
.
.
First generation iPod nano® (version 1.3.1 or  
later)  
When the iPod® MENU button is pushed while  
the iPod® is connected, the interface for iPod®  
operation is shown on the audio display. The  
items on the menu list can be scrolled by  
Second generation iPod nano® (version  
1.1.3 or later)  
The multi-function controller can also be used to  
select tracks when the iPod® is playing.  
Third generation iPod nano® (version 1.1 or  
later)  
pushing the  
or  
while the iPod® is  
REPEAT (RPT):  
operational. To select an item, push ENTER. The  
display can be changed as follows:  
Make sure that the iPod® version is updated.  
When the RPT button is pushed while a track is  
being played, the play pattern can be changed  
as follows:  
Audio main operation:  
Push the ignition switch to the ACC or ON  
position. Then, push the DISC·AUX button  
repeatedly to switch to the iPod® mode.  
Repeat Off ? Repeat One ? Repeat All ?  
Repeat Off  
For more information about each item, see the  
iPod® Owner’s Manual.  
If the system has been turned off while the iPod®  
was playing, pushing the ON·OFF button will  
start the iPod®.  
Random (RDM):  
When the RDM button is pushed while a track is  
being played, the play pattern can be changed  
as follows:  
Shuffle Off ? Shuffle Songs ? Shuffle Albums  
4-40 Heater, air conditioner, audio and phone systems  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
rubbing the inner and outer edges with the  
side of a pen or pencil as illustrated.  
SAA0451  
SAA2349  
1. SOURCE select switch  
2. VOLUME control switch  
3. Tuning switch  
CD CARE AND CLEANING  
.
.
.
Handle a CD by its edges. Never touch the  
surface of the disc. Do not bend the disc.  
STEERING WHEEL SWITCH FOR  
AUDIO CONTROL (if so equipped)  
Always place the discs in the storage case  
when they are not being used.  
The audio system can be operated using the  
controls on the steering wheel.  
To clean a disc, wipe the surface from the  
center to the outer edge using a clean, soft  
cloth. Do not wipe the disc using a circular  
motion.  
SOURCE select switch  
With the ignition switch placed in the ACC or  
ON position, push the SOURCE select switch  
to turn the audio system on.  
Do not use a conventional record cleaner or  
alcohol intended for industrial use.  
Push the SOURCE select switch to change the  
mode.  
.
A new disc may be rough on the inner and  
outer edges. Remove the rough edges by  
Heater, air conditioner, audio and phone systems 4-41  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
AM, FM, CD, AUX, iPod® (if so equipped) and  
SAT (if so equipped)  
within one program or there is no interval  
between programs, the system may not stop in  
the desired or expected location.  
ANTENNA  
If no CD is loaded or AUX and/or iPod® are not  
connected, the CD, AUX and/or iPod® modes  
will be skipped.  
CAUTION  
FOLDER change (CD with MP3 or WMA):  
.
To avoid damaging or deforming the  
antenna, be sure to fold down (if so  
equipped) or remove the antenna  
under the following conditions.  
Push the tuning switch for more than 1.5  
seconds to change the folders (if there are any  
folders).  
VOLUME control switch  
Push up or down the VOLUME control switch to  
increase or decrease the volume.  
— The vehicle enters a garage with  
a low ceiling.  
Tuning switch  
— The vehicle is covered with a car  
cover.  
Memory change (radio):  
.
.
Be sure that antenna is removed  
before the vehicle enters an auto-  
matic car wash.  
Push the tuning switch for less than 1.5 seconds  
to change the next or previous radio preset.  
SEEK tuning (radio):  
Always properly tighten the antenna  
rod during installation. Otherwise,  
the antenna rod may break during  
vehicle operation.  
Push the tuning switch for more than 1.5  
seconds to seek the next or previous radio  
station.  
APS (Automatic Program Search) FF, APS  
REW (CD and iPod®):  
Push the tuning switch for less than 1.5 seconds  
to return to the beginning of the present  
program or skip to the next program. Push  
several times to skip back or skip through  
programs.  
This system searches for the blank intervals  
between selections. If there is a blank interval  
4-42 Heater, air conditioner, audio and phone systems  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
clockwise and tighten.  
SAA2102  
For FM-AM-SAT radio  
.
To remove the antenna, hold the bottom of  
the antenna and turn it counterclockwise.  
.
To install the antenna, turn the antenna  
clockwise and tighten.  
SAA1236  
For FM-AM radio  
.
.
.
Adjust the angle of the antenna for the best  
reception.  
To remove the antenna, hold the bottom of  
the antenna and turn it counterclockwise.  
To install the antenna, turn the antenna  
Heater, air conditioner, audio and phone systems 4-43  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
BLUETOOTH® HANDS-FREE PHONE  
SYSTEM (if so equipped)  
CAR PHONE OR CB RADIO  
When installing a car phone or a CB radio in  
your NISSAN, be sure to observe the following  
precautions, otherwise the new equipment may  
adversely affect the electronic control modules  
and electronic control system harness.  
CAUTION  
WARNING  
.
.
Keep the antenna as far away as  
possible from the electronic control  
modules.  
.
.
Use a phone after stopping your  
vehicle in a safe location. If you  
have to use a phone while driving,  
exercise extreme caution at all  
times so full attention may be given  
to vehicle operation.  
WARNING  
Keep the antenna wire more than 8  
in (20 cm) away from the electronic  
control system harness. Do not  
route the antenna wire next to any  
harness.  
.
.
A cellular telephone should not be  
used while driving so full attention  
may be given to vehicle operation.  
Some jurisdictions prohibit the use  
of cellular telephones while driving.  
If you find yourself unable to devote  
full attention to vehicle operation  
while talking on the phone, pull off  
the road to a safe location and stop  
your vehicle before doing so.  
.
Adjust the antenna standing-wave  
ratio as recommended by the man-  
ufacturer.  
If you must make a call while your  
vehicle is in motion, the hands-free  
cellular phone operational mode (if  
so equipped) is highly recom-  
mended. Exercise extreme caution  
at all times so full attention may be  
given to vehicle operation.  
.
.
Connect the ground wire from the  
CB radio chassis to the body.  
CAUTION  
For details, consult a NISSAN deal-  
er.  
To avoid draining the vehicle battery,  
use a phone after starting the engine.  
.
If a conversation in a moving vehicle  
requires you to take notes, pull off  
the road to a safe location and stop  
your vehicle before doing so.  
4-44 Heater, air conditioner, audio and phone systems  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Hands-Free Phone System.  
.
.
Some Bluetooth® enabled cellular phones  
may not be recognized by the in-vehicle  
phone module. Please visit www.nissanusa.  
com/bluetooth for a recommended phone  
list and instructions for connecting your  
phone.  
You will not be able to use a hands-free  
phone under the following conditions:  
— Your vehicle is outside of the telephone  
service area.  
— Your vehicle is in an area where it is  
difficult to receive radio waves; such as in  
a tunnel, in an underground parking  
garage, near a tall building or in a  
mountainous area.  
SAA2350  
1. Volume control switch −/+  
automatically connected with the in-vehicle  
phone module when the ignition switch is  
pushed to the ON position with the connected  
cellular phone turned on and carried in the  
vehicle.  
2. PHONE SEND  
3. PHONE END  
4. Microphone  
button  
button  
— Your cellular phone is locked to prevent it  
from being dialed.  
Your NISSAN is equipped with the Bluetooth®  
Hands-Free Phone System. If you have a  
compatible Bluetooth® enabled cellular phone,  
you can set up the wireless connection between  
your cellular phone and the in-vehicle phone  
module. With Bluetooth® wireless technology,  
you can make or receive a hands-free telephone  
call in your vehicle.  
You can connect up to 5 different Bluetooth®  
cellular phones in the in-vehicle phone module.  
However, you can talk on only one cellular phone  
at a time.  
.
.
.
When the radio wave condition is not ideal  
or ambient sound is too loud, it may be  
difficult to hear the other person’s voice  
during a call.  
Before using the Bluetooth® Hands-Free Phone  
System, refer to the following notes.  
Immediately after the ignition switch is  
pushed to the ON position, it may be  
impossible to receive a call for a short  
period of time.  
.
Set up the wireless connection between a  
compatible cellular phone and the in-vehicle  
phone module before using the Bluetooth®  
Once your cellular phone is connected to the in-  
vehicle phone module, no other phone connect-  
ing procedure is required. Your phone is  
Do not place the cellular phone in an area  
Heater, air conditioner, audio and phone systems 4-45  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
surrounded by metal or far away from the in-  
vehicle phone module to prevent tone quality  
degradation and wireless connection dis-  
ruption.  
*
Modulation: FHSS GFSK 8DPSK, p/  
4DQPSK  
IC Regulatory information  
—
Operation is subject to the following two  
conditions: (1) this device may not cause  
interference, and (2) this device must accept  
any interference, including interference that  
may cause undesired operation of the  
device.  
*
*
Number of channels: 79  
This wireless equipment cannot be used for  
any services related to life safety because  
there is the possibility of radio interference.  
.
While a cellular phone is connected through  
the Bluetooth® wireless connection, the  
battery power of the cellular phone may  
discharge quicker than usual. The Blue-  
tooth® Hands-Free Phone System cannot  
charge cellular phones.  
REGULATORY INFORMATION  
Bluetooth trademark:  
—
This Class B digital apparatus meets all  
requirements of the Canadian Interference-  
Causing Equipment Regulations.  
BLUETOOTH® is  
a
trademark  
.
.
.
If the Bluetooth® Hands-Free Phone System  
seems to be malfunctioning, see “Trouble-  
shooting guide” later in this section. You can  
also visit www.nissanusa.com/bluetooth for  
troubleshooting help.  
USING THE SYSTEM  
owned by Bluetooth SIG, Inc.,  
U.S.A. and licensed to Visteon  
Corporation.  
The NISSAN Voice Recognition system allows  
hands-free operation of the Bluetooth® Hands-  
Free Phone System.  
FCC Regulatory information  
—
Some cellular phones or other devices may  
cause interference or a buzzing noise to  
come from the audio system speakers.  
Storing the device in a different location  
may reduce or eliminate the noise.  
If the vehicle is in motion, some commands may  
not be available so full attention may be given to  
vehicle operation.  
CAUTION: To maintain compliance with  
FCC’s RF exposure guidelines, use only  
the supplied antenna. Unauthorized antenna,  
modification, or attachments could damage  
the transmitter and may violate FCC regula-  
tions.  
Initialization  
When the ignition switch is pushed to the ON  
position, NISSAN Voice Recognition is initia-  
lized, which takes a few seconds. If the  
button is pushed before the initialization com-  
pletes, the system will not accept any command.  
Refer to the cellular phone Owner’s Manual  
regarding battery charging, cellular phone  
antenna, etc.  
—
Operation is subject to the following two  
conditions:  
This wireless hands-free car kit is based on  
Bluetooth technology.  
1) this device may not cause interference and  
Operating tips  
2) this device must accept any interference,  
including interference that may cause un-  
desired operation of the device  
*
*
Frequency: 2402 MHz - 2480 MHz  
Output power: 7,94 dBm E.I.R.P  
To get the best performance out of the NISSAN  
Voice Recognition system, observe the follow-  
ing:  
4-46 Heater, air conditioner, audio and phone systems  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
.
.
Keep the interior of the vehicle as quiet as  
possible. Close the windows to eliminate  
surrounding noises (traffic noises, vibration  
sounds, etc.), which may prevent the system  
from recognizing voice commands correctly.  
.
.
If you want to go back to the previous  
command, you can say “Go back” or  
“Correction” anytime the system is waiting  
for a response.  
How to say numbers  
NISSAN Voice Recognition requires a certain  
way to speak numbers in voice commands.  
Refer to the rules and examples below.  
You can cancel a command when the  
system is waiting for a response by saying,  
“Cancel” or “Quit.” The system announces  
“Cancel” and ends the VR session. You can  
.
Either “zero” or “oh” can be used for “0”.  
Example: 1-800-662-6200  
Wait until the tone sounds before speaking a  
command. Otherwise, the command will not  
be received properly.  
— “One eight oh oh six six two six two oh  
oh”, or  
also push and hold the  
button for 5  
.
.
Start speaking a command within 5 seconds  
after the tone sounds.  
seconds on the steering wheel at any time to  
cancel the VR session. Whenever the VR  
session is cancelled, a double beep is  
played to indicate you have exited the  
system.  
— “One eight zero zero six six two six two oh  
oh”  
Speak in a natural voice without pausing  
between words.  
.
Words can be used for the first 4 digits  
places only.  
Giving voice command  
To operate NISSAN Voice Recognition, push  
and release the  
steering wheel. After the tone sounds, speak a  
command.  
.
If you want to adjust the volume of the voice  
feedback, push the volume control switch (+  
or −) on the steering wheel while being  
provided with feedback. You can also use  
the radio volume control knob.  
Example: 1-800-662-6200  
button located on the  
— “One eight hundred six six two six two oh  
oh”,  
— NOT “One eight hundred six six two sixty  
two hundred, and  
The command given is picked up by the  
microphone, and voice feedback is given when  
the command is accepted.  
.
.
In most cases you can interrupt the voice  
feedback to speak the next command by  
pressing the  
wheel.  
button on the steering  
— NOT “One eight oh oh six six two sixty two  
hundred.  
.
If you need to hear the available commands  
for the current menu again, say “Help” and  
the system will repeat them.  
To use the system faster, you may speak the  
second level commands with the main menu  
command on the main menu. For example,  
.
Numbers can be spoken in small groups.  
The system will prompt you to continuing  
entering digits, if desired.  
.
If a command is not recognized, the system  
announces, “Command not recognized.  
Please say again.” Repeat the command in  
a clear voice.  
press the  
button and after the tone say,  
Example: 1-800-662-6200  
“Call Redial.” Note: The combined com-  
mand of Call and (a Name) cannot be used.  
— “One eight zero zero”  
The system repeats the numbers and  
Heater, air conditioner, audio and phone systems 4-47  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
prompts you to enter more.  
NOTE:  
For best results, say phone numbers as  
single digits.  
— “six six two”  
The system repeats the numbers and  
prompts you to enter more.  
The voice command “Help” is available at any  
time. Please say the “Help” command to get  
information about how to use the system.  
— “six two zero zero”  
.
.
You can say “Star” for “*” and “Pound” for  
“#” at any time in any position of the phone  
number. (Available only when using the  
“Special Dialing” command.)  
INFO  
.
If you are controlling the telephone system  
by voice command for the first time or do not  
know the appropriate voice command,  
speak “Help”. The system announces the  
available commands.  
Example: 1-555-1212 *123  
— “One five five five one two one two star  
one two three”  
SAA2351  
.
When you speak numbers, you can speak  
both “zero” or “oh” for “0”.  
Say “pound” for “#”. Say “star” for “*”  
(available when using the “Special Dialing”  
command and the “Send” command during  
a call).  
CONTROL BUTTONS  
The control buttons for the Bluetooth® Hands-  
Free Phone System are located on the steering  
wheel.  
Manual command selection  
Commands can be selected manually. While the  
commands are displayed on the audio screen,  
select a command by operating the audio tuning  
switch, and then push the  
command is manually selected, the voice  
command function is cancelled. To return to  
voice command mode, push the  
cancel the current operation, and then perform  
the first procedure of voice command.  
.
.
Say “plus” for “+” (available only when using  
the “Special Dialing” command).  
PHONE SEND  
switch. Once a  
Push the  
answer an incoming call.  
button to initiate a VR session or  
Say “pause” for a 2 second pause (available  
only when storing a phone book number).  
switch to  
You can also use the  
button to interrupt  
system feedback and give a command at once.  
See “Making a call by entering a phone  
number” later in this section and “LIST OF  
VOICE COMMANDS” later in this section  
for more information.  
4-48 Heater, air conditioner, audio and phone systems  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
PHONE END  
4. The system announces the current language  
and gives you the option to change the  
language to Spanish (in Spanish) or French  
(in French). Use the following chart to select  
the language.  
While the voice recognition system is active,  
press the  
Press and hold the  
button to go back one step.  
button for 5 seconds to  
quit the voice recognition system at any time.  
NOTE:  
GETTING STARTED  
You must push the  
button within 5 seconds to change  
the language.  
button or the  
1. Push the  
button on the steering wheel.  
The following procedures will help you get  
started using the Bluetooth® Hands-Free Phone  
System with NISSAN Voice Recognition. For  
additional command options, refer to “LIST OF  
VOICE COMMANDS” later in this section.  
The system announces the available com-  
mands.  
Push  
(MODE/  
PHONE END)  
to select  
Push  
(TALK/PHONE  
SEND) to select  
Current lan-  
guage  
A
2. Say: “Connect Phone”  
. The system  
*
acknowledges the command and an-  
nounces the next set of available commands.  
Choosing a language  
English  
Spanish  
French  
Spanish  
English  
English  
French  
French  
Spanish  
You can interact with the Bluetooth® Hands-Free  
Phone System using English, Spanish or French.  
B
3. Say: “Add phone”  
. The system acknowl-  
*
edges the command and asks you to initiate  
C
*
pairing from the phone handset  
.
To change the language, perform the following.  
The connecting procedure of the cellular  
phone varies according to each cellular  
phone. See the cellular phone Owner’s  
Manual for details. You can also visit www.  
nissanusa.com/bluetooth for instructions on  
connecting NISSAN recommended cellular  
phones.  
5. If you decide not to change the language, do  
not press either button. After 5 seconds, the  
VR session will end, and the language will  
not be changed.  
1. Press and hold the  
than 5 seconds.  
button for more  
2. The system announces: “Press the PHONE  
SEND ( ) button for the hands-free  
phone system to enter the speaker adapta-  
Connecting procedure  
NOTE:  
tion mode or press the PHONE END (  
button to select a different language.”  
)
When prompted for a Passkey code, enter  
“1234” from the handset. The Passkey code  
“1234” has been assigned by NISSAN and  
cannot be changed.  
The connecting procedure must be per-  
formed when the vehicle is stationary. If  
the vehicle starts moving during the pro-  
cedure, the procedure will be cancelled.  
3. Push the  
button.  
For information on speaker adaptation, see  
“SPEAKER ADAPTATION (SA) MODE”  
later in this section.  
4. The system asks you to say a name for the  
D
*
phone  
.
Heater, air conditioner, audio and phone systems 4-49  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
LIST OF VOICE COMMANDS  
If the name is too long or too short, the  
system tells you, then prompts you for a  
name again.  
phone number, try entering the number in  
the following groups: 3-digit area code, 3-  
digit prefix and the last 4-digits. For example,  
555-121-3354 can be said as “five five five”  
as the 1st group, then “one two one” as the  
2nd group, and “three three five four” as the  
3rd group. For dialing more than 10 digits or  
any special characters, say “Special Dial-  
ing”. See “How to say numbers” earlier in  
this section, for more information.  
Also, if more than one phone is connected  
and the name sounds too much like a name  
already used, the system tells you, then  
prompts you for a name again.  
Making a call by entering a phone  
number  
When you push and release the  
button on  
the steering wheel, you can choose from the  
commands on the Main Menu. The following  
pages describe these commands and the  
commands in each sub-menu.  
5. When you have finished speaking the phone  
number, the system repeats it back and  
announces the available commands.  
C
6. Say: “Dial”  
. The system acknowledges  
*
Remember to wait for the tone before  
speaking.  
the command and makes the call.  
For additional command options, see “LIST OF  
VOICE COMMANDS” later in this section.  
1. Push the  
button on steering wheel. A  
. The system acknowledges  
You can say “Help” to hear the list of commands  
currently available anytime the system is waiting  
for a response.  
tone will sound.  
Receiving a call  
When you hear the ring tone, press the  
button on the steering wheel.  
A
*
2. Say: “Call”  
the command and announces the next set of  
available commands.  
A menu item can also be selected by scrolling  
the display with the SEEK switch and entering  
by pushing the  
button.  
Once the call has ended, press the  
on the steering wheel.  
button  
B
3. Say: “Phone Number”  
. The system  
*
acknowledges the command and an-  
nounces the next set of available commands.  
Say: “Special Dialing” to dial more than 10  
digits or any special characters.  
If you want to end an action without completing  
it, you can say “Cancel” or “Quit” at anytime the  
system is waiting for a response. The system will  
end the VR session. Whenever the VR session  
is cancelled, a double beep is played to indicate  
you have exited the system.  
NOTE:  
If you do not wish to take the call when you  
hear the ring tone, press the button on  
the steering wheel to reject the call.  
4. Say the number you wish to call starting with  
the area code in single digit format. If the  
system has trouble recognizing the correct  
If you want to go back to the previous command,  
4-50 Heater, air conditioner, audio and phone systems  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
B
you can say “Go back” or “Correction” anytime  
the system is waiting for a response.  
Phone Number (speak digits)  
During a call  
*
When prompted by the system, say the number  
to call. Refer to “Making a call by entering a  
phone number” earlier in this section for more  
details.  
During a call there are several command options  
available. Push the  
wheel to mute the receiving voice and enter  
commands.  
button on the steering  
Call  
C
“Redial”  
*
Use the Redial command to call the last number  
.
“Help” — The system announces the avail-  
able commands.  
that was dialed.  
.
“Go back/Correction” — The system an-  
nounces “Go back,” ends the VR session  
and returns to the call.  
The system acknowledges the command, re-  
peats the number and begins dialing.  
.
.
“Cancel/Quit” — The system announces  
“Cancel,” ends the VR session and returns  
to the call.  
If a redial number does not exist, the system  
announces, “There is no number to redial” and  
ends the VR session.  
A
Name (a name)  
*
If there are entries stored in the phonebook, a  
number associated with a name and location  
can be dialed.  
“Send/Enter/Call/Dial” — Use the Send  
command to enter numbers, “*” or “#”  
during a call. For example, if you were  
directed to dial an extension by an auto-  
mated system:  
D
“Call back”  
*
Use the Call Back command to dial the number  
of the last incoming call within the vehicle.  
See “Phonebook (phones without automatic  
phonebook download function)” later in this  
section to learn how to store entries.  
The system acknowledges the command, re-  
peats the number and begins dialing.  
Say: “Send one two three four.”  
When prompted by the system, say the name of  
the phonebook entry to call. The system  
acknowledges the name.  
The system acknowledges the command  
and sends the tones associated with the  
numbers. The system then ends the VR  
session and returns to the call. Say “star” for  
“*”, say “pound” for “#”.  
If a call back number does not exist, the system  
announces, “There is no number to call back”  
and ends the VR session.  
If there are multiple locations associated with  
the name, the system asks the user to choose  
the location.  
Special Dialing  
To dial more than 10 digits or any special  
characters, please say “Special Dialing”. When  
the system acknowledges the command, the  
system will prompt you to speak the number.  
.
“Transfer call” — Use the Transfer Call  
command to transfer the call from the  
Bluetooth® Hands-Free Phone System to  
Once the name and location are confirmed, the  
system begins the call.  
Heater, air conditioner, audio and phone systems 4-51  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
the cellular phone when privacy is desired.  
nication link.  
Phonebook (phones without automatic  
phonebook download function)  
The system announces, “Transfer call. Call  
transferred to privacy mode.” The system  
then ends the VR session.  
The transfer procedure varies according to each  
cellular phone. See the cellular phone Owner’s  
Manual for details. You can also visit www.  
nissanusa.com/bluetooth for instructions on  
transferring phone numbers from NISSAN re-  
commended cellular phones.  
A
*
“Transfer Entry”  
Use the Transfer Entry command to store a new  
name in the system.  
To reconnect a call from the cellular phone  
to the Bluetooth® Hands-Free Phone sys-  
When prompted by the system, say the name  
you would like to give the new entry.  
tem, push the  
button.  
The system repeats the number and prompts  
you for the next command. When you have  
finished entering numbers or transferring an  
entry, choose “Store.”  
.
“Mute” — Use the Mute command to mute  
your voice so the other party cannot hear it.  
Use the mute command again to unmute  
your voice.  
For example, say: “Mary.”  
If the name is too long or too short, the system  
tells you, then prompts you for a name again.  
The system confirms the name, location and  
number.  
NOTE:  
Also, if the name sounds too much like a name  
already stored, the system tells you, then  
prompts you for a name again.  
If a call is ended or the cellular phone  
network connection is lost while the Mute  
feature is on, the Mute feature will be reset  
to “off” for the next call so the other party  
can hear your voice.  
B
“Delete Entry”  
*
Use the Delete Entry command to delete one  
entry from the phonebook. After the system  
acknowledges a command, say the name to  
delete or say “List Names” to choose an entry.  
The system will ask you to transfer a phone  
number stored in the cellular phone’s memory.  
To enter a phone number by voice command:  
For example, say: “five five five one two one  
two.” See “How to say numbers” earlier in this  
section for more information.  
C
“List Names”  
*
Use the List Names command to hear all the  
names in the phonebook. The system recites the  
phonebook entries but does not include the  
actual phone numbers. When playback of the  
list is complete, the system returns to the main  
menu.  
To transfer a phone number stored in the cellular  
phone’s memory:  
Say: “Transfer entry.” The system acknowledges  
the command and asks you to initiate the  
transfer from the phone handset. The new  
contact phone number will be transferred from  
the cellular phone via the Bluetooth® commu-  
Playback of the list can be stopped at any time  
by pushing the  
button on the steering  
4-52 Heater, air conditioner, audio and phone systems  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
wheel. The system ends the VR session.  
NOTE:  
Recent Calls  
Each phone has its own separate phone-  
book. You cannot access Phone A’s phone-  
book if you are currently connected with  
Phone B.  
Phonebook (phones with automatic  
phonebook download function)  
NOTE:  
Phonebook commands are not available  
when the vehicle is moving.  
A
“List names”  
*
Use the List Names command to hear all the  
names and locations in the phone book.  
Use the Recent Calls command to access  
outgoing, incoming or missed calls.  
The system recites the phone book entries but  
does not include the actual phone numbers.  
When the playback of the list is complete, the  
system goes back to the main menu.  
A
“Outgoing”  
*
Use the Outgoing command to list the outgoing  
For phones that support automatic download of  
the phonebook (PBAP Bluetooth® profile), the  
“Phonebook” command is used to manage  
entries to the vehicle phonebook. You can say  
the name of an entry at this menu to initiate  
dialing of that entry.  
calls made from the vehicle.  
You can stop the playback of the list at any time  
by pressing the  
button on the steering  
B
“Incoming”  
*
Use the Incoming command to list the incoming  
calls made from the vehicle.  
wheel. The system ends the VR session. See the  
“Record Name” command in this section for  
information about recording custom voice tags  
for list entries that the system has difficulty  
pronouncing.  
The phonebook stores up to 1000 names for  
each phone paired with the system. Each name  
can have up to 4 locations/phone numbers  
associated with it.  
C
“Missed”  
*
Use the Missed command to list the missed  
calls made to the vehicle that were not  
answered.  
B
“Record name”  
*
When a phone is connected to the system, the  
phonebook is automatically downloaded to the  
vehicle. This feature allows you to access your  
phonebook from the Bluetooth system and call  
contacts by name. You can record a custom  
voice tag for contact names that the system has  
difficulty recognizing. For more information see  
“Record Name” in this section.  
The system allows you to record custom voice  
tags for contact names in the phonebook that  
the vehicle has difficulty recognizing. This  
feature can also be used to record voice tags  
to directly dial an entry with multiple numbers.  
Up to 40 voice tags can be recorded to the  
system.  
Connect Phone  
NOTE:  
Add Phone command is not available  
when the vehicle is moving.  
Heater, air conditioner, audio and phone systems 4-53  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
wish to delete. Deleting a phone from the vehicle  
will also delete that phonebook for that phone.  
5. Press the  
button.  
For information on selecting a different  
language, see “Choosing a language” earlier  
in this section.  
D
“Turn Bluetooth Off”  
*
Use the Bluetooth Off command to prevent a  
wireless connection to your phone.  
6. If the connected phone is already in use, the  
system will prompt you to overwrite. Follow  
the instructions provided by the system.  
SPEAKER ADAPTATION (SA) MODE  
Speaker Adaptation allows up to two out-of  
dialect users to train the system to improve  
recognition accuracy. By repeating a number of  
commands, the users can create a voice model  
of their own voice that is stored in the system.  
The system is capable of storing a different  
speaker adaptation model for each connected  
phone.  
7. When preparation is complete and you are  
Use the Connect Phone commands to manage  
the phones connecting to the vehicle or to  
enable the Bluetooth® function on the vehicle.  
ready to begin, press the  
button.  
8. The SA mode will be explained. Follow the  
instructions provided by the system.  
A
“Add Phone”  
*
Use the Add Phone command to add a phone to  
the vehicle. See “Connecting procedure” earlier  
in this section for more information.  
9. When training is finished, the system will tell  
you an adequate number of phrases have  
been recorded.  
Training procedure  
1. Position the vehicle in a reasonably quiet  
outdoor location.  
10. The system will announce that speaker  
adaptation has been completed and the  
system is ready.  
B
“Select Phone”  
*
Use the Select Phone command to select from a  
list of phones connected to the vehicle. The  
system will list the names assigned to each  
phone and then prompt you for the phone you  
wish to select. Only one phone can be active at  
a time.  
2. Sit in the driver’s seat with the engine  
running, the parking brake on, and the  
transmission in Park.  
The SA mode will stop if:  
.
The  
button is pressed for more than 5  
seconds in SA mode.  
3. Press and hold the  
than 5 seconds.  
button for more  
.
.
The vehicle is driven during SA mode.  
C
“Delete Phone”  
*
Use the Delete Phone command to delete a  
phone that is connected to the vehicle. The  
system will list the names assigned to each  
phone and then prompt you for the phone you  
The ignition switch is turned to the OFF or  
LOCK position.  
4. The system announces: “Press the PHONE  
SEND ( ) button for the hands-free  
phone system to enter the speaker adapta-  
tion mode or press the PHONE END (  
button to select a different language.”  
)
4-54 Heater, air conditioner, audio and phone systems  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
Home  
.
.
.
go back  
Training phrases  
During the SA mode, the system instructs you to  
say the following phrases.  
call 3 1 9 0 2  
9 7 pause pause 3 0 8  
cancel  
call 5 6 2 8 0  
dial 6 6 4 3 7  
(The system will prompt you for each phrase.)  
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
phonebook new entry  
dial 3 0 4 2 9  
call back number  
call star 2 0 9 5  
delete phone  
delete call back number  
setup pair phone  
memo pad play  
8 pause 9 3 2 pause 7  
delete all entries  
call 7 2 4 0 9  
dial 8 3 0 5 1  
setup change ring tone  
4 3 pause 2 9 pause 0  
delete redial number  
phonebook list names  
call 8 0 5 4 1  
correction  
phonebook delete entry  
memo pad record  
dial star 2 1 7 0  
yes  
setup main menu  
dial 7 4 0 1 8  
memo pad delete  
delete  
no  
select ring tone  
Setup change priority  
dial 8 5 6 9 2  
dial 9 7 2 6 6  
call 7 6 3 0 1  
Bluetooth on  
Heater, air conditioner, audio and phone systems 4-55  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
TROUBLESHOOTING GUIDE  
The system should respond correctly to all voice commands without difficulty. If problems are encountered, try the following solutions.  
Where the solutions are listed by number, try each solution in turn, starting with number 1, until the problem is resolved.  
Symptom  
Solution  
1. Ensure that the command format is valid. (See “LIST OF VOICE COMMANDS” earlier in this section.)  
2. Ensure that the command is spoken after the tone.  
3. Speak clearly without pausing between words and at a level appropriate to the ambient noise level in the vehicle.  
System fails to interpret the command  
correctly.  
4. Ensure that the ambient noise level is not excessive (for example, windows open or defroster on).  
NOTE: If it is too noisy to use the phone, it is likely that the voice commands will not be recognized.  
5. If more than one command was said at a time, try saying the commands separately.  
6. If the system consistently fails to recognize commands, the voice training procedure should be carried out to improve the  
recognition response for the speaker. (See “SPEAKER ADAPTATION (SA) MODE” earlier in this section.)  
1. Ensure that the phone book entry name requested matches what was originally stored. This can be confirmed by using the  
“List Names” command. (See “LIST OF VOICE COMMANDS” earlier in this section.)  
The system consistently selects the  
wrong entry from the phone book.  
2. Replace one of the names being confused with a new name.  
4-56 Heater, air conditioner, audio and phone systems  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
MEMO  
Heater, air conditioner, audio and phone systems 4-57  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
MEMO  
4-58 Heater, air conditioner, audio and phone systems  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
5 Starting and driving  
Precautions when starting and driving ..................... 5-2  
Exhaust gas (carbon monoxide) ......................... 5-2  
Three-way catalyst.......................................... 5-2  
Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS)............. 5-3  
Avoiding collision and rollover ........................... 5-5  
Off-road recovery........................................... 5-5  
Rapid air pressure loss.................................... 5-6  
Drinking alcohol/drugs and driving...................... 5-6  
Driving the vehicle............................................ 5-14  
Continuously Variable Transmission (CVT).......... 5-14  
Manual Transmission (MT) .............................. 5-18  
Parking brake .................................................. 5-20  
Cruise control (if so equipped) ............................ 5-20  
Precautions on cruise control.......................... 5-20  
Cruise control operations ............................... 5-21  
Break-in schedule ............................................ 5-22  
Increasing fuel economy .................................... 5-23  
Parking/parking on hills...................................... 5-24  
Electric power steering system............................ 5-25  
Brake system .................................................. 5-26  
Braking precautions...................................... 5-26  
Anti-lock Braking System (ABS) ...................... 5-26  
Vehicle Dynamic Control (VDC) system ................. 5-28  
Cold weather driving......................................... 5-29  
Freeing a frozen door lock.............................. 5-29  
Anti-freeze.................................................. 5-29  
Battery ...................................................... 5-29  
Draining of coolant water ............................... 5-29  
Tire equipment ............................................ 5-30  
Special winter equipment............................... 5-30  
Driving on snow or ice .................................. 5-30  
Engine block heater (if so equipped)................. 5-30  
Ignition switch  
(models without Intelligent Key system) ................... 5-7  
Continuously Variable Transmission (CVT)............ 5-7  
Manual Transmission (MT) ................................ 5-8  
Key positions ................................................ 5-8  
Push-button ignition switch  
(models with Intelligent Key system) ....................... 5-9  
Operating range for engine start function............. 5-9  
Push-button ignition switch operation................ 5-10  
Push-button ignition switch positions ................ 5-10  
Intelligent Key battery discharge ...................... 5-11  
Before starting the engine .................................. 5-12  
Starting the engine ........................................... 5-12  
Models without Intelligent Key system ............... 5-12  
Models with Intelligent Key system ................... 5-13  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
PRECAUTIONS WHEN STARTING  
AND DRIVING  
dangerous. It can cause uncon-  
sciousness or death.  
.
If a special body, camper or other  
equipment is added for recreational  
or other usage, follow the manufac-  
turer’s recommendation to prevent  
carbon monoxide entry into the  
vehicle. (Some recreational vehicle  
appliances such as stoves, refrig-  
erators, heaters, etc. may also gen-  
erate carbon monoxide.)  
WARNING  
.
If you suspect that exhaust fumes  
are entering the vehicle, drive with  
all windows fully open, and have the  
vehicle inspected immediately.  
.
Do not leave children or adults who  
would normally require the support  
of others alone in your vehicle. Pets  
should not be left alone either. They  
could accidentally injure themselves  
or others through inadvertent op-  
eration of the vehicle. Also, on hot,  
.
.
Do not run the engine in closed  
spaces such as a garage.  
Do not park the vehicle with the  
engine running for any extended  
length of time.  
.
The exhaust system and body  
should be inspected by a qualified  
mechanic whenever:  
sunny days, temperatures in  
a
closed vehicle could quickly become  
high enough to cause severe or  
possibly fatal injuries to people or  
animals.  
.
Keep the back door closed while  
driving, otherwise exhaust gases  
could be drawn into the passenger  
compartment. If you must drive with  
the back door open, follow these  
precautions:  
— The vehicle is raised for service.  
— You suspect that exhaust fumes  
are entering into the passenger  
compartment.  
.
Properly secure all cargo with ropes  
or straps to help prevent it from  
sliding or shifting. Do not place  
cargo higher than the seatbacks. In  
a sudden stop or collision, unse-  
cured cargo could cause personal  
injury.  
— You notice a change in the  
sound of the exhaust system.  
1. Open all the windows.  
— You have had an accident invol-  
ving damage to the exhaust  
system, underbody, or rear of  
the vehicle.  
2. Set the  
air recirculation to off  
and the fan control to high to  
circulate the air.  
EXHAUST GAS (carbon monoxide)  
.
If electrical wiring or other cable  
connections must pass to a trailer  
through the seal on the back door or  
the body, follow the manufacturer’s  
recommendation to prevent carbon  
monoxide entry into the vehicle.  
THREE-WAY CATALYST  
WARNING  
The three-way catalyst is an emission control  
device installed in the exhaust system. Exhaust  
gases in the three-way catalyst are burned at  
high temperatures to help reduce pollutants.  
.
Do not breathe exhaust gases; they  
contain colorless and odorless car-  
bon monoxide. Carbon monoxide is  
5-2 Starting and driving  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
possible, and inflate them to the proper pres-  
sure. Driving on a significantly under-inflated tire  
causes the tire to overheat and can lead to tire  
failure. Under-inflation also reduces fuel effi-  
ciency and tire tread life, and may affect the  
vehicle’s handling and stopping ability.  
vehicle inspected promptly by a  
NISSAN dealer.  
WARNING  
.
Avoid driving with an extremely low  
fuel level. Running out of fuel could  
cause the engine to misfire, dama-  
ging the three-way catalyst.  
.
.
The exhaust gas and the exhaust  
system are very hot. Keep people,  
animals or flammable materials  
away from the exhaust system com-  
ponents.  
Please note that the TPMS is not a substitute for  
proper tire maintenance, and it is the driver’s  
responsibility to maintain correct tire pressure,  
even if under-inflation has not reached the level  
to trigger illumination of the TPMS low tire  
pressure telltale.  
.
.
Do not race the engine while warm-  
ing it up.  
Do not stop or park the vehicle over  
flammable materials such as dry  
grass, waste paper or rags. They  
may ignite and cause a fire.  
Do not push or tow your vehicle to  
start the engine.  
TIRE PRESSURE MONITORING SYS-  
TEM (TPMS)  
Your vehicle has also been equipped with a  
TPMS malfunction indicator to indicate when the  
system is not operating properly. The TPMS  
malfunction indicator is combined with the low  
tire pressure telltale. When the system detects a  
malfunction, the telltale will flash for approxi-  
mately one minute and then remain continuously  
illuminated. This sequence will continue upon  
subsequent vehicle start-ups as long as the  
malfunction exists. When the malfunction indi-  
cator is illuminated, the system may not be able  
to detect or signal low tire pressure as intended.  
TPMS malfunctions may occur for a variety of  
reasons, including the installation of replace-  
ment or alternate tires or wheels on the vehicle  
that prevent the TPMS from functioning properly.  
Always check the TPMS malfunction telltale  
after replacing one or more tires or wheels on  
your vehicle to ensure that the replacement or  
CAUTION  
Each tire, including the spare (if provided),  
should be checked monthly when cold and  
inflated to the inflation pressure recommended  
by the vehicle manufacturer on the vehicle  
placard or tire inflation pressure label. (If your  
vehicle has tires of a different size than the size  
indicated on the vehicle placard or tire inflation  
pressure label, you should determine the proper  
tire inflation pressure for those tires.)  
.
.
Do not use leaded gasoline. Depos-  
its from leaded gasoline will ser-  
iously reduce the three-way  
catalyst’s ability to help reduce ex-  
haust pollutants.  
Keep your engine tuned up. Mal-  
functions in the ignition, fuel injec-  
tion, or electrical systems can cause  
overrich fuel flow into the three-way  
catalyst, causing it to overheat. Do  
not keep driving if the engine mis-  
fires, or if noticeable loss of perfor-  
mance or other unusual operating  
conditions are detected. Have the  
As an added safety feature, your vehicle has  
been equipped with a Tire Pressure Monitoring  
System (TPMS) that illuminates a low tire  
pressure telltale when one or more of your tires  
is significantly under-inflated. Accordingly, when  
the low tire pressure telltale illuminates, you  
should stop and check your tires as soon as  
Starting and driving 5-3  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
alternate tires and wheels allow the TPMS to  
continue to function properly.  
sure warning light” in the “2. Instruments and  
controls” section and “TIRE PRESSURE MON-  
ITORING SYSTEM (TPMS)” in the “6. In case of  
emergency” section.  
.
When a spare tire is mounted or a  
wheel is replaced, the TPMS will not  
function and the low tire pressure  
warning light will flash for approxi-  
mately 1 minute. The light will  
remain on after 1 minute. Contact  
your NISSAN dealer as soon as  
possible for tire replacement and/  
or system resetting.  
Additional information  
.
The TPMS does not monitor the tire  
pressure of the spare tire.  
WARNING  
.
The TPMS will activate only when the  
vehicle is driven at speeds above 16 MPH  
(25 km/h). Also, this system may not detect  
a sudden drop in tire pressure (for example a  
flat tire while driving).  
.
If the low tire pressure warning light  
illuminates while driving, avoid sud-  
den steering maneuvers or abrupt  
braking, reduce vehicle speed, pull  
off the road to a safe location and  
stop the vehicle as soon as possi-  
ble. Driving with under-inflated tires  
may permanently damage the tires  
and increase the likelihood of tire  
failure. Serious vehicle damage  
could occur and may lead to an  
accident and could result in serious  
personal injury. Check the tire pres-  
sure for all four tires. Adjust the tire  
pressure to the recommended COLD  
tire pressure shown on the Tire and  
Loading Information label to turn  
the low tire pressure warning light  
OFF. If you have a flat tire, replace it  
with a spare tire as soon as possi-  
ble. (See “FLAT TIRE” in the “6. In  
case of emergency” section for  
changing a flat tire.)  
.
.
Replacing tires with those not ori-  
ginally specified by NISSAN could  
affect the proper operation of the  
TPMS.  
.
.
The low tire pressure warning light does not  
automatically turn off when the tire pressure  
is adjusted. After the tire is inflated to the  
recommended pressure, the vehicle must be  
driven at speeds above 16 MPH (25 km/h)  
to activate the TPMS and turn off the low tire  
pressure warning light. Use a tire pressure  
gauge to check the tire pressure.  
Do not inject any tire liquid or  
aerosol tire sealant into the tires,  
as this may cause a malfunction of  
the tire pressure sensors.  
Tire pressure rises and falls depending on  
the heat caused by the vehicle’s operation  
and the outside temperature. Low outside  
temperature can lower the temperature of  
the air inside the tire which can cause a  
lower tire inflation pressure. This may cause  
the low tire pressure warning light to  
illuminate. If the warning light illuminates in  
low ambient temperature, check the tire  
pressure for all four tires.  
CAUTION  
.
.
The TPMS may not function properly  
when the wheels are equipped with  
tire chains or the wheels are buried  
in snow.  
Do not place metalized film or any  
metal parts (antenna, etc.) on the  
windows. This may cause poor re-  
ception of the signals from the tire  
For additional information, see “Low tire pres-  
5-4 Starting and driving  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
AVOIDING COLLISION AND ROLL-  
OVER  
significantly more likely to be injured or  
killed than a person properly wearing a  
seat belt.  
pressure sensors, and the TPMS will  
not function properly.  
Some devices and transmitters may temporarily  
interfere with the operation of the TPMS and  
cause the low tire pressure warning light to  
illuminate. Some examples are:  
WARNING  
OFF-ROAD RECOVERY  
While driving, the right side or left side wheels  
may unintentionally leave the road surface. If this  
occurs, maintain control of the vehicle by  
following the procedure below. Please note that  
this procedure is only a general guide. The  
vehicle must be driven as appropriate based on  
the conditions of the vehicle, road and traffic.  
Failure to operate this vehicle in a safe  
and prudent manner may result in loss  
of control or an accident.  
.
.
.
Facilities or electric devices using similar  
radio frequencies are near the vehicle.  
Be alert and drive defensively at all times. Obey  
all traffic regulations. Avoid excessive speed,  
high speed cornering, or sudden steering  
maneuvers, because these driving practices  
could cause you to lose control of your vehicle.  
As with any vehicle, a loss of control could  
result in a collision with other vehicles or  
objects, or cause the vehicle to rollover,  
particularly if the loss of control causes the  
vehicle to slide sideways. Be attentive at all  
times, and avoid driving when tired. Never drive  
when under the influence of alcohol or drugs  
(including prescription or over-the-counter  
drugs which may cause drowsiness). Always  
wear your seat belt as outlined in the “SEAT  
BELTS” in the “1. Safety — Seats, seat belts and  
supplemental restraint system” section of this  
manual, and also instruct your passengers to do  
so.  
If a transmitter set to similar frequencies is  
being used in or near the vehicle.  
1. Remain calm and do not overreact.  
2. Do not apply the brakes.  
If a computer (or similar equipment) or a DC/  
AC converter is being used in or near the  
vehicle.  
3. Maintain a firm grip on the steering wheel  
with both hands and try to hold a straight  
course.  
FCC Notice:  
Changes or modifications not expressly  
approved by the party responsible for  
compliance could void the user’s authority  
to operate the equipment.  
4. When appropriate, slowly release the accel-  
erator pedal to gradually slow the vehicle.  
5. If there is nothing in the way, steer the  
vehicle to follow the road while the vehicle  
speed is reduced. Do not attempt to drive  
the vehicle back onto the road surface until  
vehicle speed is reduced.  
This device complies with Part 15 of the  
FCC Rules and RSS-210 of Industry Cana-  
da.  
Operation is subject to the following two  
conditions: (1) This device may not cause  
harmful interference, and (2) this device  
must accept any interference received,  
including interference that may cause un-  
desired operation of the device.  
6. When it is safe to do so, gradually turn the  
steering wheel until both tires return to the  
road surface. When all tires are on the road  
surface, steer the vehicle to stay in the  
Seat belts help reduce the risk of injury in  
collisions and rollovers. In a rollover crash, an  
unbelted or improperly belted person is  
Starting and driving 5-5  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
appropriate driving lane.  
6. Turn on the hazard warning flashers and  
either contact a roadside emergency service  
to change the tire or see “CHANGING A  
FLAT TIRE” in the “6. In case of emergency”  
section of this Owner’s Manual.  
WARNING  
.
If you decide that it is not safe to return  
the vehicle to the road surface based on  
vehicle, road or traffic conditions, gra-  
dually slow the vehicle to a stop in a safe  
place off the road.  
The following actions can increase the  
chance of losing control of the vehicle if  
there is a sudden loss of tire air  
pressure. Losing control of the vehicle  
may cause a collision and result in  
personal injury.  
DRINKING ALCOHOL/DRUGS AND  
DRIVING  
RAPID AIR PRESSURE LOSS  
Rapid air pressure loss or a “blow-out” can  
occur if the tire is punctured or is damaged due  
to hitting a curb or pothole. Rapid air pressure  
loss can also be caused by driving on under-  
inflated tires.  
.
The vehicle generally moves or pulls  
in the direction of the flat tire.  
WARNING  
Never drive under the influence of  
alcohol or drugs. Alcohol in the blood-  
stream reduces coordination, delays  
reaction time and impairs judgement.  
Driving after drinking alcohol increases  
the likelihood of being involved in an  
accident injuring yourself and others.  
Additionally, if you are injured in an  
accident, alcohol can increase the se-  
verity of the injury.  
.
.
Do not rapidly apply the brakes.  
Do not rapidly release the accelera-  
tor pedal.  
Rapid air pressure loss can affect the handling  
and stability of the vehicle, especially at highway  
speeds.  
.
Do not rapidly turn the steering  
wheel.  
Help prevent rapid air pressure loss by main-  
taining the correct air pressure and visually  
inspect the tires for wear and damage. See  
“WHEELS AND TIRES” in the “8. Maintenance  
and do-it-yourself” section of this manual.  
1. Remain calm and do not overreact.  
2. Maintain a firm grip on the steering wheel  
with both hands and try to hold a straight  
course.  
NISSAN is committed to safe driving. However,  
you must choose not to drive under the influence  
of alcohol. Every year thousands of people are  
injured or killed in alcohol-related accidents.  
Although the local laws vary on what is  
considered to be legally intoxicated, the fact is  
that alcohol affects all people differently and  
most people underestimate the effects of  
alcohol.  
If a tire rapidly loses air pressure or “blows-out”  
while driving maintain control of the vehicle by  
following the procedure below. Please note that  
this procedure is only a general guide. The  
vehicle must be driven as appropriate based on  
the conditions of the vehicle, road and traffic.  
3. When appropriate, slowly release the accel-  
erator pedal to gradually slow the vehicle.  
4. Gradually steer the vehicle to a safe location  
off the road and away from traffic if possible.  
5. Lightly apply the brake pedal to gradually  
stop the vehicle.  
5-6 Starting and driving  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
IGNITION SWITCH (models without  
Intelligent Key system)  
Remember, drinking and driving don’t mix! And  
that is true for drugs, too (over-the-counter,  
prescription, and illegal drugs). Don’t drive if  
your ability to operate your vehicle is impaired by  
alcohol, drugs, or some other physical condition.  
WARNING  
Never remove or turn the key to the  
LOCK position while driving. This may  
cause the driver to lose control of the  
vehicle and could result in serious  
vehicle damage or personal injury.  
SSD0392  
CONTINUOUSLY VARIABLE TRANS-  
MISSION (CVT)  
The ignition lock is designed so that the ignition  
switch cannot be turned to the LOCK position  
until the selector lever is moved to the P (Park)  
position.  
.
When turning the ignition switch to the  
LOCK position, make sure that the selector  
lever is in the P (Park) position.  
.
When removing the key from the ignition  
switch, make sure that the selector lever is in  
the P (Park) position.  
Starting and driving 5-7  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
KEY POSITIONS  
LOCK (0)  
The key can only be removed from the ignition  
switch at this position.  
When the ignition switch cannot be turned to  
the LOCK position:  
1. Move the selector lever to the P (Park)  
position.  
2. Turn the ignition switch slightly in the ON  
direction.  
OFF (1)  
The engine is turned off. The power supply is  
turned off.  
3. Turn the ignition switch to the LOCK  
position.  
ACC (2)  
4. Remove the key.  
The electrical accessory power activates without  
the engine turned on.  
If the ignition switch is turned to the LOCK  
position, the selector lever cannot be moved  
from the P (Park) position. The selector lever can  
be moved if the ignition switch is in the ON  
position with the foot brake pedal depressed.  
ON (3)  
SSD0503  
The ignition system and the electrical accessory  
power activate without the engine turned on.  
MANUAL TRANSMISSION (MT)  
The ignition switch includes a device that helps  
prevent accidental removal of the key while  
driving.  
1
There is an OFF position  
between the  
START (4)  
*
LOCK and ACC positions, although it is not  
marked on the ignition switch.  
The engine starter activates and the engine will  
start. The ignition switch, when released, will  
automatically turn to the ON position.  
The key can only be removed when the ignition  
switch is in the LOCK position.  
CAUTION  
To turn the ignition switch to the LOCK position  
from the ACC or ON position, turn the key to the  
OFF position, push the key in, then turn the key  
to the LOCK position.  
As soon as the engine has started,  
release the ignition switch immediately.  
1
There is an OFF position  
in between the  
*
LOCK and ACC positions. The OFF position is  
indicated by a “1” on the key cylinder.  
5-8 Starting and driving  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
PUSH-BUTTON IGNITION SWITCH  
(models with Intelligent Key system)  
.
.
The cargo room area is not included in the  
operating range but the Intelligent Key may  
function.  
WARNING  
Do not operate the push-button ignition  
switch while driving the vehicle except  
in an emergency. (The engine will stop  
when the ignition switch is pushed 3  
consecutive times or the ignition switch  
is pushed and held for more than 2  
seconds.) If the engine stops while the  
vehicle is being driven, this could lead  
to a crash and serious injury.  
If the Intelligent Key is placed on the  
instrument panel, inside the glove box or  
door pocket, the Intelligent Key may not  
function.  
.
If the Intelligent Key is placed near the door  
or window outside the vehicle, the Intelligent  
Key may function.  
Before operating the push-button ignition  
switch, be sure to move the selector lever to  
the P (Park) position.  
SSD0436  
OPERATING RANGE FOR ENGINE  
START FUNCTION  
The Intelligent Key can only be used for starting  
the engine when the Intelligent Key is within the  
1
*
specified operating range  
.
When the Intelligent Key battery is almost  
discharged or strong radio waves are present  
near the operating location, the Intelligent Key  
system’s operating range becomes narrower  
and may not function properly.  
If the Intelligent Key is within the operating  
range, it is possible for anyone, even someone  
who does not carry the Intelligent Key, to push  
the ignition switch to start the engine.  
Starting and driving 5-9  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
illuminates when the ignition switch is in the  
ACC or ON position.  
When the ignition switch cannot be pushed  
toward the LOCK position, proceed as follows:  
The ignition switch is equipped with an anti-theft  
steering lock device.  
1. Move the selector lever into the P (Park)  
position.  
In order for the steering wheel to be locked, it  
must be turned about 1/6 to the right or left from  
the straight up position.  
2. Push the ignition switch to the OFF position.  
3. Open the door. The ignition switch will  
change to the LOCK position.  
To lock the steering wheel, push the  
ignition switch to the OFF position. To  
unlock the steering wheel, push the igni-  
tion switch.  
The selector lever can be moved from the P  
(Park) position if the ignition switch is in  
the ON position and the brake pedal is  
depressed.  
If the ignition switch position does not  
change from LOCK when pushing the  
ignition switch, turn the steering wheel  
right and left, then push the ignition switch  
again.  
SSD0859  
PUSH-BUTTON IGNITION SWITCH  
POSITIONS  
PUSH-BUTTON IGNITION SWITCH  
LOCK (Normal parking position)  
The ignition switch can only be locked in this  
position.  
OPERATION  
When the ignition switch is pushed without  
depressing the brake pedal, the ignition switch  
position will change as follows:  
If the battery of the vehicle is discharged,  
the push-button ignition switch position  
cannot be moved from the LOCK position.  
The ignition switch will be unlocked when it is  
pushed to the ACC position while carrying the  
Intelligent Key.  
.
.
.
.
.
Push center once to change to ACC.  
Push center two times to change to ON.  
Push center three times to change to OFF.  
Push center four times to return to ACC.  
Some indicators and warnings for operation are  
displayed on the meter. (See “WARNING/  
INDICATOR LIGHTS AND AUDIBLE REMIN-  
DERS” in the “2. Instruments and controls”  
section.)  
ACC (Accessories)  
This position activates electrical accessories  
such as the radio, when the engine is not  
running.  
The ignition lock is designed so that the ignition  
switch position cannot be switched to LOCK  
until the selector lever is moved to the P (Park)  
position.  
Open or close any door to return to LOCK  
during the OFF position.  
A
*
The indicator light  
on the ignition switch  
5-10 Starting and driving  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
chime sounds. The engine will start.  
ON (Normal operating position)  
This position turns on the ignition system and  
electrical accessories.  
After step 3 is performed, when the ignition  
switch is pushed without depressing the brake  
pedal, the ignition switch position will change to  
ACC.  
OFF  
The engine can be turned off without locking the  
steering wheel.  
NOTE:  
.
When the ignition switch is pushed to  
the ACC or ON position or the engine is  
started by the above procedures, the  
Intelligent Key system warning light  
may blink in yellow even if the Intelli-  
gent Key is inside the vehicle. This is  
not a malfunction. To stop the warning  
light from blinking, touch the ignition  
switch with the Intelligent Key again.  
The ignition lock is designed so that the ignition  
switch cannot be switched to the LOCK position  
until the selector lever is moved to the P (Park)  
position.  
CAUTION  
SSD0860  
Do not leave the vehicle with the push-  
button ignition switch in ACC or ON  
position when the engine is not running  
for an extended period. This can dis-  
charge the battery.  
INTELLIGENT KEY BATTERY DIS-  
CHARGE  
.
If the Intelligent Key system warning  
light in the meter is blinking in green,  
replace the battery as soon as possible.  
(See “KEY BATTERY REPLACEMENT”  
in the “8. Maintenance and do-it-your-  
self” section.)  
If the battery of the Intelligent Key is discharged,  
or environmental conditions interfere with the  
Intelligent Key operation, start the engine  
according to the following procedure:  
1. Move the selector lever to the P (Park)  
position.  
2. Firmly apply the foot brake.  
3. Touch the ignition switch with the Intelligent  
Key as illustrated. (A chime will sound.)  
4. Push the ignition switch while depressing  
the brake pedal within 10 seconds after the  
Starting and driving 5-11  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
BEFORE STARTING THE ENGINE  
STARTING THE ENGINE  
.
.
Make sure the area around the vehicle is  
clear.  
starts.  
MODELS WITHOUT INTELLIGENT KEY  
SYSTEM  
.
If the engine is very hard to start  
because it is flooded, depress the  
accelerator pedal all the way to the floor  
and hold it. Crank the engine for 5 - 6  
seconds. After cranking the engine,  
release the accelerator pedal. Crank  
the engine with your foot off the  
accelerator pedal by turning the igni-  
tion switch to START. Release the  
ignition switch when the engine starts.  
If the engine starts, but fails to run,  
repeat the above procedure.  
Check fluid levels such as engine oil, cool-  
ant, brake fluid, and window washer fluid as  
frequently as possible, or at least whenever  
you refuel.  
1. Apply the parking brake.  
2. Continuously Variable Transmission  
(CVT) models:  
Move the selector lever to the P (Park) or N  
(Neutral) position. (P is recommended.)  
.
.
Check that all windows and lights are clean.  
Visually inspect tires for their appearance  
and condition. Also check tires for proper  
inflation.  
The starter is designed so that it does not  
operate unless the selector lever is in either  
of the above positions.  
.
.
.
.
Lock all doors.  
Manual Transmission (MT) models:  
Position seat and adjust head restraints.  
Adjust inside and outside mirrors.  
Move the shift lever to the N (Neutral)  
position. Depress the clutch pedal fully to  
the floor.  
CAUTION  
Do not operate the starter for more  
than 15 seconds at a time. If the engine  
does not start, turn the ignition switch  
off and wait 10 seconds before cranking  
again, otherwise the starter could be  
damaged.  
Fasten seat belts and ask all passengers to  
do likewise.  
The starter is designed not to operate unless  
the clutch pedal is fully depressed.  
.
Check the operation of warning lights when  
the ignition switch is placed in the ON  
position. (See “WARNING/INDICATOR  
LIGHTS AND AUDIBLE REMINDERS” in  
the “2. Instruments and controls” section.)  
3. Crank the engine with your foot off the  
accelerator pedal by turning the ignition  
switch to START. Release the switch when  
the engine starts. If the engine starts, but  
fails to run, repeat the above procedure.  
4. Warm-up  
Allow the engine to idle for at least 30  
seconds after starting. Do not race the  
engine while warming it up. Drive at  
moderate speed for a short distance first,  
especially in cold weather. In cold weather,  
keep the engine running for a minimum of 2 -  
.
If the engine is very hard to start in  
extremely cold weather or when restart-  
ing, depress the accelerator pedal a little  
(approximately 1/3 to the floor) and hold  
it and then crank the engine. Release the  
accelerator pedal when the engine  
5-12 Starting and driving  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
3 minutes before shutting it off. Starting and  
stopping the engine over a short period of  
time may make the vehicle more difficult to  
start.  
extremely cold weather or when restart-  
ing, depress the accelerator pedal a little  
(approximately 1/3 to the floor) and  
while holding, crank the engine. Release  
the accelerator pedal when the engine  
starts.  
4. Warm-up  
Allow the engine to idle for at least 30  
seconds after starting. Do not race the  
engine while warming it up. Drive at  
moderate speed for a short distance first,  
especially in cold weather. In cold weather,  
keep the engine running for a minimum of 2 -  
3 minutes before shutting it off. Starting and  
stopping the engine over a short period of  
time may make the vehicle more difficult to  
start.  
5. To stop the engine, move the selector lever  
to the P (Park) position (CVT model) or move  
the shift lever to the N (Neutral) position (MT  
model), and turn the ignition switch to the  
OFF position.  
.
If the engine is very hard to start  
because it is flooded, depress the  
accelerator pedal all the way to the floor  
and hold it. Push the ignition switch to  
the ON position to start cranking the  
engine. After 5 or 6 seconds, stop  
cranking by pushing the ignition switch  
to OFF. After cranking the engine,  
release the accelerator pedal. Crank  
the engine with your foot off the  
accelerator pedal by depressing the  
brake pedal and pushing the push-  
button ignition switch to start the engine.  
If the engine starts, but fails to run,  
repeat the above procedure.  
MODELS WITH INTELLIGENT KEY  
SYSTEM  
When racing the engine up to 4,000 rpm or  
more under no load condition, the engine  
will enter the fuel cut mode.  
1. Apply the parking brake.  
2. Move the selector lever to the P (Park) or N  
(Neutral) position. (P is recommended.)  
5. To stop the engine, move the selector lever  
to the P (Park) position, and push the  
ignition switch to the OFF position.  
The starter is designed not to operate unless  
the selector lever is in either of the above  
positions.  
The Intelligent Key must be carried  
when operating the ignition switch.  
CAUTION  
3. Push the ignition switch to the ON position.  
Depress the brake pedal and push the  
ignition switch to start the engine.  
Do not operate the starter for more  
than 15 seconds at a time. If the engine  
does not start, push the ignition switch  
to OFF and wait 10 seconds before  
cranking again, otherwise the starter  
could be damaged.  
To start the engine immediately, push and  
release the ignition switch while depressing  
the brake pedal with the ignition switch in  
any position.  
.
If the engine is very hard to start in  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Starting and driving 5-13  
 
DRIVING THE VEHICLE  
2. Keep the foot brake pedal depressed, push  
the selector lever button and move the  
selector lever to a driving position.  
CONTINUOUSLY VARIABLE TRANS-  
MISSION (CVT)  
CAUTION  
The Continuously Variable Transmission (CVT)  
in your vehicle is electronically controlled to  
produce maximum power and smooth operation.  
.
.
When stopping the vehicle on an  
uphill grade, do not hold the vehicle  
by depressing the accelerator pedal.  
The foot brake should be used for  
this purpose.  
3. Release the parking brake and foot brake  
pedal, and then gradually start the vehicle in  
motion.  
The recommended operating procedures for this  
transmission are shown on the following pages.  
Follow these procedures for maximum vehicle  
performance and driving enjoyment.  
WARNING  
Do not downshift abruptly on slip-  
pery roads. This may cause a loss of  
control.  
.
Do not depress the accelerator  
pedal while shifting from P (Park)  
or N (Neutral) to R (Reverse), D  
(Drive) or L (Low). Always depress  
the brake pedal until shifting is  
completed. Failure to do so could  
cause you to lose control and have  
an accident.  
Engine power may be automatically re-  
duced to protect the CVT if the engine  
speed increases quickly when driving on  
slippery roads or while being tested on  
some dynamometers.  
Starting the vehicle  
1. After starting the engine, fully depress the  
foot brake pedal before moving the selector  
lever out of the P (Park) position.  
.
.
Cold engine idle speed is high, so  
use caution when shifting into a  
forward or reverse gear before the  
engine has warmed up.  
This CVT is designed so that the foot  
brake pedal must be depressed before  
shifting from P (Park) to any driving  
position while the ignition switch is in  
the ON position.  
Never shift to P (Park) or R (Re-  
verse) while vehicle is moving. Fail-  
ure to do so could cause you to lose  
control and have an accident.  
The selector lever cannot be moved out  
of the P (Park) position and into any of  
the other positions if the ignition  
switch is placed in the LOCK, OFF or  
ACC position or if the key is removed.  
5-14 Starting and driving  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
position.  
WARNING  
CAUTION  
Apply the parking brake if the selector  
lever is in any position while the engine  
is not running. Failure to do so could  
cause the vehicle to move unexpectedly  
or roll away and result in serious  
personal injury or property damage.  
To prevent transmission damage, move  
the selector lever to the P (Park) or R  
(Reverse) position only when the vehi-  
cle is completely stopped.  
P (Park):  
If the ignition switch is placed in the OFF or  
ACC position for any reason while the selector  
lever is in any positions other than the P (Park),  
the ignition switch cannot be placed in the  
LOCK position.  
Use this selector position when the vehicle is  
parked or when starting the engine. Make sure  
the vehicle is completely stopped. The brake  
pedal must be depressed and the selector  
lever button pushed in to move the selec-  
tor lever from N (Neutral) or any drive  
position to P (Park). Apply the parking brake.  
When parking on a hill, apply the parking brake  
first, then move the selector lever to the P (Park)  
position.  
SSD0862  
If the ignition switch cannot be placed in the  
LOCK position, perform the following steps:  
Shifting  
To move the selector lever,  
1. Apply the parking brake when the vehicle is  
stopped.  
A
*
:
Push the button  
the brake pedal.  
while depressing  
2. Place the ignition switch in the ON position  
while depressing the foot brake pedal.  
A
:
:
Push the button  
.
*
R (Reverse):  
Just move the selector lever.  
3. Move the selector lever to the P (Park)  
position.  
Use this position to back up. Make sure the  
vehicle is completely stopped before selecting  
the R (Reverse) position. The brake pedal  
must be depressed and the selector lever  
button pushed in to move the selector  
lever from P (Park), N (Neutral) or any  
driving position to R (Reverse).  
After starting the engine, fully depress the brake  
pedal, push the selector lever button and move  
the selector lever from the P (Park) position to  
any of the desired shift positions.  
4. Models with Intelligent Key system:  
Place the ignition switch in the OFF position.  
Models without Intelligent Key system:  
Place the ignition switch in the LOCK  
Starting and driving 5-15  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
N (Neutral):  
Accelerator downshift  
— In D position —  
For passing or hill climbing, fully depress the  
accelerator pedal to the floor. This shifts the  
transmission down into a lower gear, depending  
on the vehicle speed.  
Neither forward nor reverse gear is engaged.  
The engine can be started in this position. You  
may shift to N (Neutral) and restart a stalled  
engine while the vehicle is moving.  
D (Drive):  
High fluid temperature protection mode  
Use this position for all normal forward driving.  
This transmission has a high fluid temperature  
protection mode. If the fluid temperature be-  
comes too high (for example, when climbing  
steep grades in high temperature with heavy  
loads), engine power and, under some condi-  
tions, vehicle speed will be decreased auto-  
matically to reduce the chance of transmission  
damage. Vehicle speed can be controlled with  
the accelerator pedal, but the engine and vehicle  
speed may be limited.  
L (Low):  
Use this position for maximum engine braking on  
steep downhill gradients/climbing steep slopes  
and whenever approaching sharp bends. Do not  
use the L (Low) position in any other circum-  
stances.  
SSD0863  
Overdrive (O/D) OFF switch (if so  
equipped)  
When the O/D OFF switch is pushed with the  
selector lever in the D (Drive) position, the  
indicator light in the instrument panel illuminates.  
Fail-safe  
If the vehicle is driven under extreme  
conditions, such as excessive wheel spin-  
ning and subsequent hard braking, the  
fail-safe system may be activated. The MIL  
may illuminate to indicate the fail-safe  
mode is activated. (See “Malfunction In-  
dicator Light (MIL)” in the “2. Instruments  
and controls” section.) This will occur even  
if all electrical circuits are functioning  
properly. In this case, place the ignition  
switch in the OFF position and wait for 10  
seconds. Then turn the switch back to the  
Use the overdrive off mode when you need  
improved engine braking.  
To turn off the overdrive off mode, push the O/D  
OFF switch again. The  
turn off.  
indicator light will  
Each time the engine is started, or when the  
selector lever is shifted to any position other  
than the D (Drive) position, the overdrive off  
mode will be automatically turned off.  
5-16 Starting and driving  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
ON position. The vehicle should return to  
its normal operating condition. If it does  
not return to its normal operating condi-  
tion, have a NISSAN dealer check the  
transmission and repair if necessary.  
2. Apply the parking brake.  
A
*
3. Remove the shift lock release cover  
using a suitable tool.  
4. Push down the shift lock release using a  
suitable tool.  
WARNING  
5. Push the selector lever button and move the  
selector lever to the N (Neutral) position  
while holding down the shift lock release.  
When the high fluid temperature pro-  
tection mode or fail-safe operation  
occurs, vehicle speed may be gradually  
reduced. The reduced speed may be  
lower than other traffic, which could  
increase the chance of a collision. Be  
especially careful when driving. If ne-  
cessary, pull to the side of the road at a  
safe place and allow the transmission  
to return to normal operation, or have it  
repaired if necessary.  
Place the ignition switch in the ON position to  
unlock the steering wheel (if so equipped). The  
vehicle may be moved to the desired location.  
Replace the removed shift lock release cover  
after the operation.  
SSD0864  
Shift lock release  
For models with Intelligent Key system: If the  
battery is discharged completely, the steering  
wheel cannot be unlocked. Do not move the  
vehicle with the steering wheel locked.  
If the battery charge is low or discharged, the  
selector lever may not be moved from the P  
(Park) position even with the brake pedal  
depressed and the selector lever button pushed.  
If the selector lever cannot be moved out of the  
P (Park) position, have a NISSAN dealer check  
the CVT system as soon as possible.  
To move the selector lever, perform the following  
procedure:  
1. Models with Intelligent Key system:  
WARNING  
Place the ignition switch in the OFF or  
LOCK position.  
If the selector lever cannot be moved  
from the P (Park) position while the  
engine is running and the brake pedal  
is depressed, the stop lights may not  
Models without Intelligent Key system:  
Place the ignition switch in the LOCK  
position, and remove the key if it is inserted.  
Starting and driving 5-17  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
work. Malfunctioning stop lights could  
cause an accident injuring yourself and  
others.  
light, shift to N (Neutral) and release  
the clutch pedal with the foot brake  
applied.  
MANUAL TRANSMISSION (MT)  
WARNING  
.
.
Do not downshift abruptly on slip-  
pery roads. This may cause a loss of  
control.  
Do not over-rev the engine when  
shifting to a lower gear. This may  
cause a loss of control or engine  
damage.  
SSD0552  
Shifting  
To change gears, or when upshifting or down-  
shifting, fully depress the clutch pedal, shift into  
the appropriate gear, then slowly and smoothly  
release the clutch pedal.  
CAUTION  
.
.
Do not rest your foot on the clutch  
pedal while driving. This may da-  
mage the clutch.  
Start the vehicle in 1st gear and shift to 2nd,  
3rd, 4th, 5th and 6th gear in sequence accord-  
ing to vehicle speed.  
Fully depress the clutch pedal be-  
fore shifting to help prevent trans-  
mission damage.  
1
To back up, pull the shift lever ring  
upward  
*
and then move it to the R (Reverse) gear after  
stopping the vehicle completely.  
.
.
Stop your vehicle completely before  
shifting into R (Reverse).  
The shift lever ring returns to its original position  
when the shift lever is moved to the N (Neutral)  
position.  
When the vehicle is stopped for a  
period of time, for example at a stop  
5-18 Starting and driving  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
If it is difficult to move the shift lever into the R  
(Reverse) or 1st gear, shift to the N (Neutral)  
position, and then release the clutch pedal once.  
Fully depress the clutch pedal again and shift  
into the R (Reverse) or 1st gear.  
For normal acceleration in high altitude areas  
[over 4,000 ft (1,219 m)]:  
Suggested maximum speed in each gear  
Downshift to a lower gear if the engine is not  
running smoothly, or if you need to accelerate.  
Gear change  
1st to 2nd  
2nd to 3rd  
3rd to 4th  
4th to 5th  
5th to 6th  
MPH (km/h)  
15 (24)  
25 (40)  
40 (64)  
45 (72)  
51 (82)  
Do not exceed the maximum suggested speed  
(shown below) in any gear. For level road  
driving, use the highest gear suggested for that  
speed. Always observe posted speed limits, and  
drive according to the road conditions, which  
will ensure safe operation. Do not over-rev the  
engine when shifting to a lower gear as it may  
cause engine damage or loss of vehicle control.  
Suggested upshift speeds  
The following are suggested vehicle speeds for  
shifting into a higher gear. These suggestions  
relate to fuel economy and vehicle performance.  
Actual upshift speeds will vary according to road  
conditions, the weather and individual driving  
habits.  
Gear  
1st  
MPH (km/h)  
28 (46)  
50 (82)  
73 (119)  
—
For normal acceleration in low altitude areas  
[less than 4,000 ft (1,219 m)]:  
2nd  
3rd  
4th  
Gear change  
1st to 2nd  
2nd to 3rd  
3rd to 4th  
4th to 5th  
5th to 6th  
MPH (km/h)  
8 (13)  
17 (27)  
25 (40)  
36 (58)  
51 (82)  
5th  
—
6th  
—
Starting and driving 5-19  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
PARKING BRAKE  
CRUISE CONTROL (if so equipped)  
PRECAUTIONS ON CRUISE CON-  
TROL  
WARNING  
.
If the cruise control system malfunctions, it  
will cancel automatically. The CRUISE in-  
dicator light on the meter panel will then  
blink to warn the driver.  
.
Be sure the parking brake is fully  
released before driving. Failure to  
do so can cause brake failure and  
lead to an accident.  
.
.
.
If the engine coolant temperature becomes  
excessively high, the cruise control system  
will cancel automatically.  
.
.
Do not release the parking brake  
from outside the vehicle.  
Do not use the gear shift in place of  
the parking brake. When parking, be  
sure the parking brake is fully  
engaged.  
If the CRUISE indicator light blinks, turn the  
cruise control MAIN switch off and have the  
system checked by a NISSAN dealer.  
SPA2110  
The CRUISE indicator light may blink when  
the cruise control MAIN switch is turned ON  
while pushing the RESUME/ACCELERATE,  
SET/COAST or CANCEL switch. To prop-  
erly set the cruise control system, perform  
the following procedures.  
.
Do not leave children unattended in  
a vehicle. They could release the  
parking brake and cause an acci-  
dent.  
1
To apply: Pull the parking brake lever up  
To release:  
.
*
1. Firmly apply the foot brake.  
2. While pulling up on the parking brake lever  
2
slightly, push the button  
and lower the  
*
WARNING  
3
*
lever completely  
.
Do not use the cruise control when  
driving under the following conditions:  
3. Before driving, be sure the brake warning  
light goes out.  
.
.
.
when it is not possible to keep the  
vehicle at a set speed  
in heavy traffic or in traffic that  
varies in speed  
on winding or hilly roads  
5-20 Starting and driving  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
switch and release it. Take your foot off the  
accelerator pedal. Your vehicle will maintain the  
set speed.  
.
.
on slippery roads (rain, snow, ice,  
etc.)  
in very windy areas  
.
To pass another vehicle, depress the  
accelerator pedal. When you release the  
pedal, the vehicle will return to the previously  
set speed.  
Doing so could cause a loss of vehicle  
control and result in an accident.  
CAUTION  
.
The vehicle may not maintain the set speed  
on winding or hilly roads. If this happens,  
drive without the cruise control.  
On Manual Transmission (MT) models,  
do not shift into N (Neutral) without  
depressing the clutch pedal when the  
cruise control is set. Should this occur,  
depress the clutch pedal and turn the  
MAIN switch off immediately. Failure to  
do so may cause engine damage.  
To cancel the preset speed, use one of the  
following methods:  
SSD0861  
a) Push the CANCEL switch.  
b) Tap the brake pedal.  
1. RESUME/ACCELERATE switch  
2. SET/COAST switch  
c) Turn the MAIN switch off. The CRUISE  
indicator light will turn off.  
3. CANCEL switch  
4. MAIN (ON·OFF) switch  
.
If you depress the brake pedal while pushing  
the RESUME/ACCELERATE or SET/  
COAST switch and reset at the cruising  
speed, the cruise control will disengage.  
Turn the MAIN switch off once and then turn  
it on again.  
CRUISE CONTROL OPERATIONS  
The cruise control allows driving at a speed  
between 25 to 89 MPH (40 to 144 km/h)  
without keeping your foot on the accelerator  
pedal.  
To turn on the cruise control, push the MAIN  
switch on. The CRUISE indicator light will  
illuminate.  
.
.
The cruise control will automatically cancel if  
the vehicle slows more than 8 MPH (12  
km/h) below the set speed.  
To set cruising speed, accelerate the vehicle  
to the desired speed, push the SET/COAST  
If you move the selector lever to the N  
(Neutral) position (Continuously Variable  
Starting and driving 5-21  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
BREAK-IN SCHEDULE  
Transmission models) or depressing the  
clutch pedal (Manual Transmission models),  
the cruise control will be canceled.  
To resume the preset speed, push and  
release the RESUME/ACCELERATE switch.  
The vehicle will resume the last set cruising  
speed when the vehicle speed is over 25 MPH  
(40 km/h).  
CAUTION  
During the first 1,200 miles (2,000 km),  
follow these recommendations to ob-  
tain maximum engine performance and  
ensure the future reliability and econo-  
my of your new vehicle. Failure to  
follow these recommendations may  
result in shortened engine life and  
reduced engine performance.  
To reset at a faster cruising speed, use one  
of the following methods:  
.
.
.
Depress the accelerator pedal. When the  
vehicle attains the desired speed, push and  
release the SET/COAST switch.  
Push and hold the RESUME/ACCELERATE  
switch. When the vehicle attains the desired  
speed, release the switch.  
.
Avoid driving for long periods at constant  
speed, either fast or slow. Do not run the  
engine over 4,000 rpm.  
Push, then quickly release the RESUME/  
ACCELERATE switch. Each time you do  
this, the set speed will increase by about 1  
MPH (1.6 km/h).  
.
.
.
Do not accelerate at full throttle in any gear.  
Avoid quick starts.  
To reset at a slower cruising speed, use one  
of the following methods:  
Avoid hard braking as much as possible.  
.
.
.
Lightly tap the brake pedal. When the  
vehicle attains the desired speed, push the  
SET/COAST switch and release it.  
Push and hold the SET/COAST switch.  
Release the switch when the vehicle slows  
down to the desired speed.  
Push, then quickly release the SET/COAST  
switch. Each time you do this, the set speed  
will decrease by about 1 MPH (1.6 km/h).  
5-22 Starting and driving  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
INCREASING FUEL ECONOMY  
.
Accelerate slowly and smoothly. Maintain  
cruising speeds with a constant accelerator  
position.  
.
Use the recommended viscosity engine oil.  
(See “ENGINE OIL AND OIL FILTER  
RECOMMENDATION” in the “9. Technical  
and consumer information” section.)  
.
.
.
Drive at moderate speeds on the highway.  
Driving at high speed lowers fuel economy.  
Avoid unnecessary stopping and braking.  
Keep a safe distance behind other vehicles.  
Select a gear range suitable to road condi-  
tions.  
.
.
.
Avoid unnecessary engine idling.  
Keep your engine tuned up.  
Follow the recommended periodic mainte-  
nance schedule.  
.
.
.
.
Keep the tires inflated to the correct  
pressure. Low tire pressure increases tire  
wear and lowers fuel economy.  
Keep the wheels in correct alignment.  
Improper alignment increases tire wear and  
lowers fuel economy.  
Air conditioner operation lowers fuel econ-  
omy. Use the air conditioner only when  
necessary.  
When cruising at highway speeds, it is more  
economical to use the air conditioner and  
leave the windows closed to reduce drag.  
Starting and driving 5-23  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
PARKING/PARKING ON HILLS  
can go and cannot be moved with-  
out depressing the foot brake pedal.  
1. Firmly apply the parking brake.  
2. Continuously Variable Transmission  
(CVT) models:  
Move the selector lever to the P (Park)  
position.  
Manual Transmission (MT) models:  
Move the shift lever to the R (Reverse) gear.  
When parking on an uphill grade, place the  
shift lever in the 1st gear.  
SSD0488  
3. To help prevent the vehicle from rolling into  
the street when parked on a sloping drive  
way, it is a good practice to turn the wheels  
as illustrated.  
dents.  
WARNING  
.
Safe parking procedures require  
that both the parking brake be  
applied and the transmission placed  
into P (Park) for Continuously Vari-  
able Transmission (CVT) model or in  
an appropriate gear for Manual  
Transmission (MT) model. Failure  
to do so could cause the vehicle to  
move unexpectedly or roll away and  
result in an accident.  
.
Do not stop or park the vehicle over  
flammable materials such as dry  
grass, waste paper or rags. They  
may ignite and cause a fire.  
1
*
.
HEADED DOWNHILL WITH CURB:  
Turn the wheels into the curb and move the  
vehicle forward until the curb side wheel  
gently touches the curb.  
.
.
Never leave the engine running  
while the vehicle is unattended.  
2
*
.
HEADED UPHILL WITH CURB:  
Do not leave children unattended  
inside the vehicle. They could un-  
knowingly activate switches or con-  
trols. Unattended children could  
become involved in serious acci-  
Turn the wheels away from the curb and  
move the vehicle back until the curb side  
wheel gently touches the curb.  
.
Make sure the continuously variable  
transmission selector lever has  
been pushed as far forward as it  
.
HEADED UPHILL OR DOWNHILL, NO  
3
CURB:  
*
5-24 Starting and driving  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
ELECTRIC POWER STEERING  
SYSTEM  
Turn the wheels toward the side of the road  
so the vehicle will move away from the  
center of the road if it moves.  
You may hear a fricative sound when the  
steering wheel is operated quickly. However,  
this is not a malfunction.  
WARNING  
.
.
If the engine is not running or is  
turned off while driving, the power  
assist for the steering will not work.  
Steering will be harder to operate.  
4. Models with Intelligent Key system:  
Place the ignition switch in the OFF position.  
Models without Intelligent Key system:  
If the electric power steering warning light  
illuminates while the engine is running, it may  
indicate the electric power steering system is  
not functioning properly and may need servicing.  
Have the electric power steering system  
checked by a NISSAN dealer. (See “Electric  
power steering warning light” in the “2. Instru-  
ments and controls” section.)  
When the electric power steering  
warning light illuminates with the  
engine running, the power assist for  
the steering will cease operation.  
You will still have control of the  
vehicle but the steering will be  
harder to operate.  
Place the ignition switch in the LOCK  
position and remove the key.  
When the electric power steering warning light  
illuminates with the engine running, the power  
assist for the steering will cease operation. You  
will still have control of the vehicle. However,  
greater steering effort is needed, especially in  
sharp turns and at low speeds.  
The electric power steering system is designed  
to provide power assist while driving to operate  
the steering wheel with light force.  
When the steering wheel is operated repeatedly  
or continuously while parking or driving at a very  
low speed, the power assist for the steering  
wheel will be reduced. This is to prevent  
overheating of the electric power steering  
system and protect it from getting damaged.  
While the power assist is reduced, steering  
wheel operation will become heavy. When the  
temperature of the electric power steering  
system goes down, the power assist level will  
return to normal. Avoid repeating such steering  
wheel operations that could cause the electric  
power steering system to overheat.  
Starting and driving 5-25  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
BRAKE SYSTEM  
ANTI-LOCK BRAKING SYSTEM (ABS)  
BRAKING PRECAUTIONS  
WARNING  
The brake system has two separate hydraulic  
circuits. If one circuit malfunctions, you will still  
have braking at two wheels.  
WARNING  
.
.
While driving on a slippery surface,  
be careful when braking, accelerat-  
ing or downshifting. Abrupt braking  
or accelerating could cause the  
wheels to skid and result in an  
accident.  
.
The Anti-lock Braking System (ABS)  
is a sophisticated device, but it  
cannot prevent accidents resulting  
from careless or dangerous driving  
techniques. It can help maintain  
vehicle control during braking on  
slippery surfaces. Remember that  
stopping distances on slippery sur-  
faces will be longer than on normal  
surfaces even with ABS. Stopping  
distances may also be longer on  
rough, gravel or snow covered  
roads, or if you are using tire chains.  
Always maintain a safe distance  
from the vehicle in front of you.  
Ultimately, the driver is responsible  
for safety.  
You may feel a small click and hear a sound  
when the brake pedal is fully depressed slowly.  
This is not a malfunction and indicates that the  
brake assist mechanism is operating properly.  
If the engine is not running or is  
turned off while driving, the power  
assist for the brakes will not work.  
Braking will be harder.  
Vacuum assisted brakes  
The brake booster aids braking by using engine  
vacuum. If the engine stops, you can stop the  
vehicle by depressing the brake pedal. However,  
greater foot pressure on the brake pedal will be  
required to stop the vehicle and the stopping  
distance will be longer.  
Wet brakes  
When the vehicle is washed or driven through  
water, the brakes may get wet. As a result, your  
braking distance will be longer and the vehicle  
may pull to one side during braking.  
Using the brakes  
Avoid resting your foot on the brake pedal while  
driving. This will cause overheating of the  
brakes, wearing out the brake pads and shoes  
faster and reduce gas mileage.  
To dry brakes, drive the vehicle at a safe speed  
while lightly tapping the brake pedal to heat-up  
the brakes. Do this until the brakes return to  
normal. Avoid driving the vehicle at high speeds  
until the brakes function correctly.  
.
Tire type and condition may also  
affect braking effectiveness.  
To help reduce brake wear and to prevent the  
brakes from overheating, reduce speed and  
downshift to a lower gear before going down a  
slope or long grade. Overheated brakes may  
reduce braking performance and could result in  
loss of vehicle control.  
— When replacing tires, install the  
specified size of tires on all four  
wheels.  
— When installing a spare tire,  
make sure that it is the proper  
size and type as specified on the  
5-26 Starting and driving  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
applies and releases hydraulic pressure. This  
action is similar to pumping the brakes very  
quickly. You may feel a pulsation in the brake  
pedal and hear a noise from under the hood or  
feel a vibration from the actuator when it is  
operating. This is normal and indicates that the  
ABS is operating properly. However, the pulsa-  
tion may indicate that road conditions are  
hazardous and extra care is required while  
driving.  
Tire and Loading Information  
label. See “TIRE AND LOADING  
INFORMATION LABEL” in the “9.  
Technical and consumer infor-  
mation” section of this manual.  
WARNING  
Do not pump the brake pedal. Doing so  
may result in increased stopping dis-  
tances.  
— For detailed information, see  
“WHEELS AND TIRES” in the  
“8. Maintenance and do-it-your-  
self” section of this manual.  
Self-test feature  
The ABS includes electronic sensors, electric  
pumps, hydraulic solenoids and a computer. The  
computer has a built-in diagnostic feature that  
tests the system each time you start the engine  
and move the vehicle at a low speed in forward  
or reverse. When the self-test occurs, you may  
hear a “clunk” noise and/or feel a pulsation in the  
brake pedal. This is normal and does not  
indicate a malfunction. If the computer senses  
a malfunction, it switches the ABS off and  
illuminates the ABS warning light on the  
instrument panel. The brake system then oper-  
ates normally, but without anti-lock assistance.  
The Anti-lock Braking System (ABS) controls  
the brakes so the wheels do not lock during hard  
braking or when braking on slippery surfaces.  
The system detects the rotation speed at each  
wheel and varies the brake fluid pressure to  
prevent each wheel from locking and sliding. By  
preventing each wheel from locking, the system  
helps the driver maintain steering control and  
helps to minimize swerving and spinning on  
slippery surfaces.  
Using the system  
If the ABS warning light illuminates during the  
self-test or while driving, have the vehicle  
checked by a NISSAN dealer.  
Depress the brake pedal and hold it down.  
Depress the brake pedal with firm steady  
pressure, but do not pump the brakes. The  
ABS will operate to prevent the wheels from  
locking up. Steer the vehicle to avoid obstacles.  
Normal operation  
The ABS operates at speeds above 3 to 6 MPH  
(5 to 10 km/h). The speed varies according to  
road conditions.  
When the ABS senses that one or more wheels  
are close to locking up, the actuator rapidly  
Starting and driving 5-27  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
VEHICLE DYNAMIC CONTROL (VDC)  
SYSTEM  
The Vehicle Dynamic Control (VDC) system  
uses various sensors to monitor driver inputs  
and vehicle motion. Under certain driving con-  
ditions, the VDC system helps to perform the  
following functions.  
determine some action is required to help  
keep the vehicle on the steered path.  
that tests the system each time you start the  
engine and move the vehicle forward or in  
reverse at a slow speed. When the self-test  
occurs, you may hear a “clunk” noise and/or feel  
a pulsation in the brake pedal. This is normal and  
is not an indication of a malfunction.  
.
.
You may feel a pulsation in the brake pedal  
and hear a noise or vibration from under the  
hood. This is normal and indicates that the  
VDC system is working properly.  
.
Controls brake pressure to reduce wheel  
slip on one slipping drive wheel so power is  
transferred to a non slipping drive wheel on  
the same axle.  
Adjust your speed and driving to the road  
conditions.  
WARNING  
.
The VDC system is designed to help  
the driver maintain stability but  
does not prevent accidents due to  
abrupt steering operation at high  
speeds or by careless or dangerous  
driving techniques. Reduce vehicle  
speed and be especially careful  
when driving and cornering on slip-  
pery surfaces and always drive care-  
fully.  
See “Slip indicator light” in the “2. Instruments  
and controls” section and “Vehicle Dynamic  
Control (VDC) off indicator light” in the “2.  
Instruments and controls” section.  
.
.
Controls brake pressure and engine output  
to reduce drive wheel slip based on vehicle  
speed (traction control function).  
Controls brake pressure at individual wheels  
and engine output to help the driver maintain  
control of the vehicle in the following  
conditions:  
If a malfunction occurs in the system, the  
and  
indicator lights come on in the  
instrument panel. The VDC system automatically  
turns off when these indicator lights are on.  
— understeer (vehicle tends to not follow the  
steered path despite increased steering  
input)  
The VDC OFF switch is used to turn off the VDC  
system. The VDC off indicator illuminates to  
indicate the VDC system is off. When the VDC  
switch is used to turn off the system, the VDC  
system still operates to prevent one drive wheel  
from slipping by transferring power to a non  
.
Do not modify the vehicle’s suspen-  
sion. If suspension parts such as  
shock absorbers, struts, springs,  
stabilizer bars, bushings and  
wheels are not NISSAN recom-  
mended for your vehicle or are  
extremely deteriorated the VDC sys-  
tem may not operate properly. This  
could adversely affect vehicle hand-  
— oversteer (vehicle tends to spin due to  
certain road or driving conditions).  
The VDC system can help the driver to maintain  
control of the vehicle, but it cannot prevent loss  
of vehicle control in all driving situations.  
slipping drive wheel. The  
if this occurs. All other VDC functions are off and  
the indicator will not flash. The VDC  
indicator flashes  
System is automatically reset to on when the  
ignition switch is placed in the off position then  
back to the on position.  
When the VDC system operates, the  
indicator in the instrument panel flashes so note  
the following:  
ling performance, and the  
dicator may flash or both  
in-  
and  
The computer has a built-in diagnostic feature  
.
The road may be slippery or the system may  
5-28 Starting and driving  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
COLD WEATHER DRIVING  
FREEING A FROZEN DOOR LOCK  
indicator lights may illuminate.  
surface.  
.
If brake related parts such as brake  
pads, rotors and calipers are not  
NISSAN recommended or are extre-  
mely deteriorated, the VDC system  
may not operate properly and both  
.
.
If wheels or tires other than the  
NISSAN recommended ones are  
used, the VDC system may not  
To prevent a door lock from freezing, apply  
deicer through the key hole. If the lock becomes  
frozen, heat the key before inserting it into the  
key hole or use the remote keyless entry keyfob.  
operate properly and the  
dicator may flash or both  
in-  
and  
ANTI-FREEZE  
and  
indicator lights may  
indicator lights may illuminate.  
In the winter when it is anticipated that the  
outside temperature will drop below 328F (08C),  
check the anti-freeze to assure proper winter  
protection. For additional information, see “EN-  
GINE COOLING SYSTEM” in the “8. Main-  
tenance and do-it-yourself” section.  
illuminate.  
The VDC system is not a substitute  
for winter tires or tire chains on a  
snow covered road.  
.
.
If engine control related parts are  
not NISSAN recommended or are  
extremely deteriorated, both the  
and  
indicator lights may  
illuminate.  
BATTERY  
When driving on extremely inclined  
surfaces such as higher banked  
corners, the VDC system may not  
If the battery is not fully charged during  
extremely cold weather conditions, the battery  
fluid may freeze and damage the battery. To  
maintain maximum efficiency, the battery should  
be checked regularly. For additional information,  
see “BATTERY” in the “8. Maintenance and do-  
it-yourself” section.  
operate properly and the  
dicator may flash or both  
in-  
and  
indicator lights may illuminate.  
Do not drive on these types of  
roads.  
DRAINING OF COOLANT WATER  
.
When driving on an unstable sur-  
face such as a turntable, ferry,  
If the vehicle is to be left outside without anti-  
freeze, drain the cooling system, including the  
engine block. Refill before operating the vehicle.  
For details, see “ENGINE COOLING SYSTEM”  
in the “8. Maintenance and do-it-yourself”  
section.  
elevator or ramp, the  
may flash or both  
indicator  
and  
indicator lights may illuminate. This  
is not a malfunction. Restart the  
engine after driving onto a stable  
Starting and driving 5-29  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
TIRE EQUIPMENT  
SPECIAL WINTER EQUIPMENT  
will lose even more traction.  
SUMMER tires have a tread designed to provide  
superior performance on dry pavement. How-  
ever, the performance of these tires will be  
substantially reduced in snowy and icy condi-  
tions. If you operate your vehicle on snowy or icy  
roads, NISSAN recommends the use of MUD &  
SNOW or ALL SEASON tires on all four wheels.  
Consult a NISSAN dealer for the tire type, size,  
speed rating and availability information.  
It is recommended that the following items be  
carried in the vehicle during winter:  
.
Allow more stopping distance under  
these conditions. Braking should be  
started sooner than on dry pave-  
ment.  
.
A scraper and stiff-bristled brush to remove  
ice and snow from the windows and wiper  
blades.  
.
.
Allow greater following distances  
on slippery roads.  
.
.
.
A sturdy, flat board to be placed under the  
jack to give it firm support.  
Watch for slippery spots (glare ice).  
These may appear on an otherwise  
clear road in shaded areas. If a  
patch of ice is seen ahead, brake  
before reaching it. Try not to brake  
while on the ice, and avoid any  
sudden steering maneuvers.  
A shovel to dig the vehicle out of snow-  
drifts.  
For additional traction on icy roads, studded  
tires may be used. However, some U.S. states  
and Canadian provinces prohibit their use.  
Check local, state and provincial laws before  
installing studded tires.  
Extra window washer fluid to refill the  
reservoir tank.  
DRIVING ON SNOW OR ICE  
.
.
Do not use cruise control on slip-  
pery roads.  
Skid and traction capabilities of studded  
snow tires, on wet or dry surfaces, may be  
poorer than that of non-studded snow  
tires.  
WARNING  
Snow can trap dangerous exhaust  
gases under your vehicle. Keep  
snow clear of the exhaust pipe and  
from around your vehicle.  
.
Wet ice (328F, 08C and freezing rain),  
very cold snow or ice can be slick  
and very hard to drive on. The  
vehicle will have much less traction  
or “grip” under these conditions. Try  
to avoid driving on wet ice until the  
road is salted or sanded.  
Tire chains may be used. For details, see “TIRE  
CHAINS” in the “8. Maintenance and do-it-  
yourself” section of this manual.  
ENGINE BLOCK HEATER (if so  
equipped)  
Engine block heaters are used to assist in cold  
temperature starting.  
.
Whatever the condition, drive with  
caution. Accelerate and slow down  
with care. If accelerating or down-  
shifting too fast, the drive wheels  
The engine block heater should be used when  
the outside temperature is 208F (−78C) or lower.  
5-30 Starting and driving  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
To use the engine block heater  
1. Turn the engine off.  
starting the engine. Damage to the  
cord could result in an electrical  
shock and can cause serious injury.  
2. Open the hood and unwrap the engine  
block heater cord.  
.
Use a heavy-duty 3-wire, 3-pronged  
extension cord rated for at least  
10A. Plug the extension cord into a  
Ground Fault Interrupt (GFI) pro-  
tected, grounded 110-VAC outlet.  
Failure to use the proper extension  
cord or a grounded outlet can result  
in a fire or electrical shock and  
cause serious personal injury.  
3. Plug the engine block heater cord into a  
grounded 3-wire, 3-pronged extension cord.  
4. Plug the extension cord into a Ground Fault  
Interrupt (GFI) protected, grounded 110-  
volt AC (VAC) outlet.  
5. The engine block heater must be plugged in  
for at least 2 - 4 hours, depending on  
outside temperatures, to properly warm the  
engine coolant. Use an appropriate timer to  
turn the engine block heater on.  
6. Before starting the engine, unplug and  
properly store the cord to keep it away from  
moving parts.  
WARNING  
.
.
Do not use your engine block heater  
with an ungrounded electrical sys-  
tem or a 2-pronged adapter. You can  
be seriously injured by an electrical  
shock if you use an ungrounded  
connection.  
Disconnect and properly store the  
engine block heater cord before  
Starting and driving 5-31  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
MEMO  
5-32 Starting and driving  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
6 In case of emergency  
Flat tire............................................................ 6-2  
Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS)............. 6-2  
Changing a flat tire......................................... 6-2  
Jump starting .................................................... 6-8  
Push starting................................................... 6-10  
If your vehicle overheats..................................... 6-11  
Towing your vehicle .......................................... 6-12  
Towing recommended by NISSAN  
¯
(except for Krom models)............................... 6-13  
Towing recommended by NISSAN  
¯
(for Krom models) ........................................ 6-14  
Vehicle recovery (freeing a stuck vehicle) ........... 6-15  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
FLAT TIRE  
CHANGING A FLAT TIRE  
TIRE PRESSURE MONITORING SYS-  
TEM (TPMS)  
could occur and may lead to an  
accident and could result in serious  
personal injury. Check the tire pres-  
sure for all four tires. Adjust the tire  
pressure to the recommended COLD  
tire pressure shown on the Tire and  
Loading Information label to turn  
the low tire pressure warning light  
OFF. If you have a flat tire, replace it  
with a spare tire as soon as possi-  
ble.  
If you have a flat tire, follow the instructions  
below.  
This vehicle is equipped with the Tire Pressure  
Monitoring System (TPMS). It monitors tire  
pressure of all tires except the spare. When  
the low tire pressure warning light is lit, one or  
more of your tires is significantly under-inflated.  
If the vehicle is being driven with low tire  
pressure, the TPMS will activate and warn you  
of it by the low tire pressure warning light. This  
system will activate only when the vehicle is  
driven at speeds above 16 MPH (25 km/h). For  
more details, see “WARNING/INDICATOR  
LIGHTS AND AUDIBLE REMINDERS” in the  
“2. Instruments and controls” section and “TIRE  
PRESSURE MONITORING SYSTEM (TPMS)”  
in the “5. Starting and driving” section.  
Stopping the vehicle  
1. Safely move the vehicle off the road and  
away from traffic.  
2. Turn on the hazard warning flashers.  
3. Park on a level surface and apply the parking  
brake.  
4. Continuously Variable Transmission  
.
When a spare tire is mounted or a  
wheel is replaced, the TPMS will not  
function and the low tire pressure  
warning light will flash for approxi-  
mately 1 minute. The light will  
remain on after 1 minute. Contact  
your NISSAN dealer as soon as  
possible for tire replacement and/  
or system resetting.  
(CVT) models:  
Move the selector lever to the P (Park)  
position.  
Manual Transmission (MT) models:  
WARNING  
Move the shift lever to the R (Reverse)  
position.  
.
If the low tire pressure warning light  
illuminates while driving, avoid sud-  
den steering maneuvers or abrupt  
braking, reduce vehicle speed, pull  
off the road to a safe location and  
stop the vehicle as soon as possi-  
ble. Driving with under-inflated tires  
may permanently damage the tires  
and increase the likelihood of tire  
failure. Serious vehicle damage  
5. Turn off the engine.  
.
.
Replacing tires with those not ori-  
ginally specified by NISSAN could  
affect the proper operation of the  
TPMS.  
6. Raise the hood to warn other traffic, and to  
signal professional road assistance person-  
nel that you need assistance.  
7. Have all passengers get out of the vehicle  
and stand in a safe place, away from traffic  
and clear of the vehicle.  
Do not inject any tire liquid or  
aerosol tire sealant into the tires,  
as this may cause a malfunction of  
the tire pressure sensors.  
6-2 In case of emergency  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
WARNING  
.
Make sure the parking brake is  
securely applied and the Manual  
Transmission is shifted into R (Re-  
verse), or the Continuously Variable  
Transmission into P (Park).  
.
.
Never change tires when the vehicle  
is on a slope, ice or slippery areas.  
This is hazardous.  
Never change tires if oncoming  
traffic is close to your vehicle. Wait  
for professional road assistance.  
MCE0001A  
SCE0810  
Jacking tools  
Blocking wheels  
Getting the spare tire and tools  
1
Place suitable blocks  
at both the front and  
*
Jacking tools:  
back of the wheel diagonally opposite the flat  
tire to prevent the vehicle from moving when it is  
jacked up.  
Slide the driver’s seat forward and the rear seat  
in its rear most position, and open the lid located  
in the floor behind the driver’s seat.  
WARNING  
Be sure to block the wheel as the  
vehicle may move and result in personal  
injury.  
In case of emergency 6-3  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Spare tire:  
injury.  
The spare tire is stored under the rear of the  
vehicle.  
Spare tire basket bolt tightening torque:  
48 to 63 ft-lb (64 to 86 N·m)  
1. Open the back door.  
1
*
2. Open the bolt cover  
.
2
3. Loosen the bolt  
*
counterclockwise ap-  
proximately 25 turns using the wheel nut  
wrench to lower the spare tire.  
4. Stop turning the bolt when the tire is  
lowered to the place where the tire basket  
3
*
4
*
can be removed from the hook  
.
Do not loosen the bolt excessively,  
otherwise the basket may fall sud-  
denly.  
5. Hold the tire basket and remove it from the  
hook by pushing the basket upward.  
6. Lower the tire basket slowly to the ground,  
and then take out the spare tire.  
WARNING  
Properly stow the spare tire basket  
after use. Driving without properly  
stowing the spare tire basket can cause  
contact with the road and cause sparks  
or scatter rocks/road debris resulting in  
vehicle damage or serious personal  
SCE0811  
Spare tire  
6-4 In case of emergency  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Carefully read the caution label attached  
to the jack body and the following instruc-  
tions.  
Jacking up the vehicle and removing the  
damaged tire  
WARNING  
.
.
Never get under the vehicle while it  
is supported only by the jack. If it is  
necessary to work under the vehicle,  
support it with safety stands.  
Use only the jack provided with your  
vehicle to lift the vehicle. Do not use  
the jack provided with your vehicle  
on other vehicles. The jack is de-  
signed for lifting only your vehicle  
during a tire change.  
SCE0630  
Removing wheel cover (if so equipped)  
.
Use the correct jack-up points.  
Never use any other part of the  
vehicle for jack support.  
WARNING  
Never use your hands to remove the  
wheel cover. This may cause personal  
injury.  
.
.
.
Never jack up the vehicle more than  
necessary.  
Never use blocks on or under the  
jack.  
1
*
To remove the wheel cover, use the jack rod  
as illustrated.  
Do not start or run the engine while  
vehicle is on the jack, as it may  
cause the vehicle to move.  
2
Apply cloth  
between the wheel and jack rod  
*
to prevent damaging the wheel and wheel cover.  
.
Do not allow passengers to stay in  
the vehicle while it is on the jack.  
Use caution not to scratch the wheel cover or  
wheel surface.  
In case of emergency 6-5  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
SCE0812  
SCE0504  
Jack-up point  
1. Place the jack directly under the jack-up  
point as illustrated so the top of the jack  
contacts the vehicle at the jack-up point.  
Align the jack head between the two  
notches in the front or the rear as shown.  
Also fit the groove of the jack head between  
the notches as shown.  
2. Loosen each wheel nut one or two turns by  
turning it counterclockwise with the wheel  
nut wrench. Do not remove the wheel  
nuts until the tire is off the ground.  
3. To lift the vehicle, securely hold the jack lever  
and rod with both hands as shown above.  
Carefully raise the vehicle until the tire clears  
the ground. Remove the wheel nuts, and  
then remove the tire.  
The jack should be used on level firm  
ground.  
6-6 In case of emergency  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
2 times, until they are tight.  
tightened to specifications at each  
lubrication interval.  
4. Lower the vehicle slowly until the tire  
touches the ground. Then, with the wheel  
nut wrench, tighten the wheel nuts securely  
in the sequence as illustrated. Lower the  
vehicle completely.  
.
Adjust tire pressure to the COLD  
pressure.  
COLD pressure:  
After the vehicle has been parked for 3  
hours or more or driven less than 1 mile  
(1.6 km).  
WARNING  
.
Incorrect wheel nuts or improperly  
tightened wheel nuts can cause the  
wheel to become loose or come off.  
This could cause an accident.  
COLD tire pressures are shown on the  
Tire and Loading Information label  
affixed to the driver side center pillar.  
Stowing the damaged tire and the tools  
Securely store the jack and tools in the storage  
area.  
SCE0576  
.
.
Do not use oil or grease on the  
wheel studs or nuts. This could  
cause the nuts to become loose.  
Installing the spare tire  
The spare tire is designed for emergency  
use. (See specific instructions under the  
heading “WHEELS AND TIRES” in the “8.  
Maintenance and do-it-yourself” section.)  
Retighten the wheel nuts when the  
vehicle has been driven for 600  
miles (1,000 km) (also in cases of a  
flat tire, etc.).  
1. Clean any mud or dirt from the surface  
between the wheel and hub.  
.
As soon as possible, tighten the  
wheel nuts to the specified torque  
with a torque wrench.  
2. Carefully put the spare tire on and tighten  
the wheel nuts finger tight. Check that all the  
wheel nuts contact the wheel surface  
horizontally.  
Wheel nut tightening torque:  
80 ft-lb (108 N·m)  
3. With the wheel nut wrench, tighten wheel  
nuts alternately and evenly in the sequence  
The wheel nuts must be kept tightened  
to specifications at all times. It is  
recommended that the wheel nuts be  
1
2
3
4
as illustrated (  
,
,
,
), more than  
* * * *  
In case of emergency 6-7  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
JUMP STARTING  
To start your engine with a booster battery, the  
instructions and precautions below must be  
followed.  
WARNING  
.
Always make sure that the spare tire  
and jacking equipment are properly  
secured after use. Such items can  
become dangerous projectiles in an  
accident or sudden stop.  
WARNING  
.
.
.
If done incorrectly, jump starting  
can lead to a battery explosion,  
resulting in severe injury or death.  
It could also damage your vehicle.  
.
.
Make sure that the spare tire basket  
is properly secured in its original  
position after removing the spare  
tire.  
Explosive hydrogen gas is always  
present in the vicinity of the battery.  
Keep all sparks and flames away  
from the battery.  
The spare tire and small size spare  
tire are designed for emergency use.  
See specific instructions under the  
heading “WHEELS AND TIRES” in  
the “8. Maintenance and do-it-your-  
self” section.  
SCE0828  
Do not allow battery fluid to come  
into contact with eyes, skin, clothing  
or painted surfaces. Battery fluid is  
a corrosive sulfuric acid solution  
which can cause severe burns. If  
the fluid should come into contact  
with anything, immediately flush the  
contacted area with water.  
Securely store the damaged tire in the cargo  
area as illustrated.  
The spare tire basket cannot be used for the  
conventional tire.  
Return the spare tire basket to its original  
position in the reverse order of removal. (See  
“Getting the spare tire and tools” earlier in this  
section.)  
.
.
Keep the battery out of the reach of  
children.  
Spare tire basket bolt tightening torque:  
48 to 63 ft-lb (64 to 86 N·m)  
The booster battery must be rated at  
12 volts. Use of an improperly rated  
battery can damage your vehicle.  
.
Whenever working on or near a  
battery, always wear suitable eye  
6-8 In case of emergency  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
protectors (for example, goggles or  
industrial safety spectacles) and  
remove rings, metal bands, or any  
other jewelry. Do not lean over the  
battery when jump starting.  
.
.
Do not attempt to jump start a  
frozen battery. It could explode  
and cause serious injury.  
Your vehicle has an automatic en-  
gine cooling fan. It could come on at  
any time. Keep hands and other  
objects away from it.  
SCE0862  
3. Continuously Variable Transmission  
(CVT) models:  
WARNING  
Move the selector lever to the P (Park)  
position.  
Always follow the instructions below.  
Failure to do so could result in damage  
to the charging system and cause  
personal injury.  
Manual Transmission (MT) models:  
Move the shift lever to the N (Neutral)  
position.  
1. If the booster battery is in another vehicle  
B
A
B
, position the two vehicles (  
and  
)
*
*
*
4. Switch off all unnecessary electrical systems  
(headlights, heater, air conditioner, etc.).  
to bring their batteries into close proximity to  
each other.  
5. Remove the vent caps on the battery (if so  
equipped). Cover the battery with a firmly  
wrung out moist cloth to reduce explosion  
hazard.  
Do not allow the two vehicles to touch.  
2. Apply the parking brake.  
In case of emergency 6-9  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
PUSH STARTING  
Do not attempt to start the engine by pushing.  
A
6. Connect jumper cables in the sequence as  
the engine of the vehicle  
started.  
being jump  
*
1
*
2
*
3
*
4
*
illustrated (  
?
?
?
).  
CAUTION  
For the vehicle equipped with Intelli-  
gent Key system:  
CAUTION  
.
Continuously Variable Transmission  
(CVT) models cannot be push-  
started or tow-started. Attempting  
to do so may cause transmission  
damage.  
If the battery is discharged, the ignition  
switch cannot be moved from the OFF  
position and, if the steering lock is  
engaged, the steering wheel cannot be  
moved. Connect the jumper cables to  
B
Do not keep the starter motor engaged  
for more than 10 seconds. If the engine  
does not start right away, place the  
ignition switch in the OFF position and  
wait 10 seconds before trying again.  
.
.
Three-way catalyst equipped mod-  
els should not be started by pushing  
since the three way catalyst may be  
damaged.  
the booster vehicle  
the ignition switch and disengaging the  
steering lock.  
before turning  
*
9. After starting your engine, carefully discon-  
nect the negative cable and then the positive  
4
3
*
2
*
1
cable (  
?
?
?
).  
*
*
CAUTION  
Never try to start the vehicle by  
towing it; when the engine starts,  
the forward surge could cause the  
vehicle to collide with the tow  
vehicle.  
10. Replace the vent caps (if so equipped). Be  
sure to dispose of the cloth used to cover  
the vent holes as it may be contaminated  
with corrosive acid.  
.
.
Always connect positive (+) to posi-  
tive (+) and negative (−) to body  
ground (for example, as illustrated),  
not to the battery.  
Make sure the jumper cables do not  
touch moving parts in the engine  
compartment and that the cable  
clamps do not contact any other  
metal.  
B
*
7. Start the engine of the booster vehicle  
and let it run for a few minutes.  
8. Keep the engine speed of the booster  
B
*
vehicle  
at about 2,000 rpm, and start  
6-10 In case of emergency  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
IF YOUR VEHICLE OVERHEATS  
position.  
WARNING  
CAUTION  
Do not stop the engine.  
Be careful not to allow your hands, hair,  
jewelry or clothing to come into contact  
with, or get caught in, engine belts or  
the engine cooling fan. The engine  
cooling fan can start at any time.  
.
.
Do not continue to drive if your  
vehicle overheats. Doing so could  
cause engine damage or a vehicle  
fire.  
3. Turn off the air conditioner (if so equipped).  
Open all the windows, move the heater or air  
conditioner temperature control to maximum  
hot and fan control to high speed.  
To avoid the danger of being  
scalded, never remove the radiator  
cap while the engine is still hot.  
When the radiator cap is removed,  
pressurized hot water will spurt out,  
possibly causing serious injury.  
4. Get out of the vehicle. Look and listen for  
steam or coolant escaping from the radiator  
before opening the hood. (If steam or  
coolant is escaping, turn off the engine.)  
Do not open the hood further until no steam  
or coolant can be seen.  
7. After the engine cools down, check the  
coolant level in the reservoir with the engine  
running. Add coolant to the reservoir if  
necessary. Have your vehicle repaired at a  
NISSAN dealer.  
.
Do not open the hood if steam is  
coming out.  
5. Open the engine hood.  
WARNING  
If your vehicle is overheating (indicated by an  
extremely high temperature gauge reading), or if  
you feel a lack of engine power, detect abnormal  
noise, etc., take the following steps:  
If steam or water is coming from the  
engine, stand clear to prevent getting  
burned.  
1. Move the vehicle safely off the road and  
apply the parking brake.  
6. Visually check the drive belt for damage or  
looseness. Also check if the cooling fan is  
running. The radiator hoses and radiator  
should not leak water. If coolant is leaking or  
the cooling fan does not run, stop the  
engine.  
2. Continuously Variable Transmission  
(CVT) models:  
Move the selector lever to the P (Park)  
position.  
Manual Transmission (MT) models:  
Move the shift lever to the N (Neutral)  
In case of emergency 6-11  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
TOWING YOUR VEHICLE  
When towing your vehicle, all State (Provincial in  
Canada) and local regulations for towing must  
be followed. Incorrect towing equipment could  
damage your vehicle. Towing instructions are  
available from a NISSAN dealer. Local service  
operators are familiar with the applicable laws  
and procedures for towing. To assure proper  
towing and to prevent accidental damage to  
your vehicle, NISSAN recommends that you  
have a service operator tow your vehicle. It is  
advisable to have the service operator carefully  
read the following precautions.  
For information about towing your vehicle behind  
a recreational vehicle (RV), see “FLAT TOW-  
ING” in the “9. Technical and consumer  
information” section of this manual.  
WARNING  
.
.
Never ride in a vehicle that is being  
towed.  
Never get under your vehicle after it  
has been lifted by a tow truck.  
CAUTION  
.
.
When towing, make sure that the  
transmission, axles, steering system  
and powertrain are in working con-  
dition. If any unit is damaged, dol-  
lies must be used.  
Always attach safety chains before  
towing.  
6-12 In case of emergency  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
ahead position with a rope or  
similar device. For models with  
a steering wheel lock mechan-  
ism, never secure the steering  
wheel by pushing the ignition  
switch to the LOCK position.  
This may damage the steering  
lock mechanism.  
— Move the selector lever or shift  
lever to the N (Neutral) position.  
.
.
When towing a CVT model with the  
rear wheels on the ground (if you do  
not use towing dollies): Always  
release the parking brake.  
SCE0814  
If you have to tow an MT model with  
the rear wheels on the ground (if  
you do not use towing dollies) or  
four wheels on the ground:  
TOWING RECOMMENDED BY  
the transmission. If it is necessary to  
tow the vehicle with the rear wheels  
raised, always use towing dollies  
under the front wheels.  
¯
NISSAN (except for Krom models)  
NISSAN recommends that your vehicle be  
towed with the driving (front) wheels off the  
ground or place the vehicle on a flat bed truck as  
illustrated.  
— Place the ignition switch in the  
ON position and turn off all  
accessories.  
.
When towing a CVT model or Man-  
ual Transmission (MT) model with  
the front wheels on towing dollies:  
— Always release the parking  
brake.  
CAUTION  
— Place the ignition switch in the  
OFF position (models without  
Intelligent Key system) or place  
the ignition switch in the ACC or  
ON position (models with Intel-  
ligent Key system). Secure the  
steering wheel in a straight-  
.
Never tow Continuously Variable  
Transmission (CVT) models with  
the front wheels on the ground or  
four wheels on the ground (forward  
or backward), as this may cause  
serious and expensive damage to  
— Move the transmission shift le-  
ver to the N (Neutral) position.  
— Observe the following restricted  
towing speeds and distances for  
manual transmission models  
In case of emergency 6-13  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
only:  
.
Rear wheels on the ground:  
Speed: Below 50 MPH  
(80 km/h)  
Distance: Less than 50  
miles (80 km)  
.
Four wheels on the ground:  
Speed: Below 60 MPH  
(96 km/h)  
Distance: Less than 500  
miles (800 km)  
SCE0861  
TOWING RECOMMENDED BY  
¯
NISSAN (for Krom models)  
CAUTION  
¯
Do not tow Krom models with any  
wheel on the ground, or with the front  
or rear wheels raised, because this may  
cause damage to the front or rear  
bumpers.  
NISSAN recommends that you place the vehicle  
on a flatbed truck as illustrated.  
6-14 In case of emergency  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
vehicle recovery.  
Front:  
1
*
1. Remove the hook cover  
bumper with a suitable tool.  
from the  
2
2. Securely install the recovery hook  
as  
*
illustrated. (The hook is stored under the  
floor behind the driver’s seat.)  
Make sure that the hook is properly secured in  
its original position after use.  
SCE0815  
SCE0833  
Front (except for Kro¯ m models)  
VEHICLE RECOVERY (freeing a stuck  
vehicle)  
WARNING  
.
.
Stand clear of a stuck vehicle.  
Do not spin your tires at high speed.  
This could cause them to explode  
and result in serious injury. Parts of  
your vehicle could also overheat  
and be damaged.  
Pulling a stuck vehicle  
Do not use the tie down hook for towing or  
SCE0830  
Front (Kro¯ m models)  
In case of emergency 6-15  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
cle tie down hook or recovery hook.  
.
.
Always pull the cable straight out  
from the front of the vehicle. Never  
pull on the vehicle at an angle.  
Pulling devices should be routed so  
they do not touch any part of the  
suspension, steering, brake or cool-  
ing systems.  
.
Pulling devices such as ropes or  
canvas straps are not recommended  
for use in vehicle towing or recov-  
ery.  
SCE0831  
SCE0678  
Kro¯ m models  
Rear  
Rocking a stuck vehicle  
If your vehicle is stuck in sand, snow, mud, etc.,  
use the following procedure:  
¯
Krom models: Reinstall the hook cover accord-  
ing to the following procedure as illustrated.  
Rear:  
Do not use the tie down hook to pull the vehicle.  
1
1. Fit the left bottom edge of the cover  
the opening at an angle.  
in  
*
1. Turn off the Vehicle Dynamic Control (VDC)  
system.  
CAUTION  
2
2. Slide the cover into position  
by aligning  
*
2. Make sure the area in front and behind the  
vehicle is clear of obstructions.  
.
Tow chains or cables must be at-  
tached only to the vehicle recovery  
hook or main structural members of  
the vehicle. Otherwise, the vehicle  
body will be damaged.  
A
the area  
with the opening.  
*
3. Push the cover in while pushing the upper  
3. Turn the steering wheel right and left to clear  
an area around the front tires.  
3
*
tab  
.
4. Slowly rock the vehicle forward and back-  
ward.  
.
.
Do not use the vehicle tie down  
hook to free a vehicle stuck in sand,  
snow, mud, etc.  
.
Shift back and forth between R (Re-  
verse) and D (Drive) (Continuously  
Variable Transmission models) or 1st  
Never tow a vehicle using the vehi-  
6-16 In case of emergency  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
and R (Reverse) (Manual Transmission  
models).  
.
.
Apply the accelerator as little as possi-  
ble to maintain the rocking motion.  
Release the accelerator pedal before  
shifting between R and D (Continuously  
Variable Transmission models) or 1st  
and R (Manual Transmission models).  
.
Do not spin the tires above 35 MPH (55  
km/h).  
5. If the vehicle cannot be freed after a few  
tries, contact a professional towing service  
to remove the vehicle.  
In case of emergency 6-17  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
MEMO  
6-18 In case of emergency  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
7 Appearance and care  
Cleaning exterior................................................ 7-2  
Washing ...................................................... 7-2  
Waxing ........................................................ 7-3  
Removing spots............................................. 7-3  
Underbody ................................................... 7-3  
Glass .......................................................... 7-3  
Wheels........................................................ 7-3  
Chrome parts................................................ 7-4  
Tire dressing................................................. 7-4  
Cleaning interior ................................................ 7-5  
Air fresheners................................................ 7-5  
Floor mats .................................................... 7-5  
Seat belts .................................................... 7-6  
Corrosion protection ........................................... 7-6  
Most common factors contributing to vehicle  
corrosion...................................................... 7-6  
Environmental factors influence the rate of  
corrosion...................................................... 7-6  
To protect your vehicle from corrosion................. 7-7  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
CLEANING EXTERIOR  
In order to maintain the appearance of your  
vehicle, it is important to take proper care of it.  
Inside flanges, seams and folds on the doors,  
hatches and hood are particularly vulnerable to  
the effects of road salt. Therefore, these areas  
must be regularly cleaned. Make sure that the  
drain holes in the lower edge of the door are  
open. Spray water under the body and in the  
wheel wells to loosen the dirt and wash away  
road salt.  
CAUTION  
To protect the paint surfaces, wash your vehicle  
as soon as you can:  
.
Do not use car washes that use acid  
in the detergent. Some car washes,  
especially brushless ones, use some  
acid for cleaning. The acid may react  
with some plastic vehicle compo-  
nents, causing them to crack. This  
could affect their appearance, and  
also could cause them not to func-  
tion properly. Always check with  
your car wash to confirm that acid  
is not used.  
.
after a rainfall to prevent possible damage  
from acid rain  
.
.
after driving on coastal roads  
Avoid leaving water spots on the paint surface  
by using a damp chamois to dry the vehicle.  
when contaminants such as soot, bird  
droppings, tree sap, metal particles or bugs  
get on the paint surface  
.
when dust or mud builds up on the surface  
Whenever possible, store or park your vehicle  
inside a garage or in a covered area.  
.
.
Do not wash the vehicle with strong  
household soap, strong chemical  
detergents, gasoline or solvents.  
When it is necessary to park outside, park in a  
shady area or protect the vehicle with a body  
cover.  
Do not wash the vehicle in direct  
sunlight or while the vehicle body is  
hot, as the surface may become  
water-spotted.  
Be careful not to scratch the paint surface  
when putting on or removing the body  
cover.  
.
Avoid using tight-napped or rough  
cloths, such as washing mitts. Care  
must be taken when removing  
caked-on dirt or other foreign sub-  
stances so the paint surface is not  
scratched or damaged.  
WASHING  
Wash dirt off the vehicle with a wet sponge and  
plenty of water. Clean the vehicle thoroughly  
using a mild soap, a special vehicle soap or  
general purpose dishwashing liquid mixed with  
clean, lukewarm (never hot) water.  
Rinse the vehicle thoroughly with plenty of clean  
water.  
7-2 Appearance and care  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
GLASS  
proper product.  
Use glass cleaner to remove smoke and dust  
film from the glass surfaces. It is normal for glass  
to become coated with a film after the vehicle is  
parked in the hot sun. Glass cleaner and a soft  
cloth will easily remove this film.  
.
Wax your vehicle only after a thorough  
washing. Follow the instructions supplied  
with the wax.  
.
Do not use a wax containing any abrasives,  
cutting compounds or cleaners that may  
damage the vehicle finish.  
CAUTION  
Machine compound or aggressive polishing on a  
base coat/clear coat paint finish may dull the  
finish or leave swirl marks.  
When cleaning the inside of the win-  
dows, do not use sharp-edged tools,  
abrasive cleaners or chlorine-based  
disinfectant cleaners. They could da-  
mage the electrical conductors, radio  
antenna elements or rear window  
defroster elements.  
REMOVING SPOTS  
Remove tar and oil spots, industrial dust,  
insects, and tree sap as quickly as possible  
from the paint surface to avoid lasting damage  
or staining. Special cleaning products are  
available at a NISSAN dealer or any automotive  
accessory stores.  
SAI0045  
¯
Krom models  
CAUTION  
WHEELS  
Wash the wheels when washing the vehicle to  
maintain their appearance.  
Do not use an automatic car wash for  
UNDERBODY  
¯
Krom models. The rear spoiler and the  
wheel coating may be damaged.  
In areas where road salt is used in winter, the  
underbody must be cleaned regularly. This will  
prevent dirt and salt from building up and  
causing the acceleration of corrosion on the  
underbody and suspension. Before the winter  
period and again in the spring, the underseal  
must be checked and, if necessary, re-treated.  
.
.
.
Clean the inner side of the wheels when the  
wheel is changed or the underside of the  
vehicle is washed.  
WAXING  
Regular waxing protects the paint surface and  
helps retain new vehicle appearance. Polishing  
is recommended to remove built-up wax residue  
and to avoid a weathered appearance before  
reapplying wax.  
Inspect wheel rims regularly for dents or  
corrosion. Such damage may cause loss of  
pressure or poor seal at the tire bead.  
NISSAN recommends that the road wheels  
be waxed to protect against road salt in  
areas where it is used during winter.  
A NISSAN dealer can assist you in choosing the  
Appearance and care 7-3  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
wheels. These wheels require special cleaning.  
while driving and stain the vehicle paint.  
CAUTION  
If you choose to use a tire dressing, take the  
following precautions:  
CAUTION  
Do not use abrasive cleaners when  
washing the wheels.  
.
Use a water-based tire dressing. The coat-  
ing on the tire dissolves more easily with an  
oil-based tire dressing.  
.
The surfaces of the wheels use a  
different coating process than typi-  
cal aluminum alloy wheels. Do not  
use aluminum alloy wheel cleaners  
or abrasive cleaners to clean the  
wheels. Using such cleaners could  
damage the wheel surfaces.  
Aluminum alloy wheels  
Wash regularly with a sponge dampened in a  
mild soap solution, especially during winter  
months in areas where road salt is used. Salt  
could discolor the wheels if not removed.  
.
Apply a light coat of tire dressing to help  
prevent it from entering the tire tread/  
grooves (where it would be difficult to  
remove).  
.
.
Do not use an automatic car wash  
.
.
Wipe off excess tire dressing using a dry  
towel. Make sure the tire dressing is  
completely removed from the tire tread/  
grooves.  
CAUTION  
¯
for Krom models. The wheel coating  
may be damaged.  
Follow the directions below to avoid  
staining or discoloring the wheels:  
Do not use a brush to wash the  
.
Do not use a cleaner that uses  
strong acid or alkali contents to  
clean the wheels.  
¯
wheels on Krom models. The wheel  
Allow the tire dressing to dry as recom-  
mended by tire dressing manufacturer.  
coating may be damaged.  
CHROME PARTS  
.
Do not apply wheel cleaners to the  
wheels when they are hot. The  
wheel temperature should be the  
same as ambient temperature.  
Clean chrome parts regularly with a non-  
abrasive chrome polish to maintain the finish.  
TIRE DRESSING  
.
Rinse the wheel to completely re-  
move the cleaner within 15 minutes  
after the cleaner is applied.  
NISSAN does not recommend the use of tire  
dressings. Tire manufacturers apply a coating to  
the tires to help reduce discoloration of the  
rubber. If a tire dressing is applied to the tires, it  
may react with the coating and form a com-  
pound. This compound may come off the tire  
¯
Wheels for Krom models  
The wheels on Krom models use a different  
coating process than typical aluminum alloy  
¯
7-4 Appearance and care  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
CLEANING INTERIOR  
Occasionally remove loose dust from the interior  
trim, plastic parts and seats using a vacuum  
cleaner or soft bristled brush. Wipe the vinyl and  
leather surfaces with a clean, soft cloth dam-  
pened in mild soap solution, then wipe clean  
with a dry soft cloth.  
FLOOR MATS  
and damaging to the leather sur-  
faces and should be removed  
promptly. Do not use saddle soap,  
car waxes, polishes, oils, cleaning  
fluids, solvents, detergents or am-  
monia-based cleaners as they may  
damage the leather’s natural finish.  
The use of genuine NISSAN floor mats can  
extend the life of your vehicle carpet and make it  
easier to clean the interior. No matter what  
mats are used, be sure they are fitted for  
your vehicle and are properly positioned in  
the footwell to prevent interference with  
pedal operation. Mats should be maintained  
with regular cleaning and replaced if they  
become excessively worn.  
Regular care and cleaning is required in order to  
maintain the appearance of the leather.  
.
.
Never use fabric protectors unless  
recommended by the manufacturer.  
Before using any fabric protector, read the  
manufacturer’s recommendations. Some fabric  
protectors contain chemicals that may stain or  
bleach the seat material.  
Do not use glass or plastic cleaner  
on meter or gauge lens covers. It  
may damage the lens cover.  
Use a cloth dampened only with water, to clean  
the meter and gauge lens.  
AIR FRESHENERS  
Most air fresheners use a solvent that could  
affect the vehicle interior. If you use an air  
freshener, take the following precautions:  
WARNING  
Do not use water or acidic cleaners (hot  
steam cleaners) on the seat. This can  
damage the seat or occupant classifica-  
tion sensors. This can also affect the  
operation of the air bag system and  
result in serious personal injury.  
.
Hanging-type air fresheners can cause  
permanent discoloration when they contact  
vehicle interior surfaces. Place the air  
freshener in a location that allows it to hang  
free and not contact an interior surface.  
.
Liquid-type air fresheners typically clip on  
the vents. These products can cause  
immediate damage and discoloration when  
spilled on interior surfaces.  
CAUTION  
.
.
Never use benzine, thinner, or any  
similar material.  
Carefully read and follow the manufacturer’s  
instructions before using air fresheners.  
Small dirt particles can be abrasive  
Appearance and care 7-5  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
CORROSION PROTECTION  
SEAT BELTS  
MOST COMMON FACTORS CONTRI-  
BUTING TO VEHICLE CORROSION  
The seat belts can be cleaned by wiping them  
with a sponge dampened in a mild soap  
solution. Allow the belts to dry completely in  
the shade before using them.  
.
The accumulation of moisture-retaining dirt  
and debris in body panel sections, cavities,  
and other areas.  
See “SEAT BELTS” in the “1. Safety — Seats,  
seat belts and supplemental restraint system”  
section.  
.
Damage to paint and other protective coat-  
ings caused by gravel and stone chips or  
minor traffic accidents.  
ENVIRONMENTAL FACTORS INFLU-  
ENCE THE RATE OF CORROSION  
WARNING  
Do not allow wet seat belts to roll up in  
the retractor. NEVER use bleach, dye, or  
chemical solvents to clean the seat  
belts, since these materials may se-  
verely weaken the seat belt webbing.  
Moisture  
Accumulation of sand, dirt and water on the  
vehicle body underside can accelerate corro-  
sion. Wet floor coverings will not dry completely  
inside the vehicle, and should be removed for  
drying to avoid floor panel corrosion.  
SAI0042  
Floor mat positioning aid (driver’s side  
only)  
This vehicle includes front floor mat brackets to  
act as floor mat positioning aid. NISSAN floor  
mats have been specially designed for your  
vehicle model. The driver’s side floor mat has  
grommet holes in it. To install, position the mat  
by placing the floor mat bracket hook through  
the floor mat grommet hole while centering the  
mat in the foot area.  
Relative humidity  
Corrosion will be accelerated in areas of high  
relative humidity, especially those areas where  
the temperatures stay above freezing where  
atmospheric pollution exists, or where road salt  
is used.  
Temperature  
Periodically check to make certain that the mats  
are properly positioned.  
A temperature increase will accelerate the rate  
of corrosion to those parts which are not well  
ventilated.  
7-6 Appearance and care  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Air pollution  
this may damage them.  
Industrial pollution, the presence of salt in the air  
in coastal areas, or heavy road salt use will  
accelerate the corrosion process. Road salt will  
also accelerate the disintegration of paint  
surfaces.  
Chemicals used for road surface deicing are  
extremely corrosive. They accelerate corrosion  
and deterioration of underbody components  
such as the exhaust system, fuel and brake  
lines, brake cables, floor pan and fenders.  
TO PROTECT YOUR VEHICLE FROM  
CORROSION  
In winter, the underbody must be cleaned  
periodically.  
.
.
.
.
Wash and wax your vehicle often to keep the  
vehicle clean.  
For additional protection against rust and  
corrosion, which may be required in some areas,  
consult a NISSAN dealer.  
Always check for minor damage to the paint  
and repair it as soon as possible.  
Keep drain holes at the bottom of the doors  
open to avoid water accumulation.  
Check the underbody for accumulation of  
sand, dirt or salt. If present, wash with water  
as soon as possible.  
CAUTION  
.
.
NEVER remove dirt, sand or other  
debris from the passenger compart-  
ment by washing it out with a hose.  
Remove dirt with a vacuum cleaner.  
Never allow water or other liquids to  
come in contact with electronic  
components inside the vehicle as  
Appearance and care 7-7  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
MEMO  
7-8 Appearance and care  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
8 Maintenance and do-it-yourself  
Maintenance requirement ..................................... 8-2  
Scheduled maintenance................................... 8-2  
General maintenance ...................................... 8-2  
Where to go for service................................... 8-2  
General maintenance .......................................... 8-2  
Explanation of maintenance items....................... 8-2  
Maintenance precautions ..................................... 8-5  
Engine compartment check locations ...................... 8-6  
MR18DE engine ............................................ 8-6  
Engine cooling system......................................... 8-7  
Checking engine coolant level........................... 8-8  
Changing engine coolant ................................. 8-8  
Engine oil......................................................... 8-9  
Checking engine oil level ................................. 8-9  
Changing engine oil and filter............................ 8-9  
Continuously Variable Transmission (CVT) fluid........ 8-11  
Brake and clutch fluid ....................................... 8-11  
Window washer fluid ........................................ 8-12  
Battery .......................................................... 8-13  
Jump starting .............................................. 8-14  
Variable voltage control system (if so equipped) ...... 8-15  
Drive belt ....................................................... 8-15  
Spark plugs .................................................... 8-16  
Replacing spark plugs................................... 8-16  
Air cleaner...................................................... 8-16  
Windshield wiper blades.................................... 8-17  
Cleaning .................................................... 8-17  
Replacing................................................... 8-18  
Rear window wiper blade................................... 8-19  
Brakes........................................................... 8-19  
Self-adjusting brakes .................................... 8-19  
Brake pad wear warning ................................ 8-19  
Fuses............................................................ 8-20  
Engine compartment ..................................... 8-20  
Passenger compartment ................................ 8-21  
Key battery replacement .................................... 8-22  
Keyfob....................................................... 8-22  
Intelligent Key.............................................. 8-23  
Lights............................................................ 8-25  
Headlights.................................................. 8-26  
Exterior and interior lights............................... 8-27  
Wheels and tires.............................................. 8-28  
Tire pressure............................................... 8-28  
Tire labeling ................................................ 8-31  
Types of tires .............................................. 8-33  
Tire chains.................................................. 8-34  
Changing wheels and tires ............................. 8-35  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
MAINTENANCE REQUIREMENT  
GENERAL MAINTENANCE  
Your new NISSAN has been designed to have  
minimum maintenance requirements with long  
service intervals to save you both time and  
money. However, some day-to-day and regular  
maintenance is essential to maintain your  
NISSAN’s fine mechanical condition, as well  
as its emission and engine performance.  
During the normal day-to-day operation of the  
vehicle, general maintenance should be per-  
formed regularly as prescribed in this section. If  
you detect any unusual sounds, vibrations or  
smell, be sure to check for the cause or have a  
NISSAN dealer do it promptly. In addition, you  
should notify a NISSAN dealer if you think that  
repairs are required.  
Performing general maintenance checks re-  
quires minimal mechanical skill and only a few  
general automotive tools.  
These checks or inspections can be done by  
yourself, a qualified technician or, if you prefer, a  
NISSAN dealer.  
WHERE TO GO FOR SERVICE  
It is the owner’s responsibility to make sure that  
the scheduled maintenance, as well as general  
maintenance, is performed.  
When performing any checks or maintenance  
work, see “MAINTENANCE PRECAUTIONS”  
later in this section.  
If maintenance service is required or your vehicle  
appears to malfunction, have the systems  
checked and serviced by a NISSAN dealer.  
As the vehicle owner, you are the only one who  
can ensure that your vehicle receives the proper  
maintenance care. You are a vital link in the  
maintenance chain.  
EXPLANATION OF MAINTENANCE  
ITEMS  
NISSAN technicians are well-trained specialists  
and are kept up-to-date with the latest service  
information through technical bulletins, service  
tips, and in-dealership information systems.  
They are completely qualified to work on  
NISSAN vehicles before work begins.  
Additional information on the following  
items with “*” is found later in this section.  
SCHEDULED MAINTENANCE  
For your convenience, both required and op-  
tional scheduled maintenance items are de-  
scribed and listed in your “NISSAN Service and  
Maintenance Guide”. You must refer to that  
guide to ensure that necessary maintenance is  
performed on your NISSAN at regular intervals.  
Outside the vehicle  
The maintenance items listed here should be  
performed from time to time, unless otherwise  
specified.  
You can be confident that a NISSAN dealer’s  
service department performs the best job to  
meet the maintenance requirements on your  
vehicle — in a reliable and economical way.  
Doors and engine hood: Check that all doors  
and the engine hood operate properly. Also  
ensure that all latches lock securely. Lubricate  
hinges, latches, latch pins, rollers and links if  
necessary. Make sure that the secondary latch  
keeps the hood from opening when the primary  
latch is released.  
GENERAL MAINTENANCE  
General maintenance includes those items  
which should be checked during normal day-  
to-day operation. They are essential for proper  
vehicle operation. It is your responsibility to  
perform these procedures regularly as pre-  
scribed.  
When driving in areas using road salt or other  
corrosive materials, check lubrication frequently.  
8-2 Maintenance and do-it-yourself  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Lights*: Clean the headlights on a regular basis.  
Make sure that the headlights, stop lights, tail  
lights, turn signal lights, and other lights are all  
operating properly and installed securely. Also  
check headlight aim.  
For additional information regarding tires, refer  
to “Important Tire Safety Information” (US) or  
“Tire Safety Information” (Canada) in the War-  
ranty Information Booklet.  
Continuously Variable Transmission (CVT)  
P (Park) position mechanism: On a fairly  
steep hill, check that the vehicle is held securely  
with the selector lever in the P (Park) position  
without applying any brakes.  
Windshield: Clean the windshield on a regular  
basis. Check the windshield at least every six  
months for cracks or other damage. Have a  
damaged windshield repaired by a qualified  
repair facility.  
Road wheel nuts (lug nuts)*: When checking  
the tires, make sure no wheel nuts are missing,  
and check for any loose wheel nuts. Tighten if  
necessary.  
Parking brake: Check the parking brake  
operation regularly. The vehicle should be  
securely held on a fairly steep hill with only the  
parking brake applied. If the parking brake needs  
adjusted, see a NISSAN dealer.  
Tire rotation*: Tires should be rotated every  
Windshield wiper blades*: Check for cracks  
7,500 miles (12,000 km).  
or wear if they do not wipe properly.  
Seat belts: Check that all parts of the seat belt  
system (for example, buckles, anchors, adjusters  
and retractors) operate properly and smoothly,  
and are installed securely. Check the belt  
webbing for cuts, fraying, wear or damage.  
Tires*: Check the pressure with a gauge often  
and always prior to long distance trips. If  
necessary, adjust the pressure in all tires,  
including the spare, to the pressure specified.  
Check carefully for damage, cuts or excessive  
wear.  
Inside the vehicle  
The maintenance items listed here should be  
checked on a regular basis, such as when  
performing scheduled maintenance, cleaning  
the vehicle, etc.  
Seats: Check seat position controls such as  
seat adjusters, seatback recliners, etc. to ensure  
they operate smoothly and that all latches lock  
securely in every position. Check that the head  
restraints/headrests move up and down  
smoothly and that the locks (if so equipped)  
hold securely in all latched positions.  
Accelerator pedal: Check the pedal for  
smooth operation and make sure the pedal  
does not catch or require uneven effort. Keep  
the floor mat away from the pedal.  
Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS)  
transmitter components: Replace the TPMS  
transmitter grommet seal, valve core and cap  
when the tires are replaced due to wear or age.  
Brake pedal: Check the pedal for smooth  
operation. If the brake pedal suddenly goes  
down further than normal, the pedal feels  
spongy or the vehicle seems to take longer to  
stop, see a NISSAN dealer immediately. Keep  
the floor mat away from the pedal.  
Wheel alignment and balance: If the vehicle  
should pull to either side while driving on a  
straight and level road, or if you detect uneven or  
abnormal tire wear, there may be a need for  
wheel alignment.  
Steering wheel: Check for changes in the  
steering conditions, such as excessive free play,  
hard steering or strange noises.  
Warning lights and chimes: Make sure that  
all warning lights and chimes are operating  
properly.  
If the steering wheel or seat vibrates at normal  
highway speeds, wheel balancing may be  
needed.  
Brakes: Check that the brakes do not pull the  
vehicle to one side when applied.  
Maintenance and do-it-yourself 8-3  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Windshield defroster: Check that the air  
comes out of the defroster outlets properly and  
in sufficient quantity when operating the heater  
or air conditioner.  
Exhaust system: Make sure there are no loose  
supports, cracks or holes. If the sound of the  
exhaust seems unusual or there is a smell of  
exhaust fumes, immediately have the exhaust  
system inspected by a NISSAN dealer. (See  
“PRECAUTIONS WHEN STARTING AND  
DRIVING” in the “5. Starting and driving”  
section for exhaust gas (carbon monoxide).)  
section.  
Windshield washer fluid*: Check that there is  
adequate fluid in the reservoir.  
Windshield wiper and washer*: Check that  
the wipers and washers operate properly and  
that the wipers do not streak.  
Under the hood and vehicle  
Fluid leaks: Check under the vehicle for fuel,  
oil, water or other fluid leaks after the vehicle has  
been parked for a while. Water dripping from the  
air conditioner after use is normal. If you should  
notice any leaks or if gasoline fumes are evident,  
check for the cause and have it corrected  
immediately.  
The maintenance items listed here should be  
checked periodically (for example, each time you  
check the engine oil or refuel).  
Battery*: Check the fluid level in each cell.  
It should be between the MAX and MIN lines.  
Vehicles operated in high temperatures or under  
severe condition require frequent checks of the  
battery fluid level.  
Radiator and hoses: Check the front of the  
radiator and clean off any dirt, insects, leaves,  
etc., that may have accumulated. Make sure the  
hoses have no cracks, deformation, rot or loose  
connections.  
Brake and clutch fluid level*: Make sure that  
the brake and clutch fluid level is between the  
MAX and MIN lines on the reservoir.  
Underbody: The underbody is frequently ex-  
posed to corrosive substances such as those  
used on icy roads or to control dust. It is very  
important to remove these substances, other-  
wise rust will form on the floor pan, frame, fuel  
lines and around the exhaust system. At the end  
of winter, the underbody should be thoroughly  
flushed with plain water, being careful to clean  
those areas where mud and dirt may accumu-  
late. For additional information, see “CLEANING  
EXTERIOR” in the “7. Appearance and care”  
Engine coolant level*: Check the coolant level  
when the engine is cold.  
Engine drive belt*: Make sure that the drive  
belt is not frayed, worn, cracked or oily.  
Engine oil level*: Check the level after parking  
the vehicle on a level surface and turning off the  
engine. Wait more than 10 minutes for the oil to  
drain back into the oil pan.  
8-4 Maintenance and do-it-yourself  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
MAINTENANCE PRECAUTIONS  
When performing any inspection or mainte-  
nance work on your vehicle, always take care  
to prevent serious accidental injury to yourself or  
damage to the vehicle. The following are general  
precautions which should be closely observed.  
ever you work on your vehicle.  
ways conform to local regulations  
for disposal of vehicle fluid.  
.
.
If you must run the engine in an  
enclosed space such as a garage, be  
sure there is proper ventilation for  
exhaust gases to escape.  
.
.
.
Never leave the engine or the CVT  
related component harnesses dis-  
connected while the ignition switch  
is in the ON position.  
Never get under the vehicle while it  
is supported only by a jack. If it is  
necessary to work under the vehicle,  
support it with safety stands.  
WARNING  
Never connect or disconnect the  
battery or any transistorized com-  
ponent while the ignition switch is  
in the ON position.  
.
Park the vehicle on a level surface,  
apply the parking brake securely  
and block the wheels to prevent  
the vehicle from moving. Move the  
selector lever to the P (Park) posi-  
tion or the shift lever to the N  
(Neutral) position.  
.
.
Keep smoking materials, flame and  
sparks away from fuel tank and the  
battery.  
Your vehicle is equipped with an  
automatic engine cooling fan. It may  
come on at any time without warn-  
ing, even if the ignition key is in the  
OFF position and the engine is not  
running. To avoid injury, always  
disconnect the negative battery  
cable before working near the fan.  
The fuel filter or fuel lines should be  
serviced by a NISSAN dealer be-  
cause the fuel lines are under high  
pressure even when the engine is  
off.  
.
.
Be sure the ignition switch is in the  
OFF or LOCK position when per-  
forming any parts replacement or  
repairs.  
If you must work with the engine  
running, keep your hands, clothing,  
hair and tools away from moving  
fans, belts and any other moving  
parts.  
This “8. Maintenance and do-it-yourself” section  
gives instructions regarding only those items  
which are relatively easy for an owner to perform.  
CAUTION  
.
.
Do not work under the hood while  
the engine is hot. Turn the engine  
off and wait until it cools down.  
A genuine NISSAN Service Manual is also  
available. (See “OWNER’S MANUAL/SERVICE  
MANUAL ORDER INFORMATION” in the “9.  
Technical and consumer information” section.)  
.
.
It is advisable to secure or remove  
any loose clothing and remove any  
jewelry, such as rings, watches, etc.  
before working on your vehicle.  
Avoid direct contact with used en-  
gine oil and coolant. Improperly  
disposed engine oil, and engine  
coolant and/or other vehicle fluids  
can damage the environment. Al-  
You should be aware that incomplete or  
improper servicing may result in operating  
Always wear eye protection when-  
Maintenance and do-it-yourself 8-5  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
ENGINE COMPARTMENT CHECK  
LOCATIONS  
difficulties or excessive emissions, and could  
affect your warranty coverage. If in doubt  
about any servicing, we recommend that  
it be done by a NISSAN dealer.  
SSI0564  
6. Engine drive belt location  
7. Engine oil dipstick  
MR18DE ENGINE*  
1. Engine oil filler cap  
2. Brake and clutch (*1) fluid reservoir  
3. Air cleaner  
8. Engine coolant reservoir  
9. Radiator filler cap  
10. Fuse/fusible link holder  
4. Battery  
*
Shown with the resonator removed. For removal  
instructions, see “ENGINE COMPARTMENT  
5. Window washer fluid reservoir  
8-6 Maintenance and do-it-yourself  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
ENGINE COOLING SYSTEM  
CHECK LOCATIONS” in the “8. Maintenance and  
do-it-yourself” section.  
The engine cooling system is filled at the factory  
with a high-quality, year-round, anti-freeze cool-  
ant solution. The anti-freeze solution contains  
rust and corrosion inhibitors, therefore additional  
cooling system additives are not necessary.  
*1: for Manual Transmission (MT) models  
WARNING  
.
Never remove the radiator or cool-  
ant reservoir cap when the engine is  
hot. Wait until the engine and  
radiator cool down. Serious burns  
could be caused by high pressure  
fluid escaping from the radiator.  
See precautions in “IF YOUR VEHI-  
CLE OVERHEATS” in the “6. In case  
of emergency” section of this man-  
ual.  
SDI2394  
Removing the resonator  
A
Remove the resonator  
*
if necessary. Pull the  
resonator upward to remove it. Install the  
resonator securely after any inspection or  
maintenance work is performed.  
.
The radiator is equipped with a  
pressure type radiator cap. To pre-  
vent engine damage, use only a  
genuine NISSAN radiator cap.  
CAUTION  
When adding or replacing coolant, be  
sure to use only a Genuine NISSAN  
Long Life Antifreeze/Coolant or equiva-  
lent with the proper mixture ratio of  
Maintenance and do-it-yourself 8-7  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
CHANGING ENGINE COOLANT  
50% anti-freeze and 50% demineralized  
or distilled water. The use of other  
types of coolant solutions may damage  
the engine cooling system.  
Major cooling system repairs should be per-  
formed by a NISSAN dealer. The service  
procedures can be found in the appropriate  
NISSAN Service Manual.  
Outside  
temperature  
down to  
Deminera-  
lized water  
or distilled  
water  
Improper servicing can result in reduced  
heater performance and engine overheat-  
ing.  
Anti-freeze  
50%  
8F  
−29.2  
8C  
−34  
50%  
WARNING  
.
.
To avoid the danger of being  
scalded, never change the coolant  
when the engine is hot.  
SDI2385  
Never remove the radiator cap when  
the engine is hot. Serious burns  
could be caused by high pressure  
fluid escaping from the radiator.  
CHECKING ENGINE COOLANT LEVEL  
Check the coolant level in the reservoir when  
the engine is cold. If the coolant level is below  
2
the MIN level  
, open the reservoir cap and  
*
1
add coolant up to the MAX level  
. If the  
.
.
Avoid direct skin contact with used  
coolant. If skin contact is made,  
wash thoroughly with soap or hand  
cleaner as soon as possible.  
*
reservoir is empty, check the coolant level in the  
radiator when the engine is cold. If there is  
insufficient coolant in the radiator, fill the radiator  
with coolant up to the filler opening and also add  
1
Keep coolant out of reach of chil-  
dren and pets.  
it to the reservoir up to the MAX level  
.
*
Tighten the cap securely after adding engine  
coolant.  
Engine coolant must be disposed of properly.  
Check your local regulations.  
If the cooling system frequently requires  
coolant, have it checked by a NISSAN  
dealer.  
8-8 Maintenance and do-it-yourself  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
ENGINE OIL  
and pour recommended oil through the  
4. Raise and support the vehicle using a  
suitable floor jack and safety jack stands.  
3
opening. Do not overfill  
.
*
6. Recheck oil level with the dipstick.  
.
Place the safety jack stands under the  
vehicle jack-up points.  
It is normal to add some oil between oil  
maintenance intervals or during the break-  
in period, depending on the severity of  
operating conditions.  
.
A suitable adapter should be attached to  
the jack stand saddle.  
CAUTION  
CAUTION  
Make sure the correct lifting and sup-  
port points are used to avoid vehicle  
damage.  
Oil level should be checked regularly.  
Operating the engine with an insuffi-  
cient amount of oil can damage the  
engine, and such damage is not cov-  
ered by the warranty.  
SDI2386  
CHECKING ENGINE OIL LEVEL  
1. Park the vehicle on a level surface and apply  
the parking brake.  
CHANGING ENGINE OIL AND FILTER  
Change the engine oil and filter according to the  
maintenance log shown in the NISSAN Service  
and Maintenance Guide.  
2. Run the engine until it reaches operating  
temperature.  
3. Turn off the engine. Wait more than 10  
minutes for the oil to drain back into  
the oil pan.  
Vehicle set-up  
1. Park the vehicle on a level surface and apply  
the parking brake.  
4. Remove the dipstick and wipe it clean.  
Reinsert it all the way.  
2. Run the engine until it reaches the operating  
temperature.  
5. Remove the dipstick again and check the oil  
3. Turn the engine off and wait more than 10  
minutes.  
1
level. It should be within the range  
. If the  
*
2
oil level is below  
, remove the oil filler cap  
*
Maintenance and do-it-yourself 8-9  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
.
.
Waste oil must be disposed of  
properly.  
9. Clean and re-install the drain plug with a  
new washer. Securely tighten the drain plug  
with a wrench.  
Check your local regulations.  
Drain plug tightening torque:  
22 to 29 ft-lb  
(29 to 39 N·m)  
(Perform steps 4 to 8 only when the engine  
oil filter change is needed.)  
4. Remove the engine under cover under the  
oil filter location by removing the bolts and  
small plastic clips.  
Do not use excessive force.  
10. Refill the engine with the recommended oil  
through the oil filler opening, and install the  
oil filler cap securely.  
5. Loosen the oil filter with an oil filter wrench.  
Remove the oil filter by turning it by hand.  
See “CAPACITIES AND RECOMMENDED  
FUEL/LUBRICANTS” in the “9. Technical  
and consumer information” section for drain  
and refill capacity. The drain and refill  
capacity depends on the oil temperature  
and drain time. Use these specifications for  
reference only. Always use the dipstick to  
determine the proper amount of oil in the  
engine.  
6. Wipe the engine oil filter mounting surface  
with a clean rag.  
SDI1978  
1. Oil filler cap  
2. Oil drain plug  
3. Oil filter  
CAUTION  
Be sure to remove any old gasket  
material remaining on the mounting  
surface of the engine. Failure to do so  
could lead to engine damage.  
Engine oil and filter  
1. Place a large drain pan under the drain plug.  
11. Start the engine and check for leakage  
around the drain plug and the oil filter.  
Correct as required.  
2. Remove the oil filler cap.  
7. Coat the gasket on the new filter with clean  
engine oil.  
3. Remove the drain plug with a wrench and  
completely drain the oil.  
12. Turn the engine off and wait more than 10  
minutes. Check the oil level with the dipstick.  
Add engine oil if necessary.  
8. Screw in the oil filter clockwise until a slight  
resistance is felt, then tighten additionally  
more than 2/3 turn.  
CAUTION  
After the operation  
1. Install the engine undercover into position as  
the following steps.  
Be careful not to burn yourself, as the  
engine oil is hot.  
Oil filter tightening torque:  
11 to 15 ft-lb  
(14.7 to 20.5 N·m)  
8-10 Maintenance and do-it-yourself  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
CONTINUOUSLY VARIABLE  
TRANSMISSION (CVT) FLUID  
BRAKE AND CLUTCH FLUID  
When checking or replacement is required, we  
recommend a NISSAN dealer for servicing.  
For additional brake and clutch fluid information,  
see “CAPACITIES AND RECOMMENDED  
FUEL/LUBRICANTS” in the “9. Technical and  
consumer information” section of this manual.  
a. Pull the center of the small plastic clips  
out.  
b. Hold the engine undercover into posi-  
tion.  
CAUTION  
c. Insert the clips through the undercover  
into the holes in the frame, then push the  
center of the clips in to lock the clips in  
place.  
.
.
Use only Genuine NISSAN CVT Fluid  
NS-2. Do not mix with other fluids.  
WARNING  
.
Use only new fluid from a sealed  
container. Old, inferior or contami-  
nated fluid may damage the brake  
and clutch systems. The use of  
improper fluids can damage the  
brake and clutch systems, and affect  
the vehicle’s stopping ability.  
Using transmission fluid other than  
Genuine NISSAN CVT Fluid NS-2  
will damage the CVT, which is not  
covered by the NISSAN new vehicle  
limited warranty.  
d. Install the bolts that hold the undercover  
in place. Be careful not to strip the bolts  
or over-tighten them.  
2. Lower the vehicle carefully to the ground.  
3. Dispose of waste oil and filter properly.  
.
.
Clean the filler cap before removing.  
Brake and clutch fluid is poisonous  
and should be stored carefully in  
marked containers out of the reach  
of children.  
WARNING  
.
.
Prolonged and repeated contact  
with used engine oil may cause skin  
cancer.  
Try to avoid direct skin contact with  
used oil. If skin contact is made,  
wash thoroughly with soap or hand  
cleaner as soon as possible.  
CAUTION  
Do not spill the fluid on any painted  
surfaces. This will damage the paint. If  
fluid is spilled, immediately wash the  
surface with water.  
.
Keep used engine oil out of reach of  
children.  
Maintenance and do-it-yourself 8-11  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
WINDOW WASHER FLUID  
To fill the window washer fluid reservoir, lift the  
cap and pour the window washer fluid into the  
reservoir opening.  
Add a washer solvent to the washer for better  
cleaning. In the winter season, add a windshield  
washer antifreeze. Follow the manufacturer’s  
instructions for the mixture ratio.  
Fill the window washer fluid reservoir periodi-  
cally.  
Type A  
Add fluid when the low washer fluid warning  
light illuminates.  
SDI2387  
SDI2388  
Type B  
Type A  
Check the fluid level in the reservoir. If the fluid is  
To check the fluid level, use your finger to plug  
1
below the MIN line  
or the brake warning  
*
1
the center hole  
of the cap/tube assembly,  
*
light comes on, add Genuine NISSAN Super  
then remove it from the reservoir. If there is no  
fluid in the tube, add fluid.  
Heavy Duty Brake Fluid or equivalent DOT 3  
2
fluid up to the MAX line  
. If fluid must be  
*
added frequently, the system should be checked  
by a NISSAN dealer.  
Refill the reservoir more frequently when driving  
conditions require an increased amount of  
window washer fluid.  
Recommended fluid:  
Genuine NISSAN Windshield Washer Concen-  
trate Cleaner & Antifreeze or equivalent  
SDI2429  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Type B  
8-12 Maintenance and do-it-yourself  
 
BATTERY  
.
Keep the battery surface clean and dry.  
Clean the battery with a solution of baking  
soda and water.  
.
.
When working on or near a battery,  
always wear suitable eye protection  
and remove all jewelry.  
CAUTION  
.
.
Do not substitute engine anti-freeze  
coolant for window washer solution.  
This may result in damage to the  
paint.  
.
.
Make certain the terminal connections are  
clean and securely tightened.  
Battery posts, terminals and related  
accessories contain lead and lead  
compounds. Wash hands after  
handling.  
If the vehicle is not to be used for 30 days or  
longer, disconnect the negative 7 battery  
terminal cable to prevent discharging it.  
Do not fill the window washer  
reservoir tank with washer fluid  
concentrates at full strength. Some  
methyl alcohol based washer fluid  
concentrates may permanently stain  
the grille if spilled while filling the  
window washer reservoir tank.  
.
Keep the battery out of the reach of  
children.  
WARNING  
.
Do not expose the battery to flames  
or electrical sparks. Hydrogen gas  
generated by the battery is explo-  
sive. Do not allow battery fluid to  
contact your skin, eyes, fabrics or  
painted surfaces. After touching a  
battery or battery cap, do not touch  
or rub your eyes. Thoroughly wash  
your hands. If the acid contacts your  
eyes, skin or clothing, immediately  
flush with water for at least 15  
minutes and seek medical attention.  
.
Pre-mix washer fluid concentrates  
with water to the manufacturer’s  
recommended levels before pouring  
the fluid into the window washer  
reservoir tank. Do not use the  
window washer reservoir tank to  
mix the washer fluid concentrate  
and water.  
.
Do not operate the vehicle if the  
fluid in the battery is low. Low  
battery fluid can cause a higher load  
on the battery which can generate  
heat, reduce battery life, and in  
some cases lead to an explosion.  
Maintenance and do-it-yourself 8-13  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
JUMP STARTING  
If jump starting is necessary, see “JUMP  
STARTING” in the “6. In case of emergency”  
section. If the engine does not start by jump  
starting, the battery may have to be replaced.  
Contact a NISSAN dealer.  
DI0137MA  
SDI1480C  
A
Check the fluid level in each cell. It should be  
1. Remove the cell plugs  
.
*
1
*
between the UPPER LEVEL  
and LOWER  
2. Add distilled water up to the UPPER LEVEL  
2
LEVEL  
lines.  
*
1
*
line.  
If it is necessary to add fluid, add only distilled  
water to bring the level to the indicator in each  
filler opening. Do not overfill.  
If the side of the battery is not clear, check  
the distilled water level by looking directly  
above the cell; the condition  
1
*
indicates  
2
OK and the condition  
added.  
needs more to be  
*
A
3. Tighten cell plugs  
*
.
Vehicles operated in high temperatures or under  
severe conditions require frequent checks of the  
battery fluid level.  
8-14 Maintenance and do-it-yourself  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
VARIABLE VOLTAGE CONTROL  
SYSTEM (if so equipped)  
DRIVE BELT  
or adjusted by a NISSAN dealer.  
CAUTION  
2. Have the belt condition checked regularly.  
.
.
Do not ground accessories directly  
to the battery terminal. Doing so will  
bypass the variable voltage control  
system and the vehicle battery may  
not charge completely.  
Use electrical accessories with the  
engine running to avoid discharging  
the vehicle battery.  
The variable voltage control system measures  
the amount of electrical discharge from the  
battery and controls voltage generated by the  
generator.  
SDI2422  
1. Drive belt auto-tensioner  
2. Crankshaft pulley  
3. Air conditioner compressor  
4. Water pump  
5. Alternator  
WARNING  
Be sure the ignition switch is in the OFF  
or LOCK position before servicing drive  
belts. The engine could rotate unex-  
pectedly.  
1. Visually inspect the belt for signs of unusual  
wear, cuts, fraying or looseness. If the belt is  
in poor condition or loose, have it replaced  
Maintenance and do-it-yourself 8-15  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
SPARK PLUGS  
AIR CLEANER  
WARNING  
Be sure the engine and ignition switch  
are off and that the parking brake is  
engaged securely.  
CAUTION  
Be sure to use the correct socket to  
remove the spark plugs. An incorrect  
socket can damage the spark plugs.  
SDI2020  
SDI2106  
1
To remove the air cleaner filter, push the tabs  
*
REPLACING SPARK PLUGS  
2
*
and pull the filter upward  
.
If replacement is required, see a NISSAN dealer  
for servicing.  
The air cleaner filter should not be cleaned and  
reused. Replace it according to the maintenance  
shown in the “NISSAN Service and Mainte-  
nance Guide”. When replacing the filter, wipe  
the inside of the air cleaner housing and the  
cover with a damp cloth.  
Iridium-tipped spark plugs  
It is not necessary to replace the iridium-tipped  
spark plugs as frequently as the conventional  
type spark plugs since they will last much longer.  
Follow the maintenance log shown in the  
“NISSAN Service and Maintenance Guide”. Do  
not reuse the iridium-tipped spark plugs by  
cleaning or regapping.  
WARNING  
.
Operating the engine with the air  
cleaner removed can cause you or  
others to be burned. The air cleaner  
not only cleans the air, it stops  
Always replace spark plugs with recom-  
mended or equivalent ones.  
8-16 Maintenance and do-it-yourself  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
WINDSHIELD WIPER BLADES  
CLEANING  
flame if the engine backfires. If it is  
not there, and the engine backfires,  
you could be burned. Do not drive  
with the air cleaner removed, and be  
careful when working on the engine  
with the air cleaner removed.  
If your windshield is not clear after using the  
windshield washer or if a wiper blade chatters  
when running, wax or other material may be on  
the blade or windshield.  
Clean the outside of the windshield with a  
washer solution or a mild detergent. Your  
windshield is clean if beads do not form when  
rinsing with clear water.  
.
Never pour fuel into the throttle  
body or attempt to start the engine  
with the air cleaner removed. Doing  
so could result in serious injury.  
Clean each blade by wiping it with a cloth  
soaked in a washer solution or a mild detergent.  
Then rinse the blade with clear water. If your  
windshield is still not clear after cleaning the  
blades and using the wiper, replace the blades.  
CAUTION  
Worn windshield wiper blades can  
damage the windshield and impair  
driver vision.  
Maintenance and do-it-yourself 8-17  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
SDI1803  
REPLACING  
CAUTION  
Replace the wiper blades if they are worn.  
.
.
After wiper blade replacement, re-  
turn the wiper arm to its original  
position; otherwise it may be da-  
maged when the hood is opened.  
1. Lift the wiper arm away from the windshield.  
A
2. Push and hold the release tab  
, and  
*
move the wiper blade down the wiper arm  
1
*
.
SDI1865  
Make sure the wiper blades contact  
the glass; otherwise the arm may be  
damaged from wind pressure.  
3. Insert the new wiper blade onto the wiper  
A
*
Be careful not to clog the washer nozzle  
.
arm until a click sounds.  
This may cause improper windshield washer  
operation. If the nozzle is clogged, remove any  
4. Rotate the wiper blade so that the dimple is  
in the groove.  
B
objects with a needle or small pin  
careful not to damage the nozzle.  
. Be  
*
8-18 Maintenance and do-it-yourself  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
REAR WINDOW WIPER BLADE  
BRAKES  
Contact a NISSAN dealer if checking or  
replacement is required.  
If the brakes do not operate properly, have the  
brakes checked by a NISSAN dealer.  
affect the function or performance of the brake  
system.  
Proper brake inspection intervals should  
be followed. For additional information, see the  
maintenance log section of your “NISSAN  
Service and Maintenance Guide”.  
SELF-ADJUSTING BRAKES  
Your vehicle is equipped with self-adjusting  
brakes.  
The disc-type brakes self-adjust every time the  
brake pedal is applied.  
WARNING  
See a NISSAN dealer for a brake  
system check if the brake pedal height  
does not return to normal.  
BRAKE PAD WEAR WARNING  
The disc brake pads have audible wear warn-  
ings. When a brake pad requires replacement, it  
will make a high pitched scraping sound when  
the vehicle is in motion. This scraping sound will  
first occur only when the brake pedal is  
depressed. After more wear of the brake pad,  
the sound will always be heard even if the brake  
pedal is not depressed. Have the brakes  
checked as soon as possible if the wear warning  
sound is heard.  
Under some driving or climate conditions,  
occasional brake squeak, squeal or other noise  
may be heard. Occasional brake noise during  
light to moderate stops is normal and does not  
Maintenance and do-it-yourself 8-19  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
FUSES  
3. Remove the resonator. (See “ENGINE  
COMPARTMENT CHECK LOCATIONS”  
earlier in this section.)  
4. Remove the fuse/fusible link holder cover by  
1
pushing the tab  
and lifting the cover  
*
2
from the right side  
, then the left side  
*
3
.
*
5. Locate the fuse that needs to be replaced.  
6. Remove the fuse using the fuse puller  
located in the passenger compartment fuse  
box.  
SDI1753  
SDI1959  
A
*
7. If the fuse is open  
, replace it with a new  
ENGINE COMPARTMENT  
B
fuse  
.
*
8. If a new fuse also opens, have the electrical  
system checked and repaired by a NISSAN  
dealer.  
CAUTION  
Never use a fuse of a higher or lower  
amperage rating than that specified on  
the fuse box cover. This could damage  
the electrical system or cause a fire.  
4
*
The holder  
also contains the fuses. For  
checking and/or replacing, see a NISSAN  
dealer.  
If any electrical equipment does not operate,  
check for an open fuse.  
1. Be sure the ignition switch and the headlight  
switch are turned off.  
2. Open the engine hood.  
8-20 Maintenance and do-it-yourself  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
SDI1869  
SDI2389  
Fusible links  
If any electrical equipment does not operate and  
the fuses are in good condition, check the  
fusible links in the holders  
any of these fusible links are melted, replace only  
with genuine NISSAN parts.  
2
*
3. Remove the fuse with the fuse puller  
.
PASSENGER COMPARTMENT  
CAUTION  
1
2
3
,
and  
. If  
* *  
*
Never use a fuse of a higher or lower  
amperage rating than that specified on  
the fuse box cover. This could damage  
the electrical system or cause a fire.  
For checking and replacing the fusible links in  
2
*
3
*
the holders  
and  
, see a NISSAN dealer.  
If any electrical equipment does not operate,  
check for an open fuse.  
1. Be sure the ignition switch and the headlight  
switch are turned off.  
1
*
2. Pull to remove the fuse box cover  
.
Maintenance and do-it-yourself 8-21  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
KEY BATTERY REPLACEMENT  
CAUTION  
Be careful not to allow children to  
swallow the battery and removed parts.  
SDI1753  
A
*
4. If the fuse is open  
, replace it with a new  
B
fuse  
.
*
5. If a new fuse also opens, have the electrical  
system checked and repaired by a NISSAN  
dealer.  
SDI2134  
KEYFOB  
Replace the battery in the keyfob as follows:  
1. Remove the screw.  
2. Insert a small screwdriver into the slit of the  
corner and twist it to separate the upper part  
8-22 Maintenance and do-it-yourself  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
from the lower part. Use a cloth to protect  
the casing.  
Operation is subject to the following two  
conditions: (1) This device may not cause  
harmful interference, and (2) this device  
must accept any interference received,  
including interference that may cause un-  
desired operation of the device.  
3. Replace the battery with a new one.  
Recommended battery:  
CR1620 or equivalent  
.
.
.
Do not touch the internal circuit and  
electric terminals as doing so could  
cause a malfunction.  
Hold the battery by the edges. Holding  
the battery across the contact points will  
seriously deplete the storage capacity.  
Make sure that the + side faces the  
bottom of the case.  
4. Close the lid securely and install the screw.  
5. Operate the buttons to check its operation.  
See a NISSAN dealer if you need any assistance  
for replacement.  
FCC Notice:  
SDI2451  
Changes or modifications not expressly  
approved by the party responsible for  
compliance could void the user’s authority  
to operate the equipment.  
INTELLIGENT KEY  
Replace the battery in the Intelligent Key as  
follows:  
This device complies with Part 15 of the  
FCC Rules and RSS-210 of Industry Cana-  
da.  
1. Remove the mechanical key from the In-  
telligent Key.  
Maintenance and do-it-yourself 8-23  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
2. Insert a small screwdriver into the slit of the  
corner and twist it to separate the upper part  
from the lower part. Use a cloth to protect  
the casing.  
and can radiate radio frequency energy  
and, if not installed and used in accor-  
dance with the instructions, may cause  
harmful interference to radio communica-  
tions. However, there is no guarantee that  
interference will not occur in a particular  
installation. If this equipment does cause  
harmful interference to radio or television  
reception, which can be determined by  
turning the equipment off and on, the user  
is encouraged to try to correct the inter-  
ference by one or more of the following  
measures:  
3. Replace the battery with a new one.  
Recommended battery:  
CR2025 or equivalent  
.
.
.
Do not touch the internal circuit and  
electric terminals as doing so could  
cause a malfunction.  
Hold the battery by the edges. Holding  
the battery across the contact points will  
seriously deplete the storage capacity.  
—
—
—
Reorient or relocate the receiving an-  
tenna.  
SDI2452  
4. Align the tips of the upper and lower parts  
Increase the separation between the  
equipment and the receiver.  
Make sure that the + side faces the  
bottom of the case.  
1
2
*
, and then push them together  
until it  
*
is securely closed.  
Connect the equipment into an outlet  
on a circuit different from that to which  
the receiver is connected.  
5. Operate the buttons to check its operation.  
See a NISSAN dealer if you need any assistance  
for replacement.  
—
Consult the dealer or an experienced  
radio/TV technician for help.  
FCC Notice:  
This equipment has been tested and found  
to comply with the limits for a Class B  
digital device pursuant to part 15 of the  
FCC Rules. These limits are designed to  
provide reasonable protection against  
harmful interference in a residential in-  
stallation. This equipment generates, uses  
8-24 Maintenance and do-it-yourself  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
LIGHTS  
1. Front turn signal light  
2. Headlight (high-beam/low-beam)  
3. Front side marker/park light  
4. Map light (if so equipped)  
5. Ceiling light  
6. Front fog light (if so equipped)  
7. Side turn signal light  
8. High-mounted stop light  
9. License plate light  
10. Rear combination light (stop/tail/turn signal/back-  
up light)  
11. Cargo light (if so equipped)  
12. Rear side marker light  
SDI2497  
Maintenance and do-it-yourself 8-25  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
HEADLIGHTS  
.
Aiming is not necessary after repla-  
cing the bulb. When aiming adjust-  
Fog may temporarily form inside the lens of the  
exterior lights in the rain or in a car wash. A  
temperature difference between the inside and  
the outside of the lens causes the fog. This is  
not a malfunction. If large drops of water collect  
inside the lens, contact a NISSAN dealer.  
ment is necessary, contact  
NISSAN dealer.  
a
Use the same number and wattage as originally  
installed as shown in the chart.  
Replacing  
Halogen headlight model:  
The headlight is a semi-sealed beam type which  
uses a replaceable headlight (halogen) bulb.  
CAUTION  
.
Do not leave the bulb out of the  
headlight reflector for a long period  
of time. Dust, moisture, smoke, etc.  
entering the headlight body may  
affect bulb performance.  
.
.
High pressure halogen gas is sealed  
inside the halogen bulb. The bulb  
may break if the glass envelope is  
scratched or the bulb is dropped.  
SDI2396  
Disconnect the battery negative cable before  
replacing bulbs.  
Only touch the base when handling  
the bulb. Never touch the glass  
envelope. Touching the glass envel-  
ope could significantly affect bulb  
life and/or headlight performance.  
A
1. Remove the connector  
and the back  
*
B
*
cover  
.
C
*
2. Unlock the retaining spring  
, and then  
remove the bulb.  
8-26 Maintenance and do-it-yourself  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
EXTERIOR AND INTERIOR LIGHTS  
Item  
Wattage (W)  
Bulb No.  
HB2  
Headlight high/low beams (Halogen)  
Front turn signal light*  
60/55  
21  
35  
5
PY21W  
H8  
Front fog light (if so equipped)*  
Front side marker/park light*  
W5W  
WY5W  
Side turn signal light*  
Rear combination light*  
5
turn signal  
stop/tail  
21  
21/5  
18  
5
PY21W  
W21/5W  
W16W  
W5W  
W5W  
—
back-up  
Rear side marker light*  
License plate light*  
5
Map light (if so equipped)  
High-mounted stop light*  
Ceiling light  
5
18  
8
W16W  
—
Cargo light (if so equipped)  
8
—
*: See a NISSAN dealer for replacement.  
NOTE: Always check with the Parts Department at a NISSAN dealer for the latest information about parts.  
SDI2306  
:
:
REMOVE  
INSTALL  
Replacement procedures  
All other lights are either type A, B, C, D or E.  
When replacing a bulb, first remove the lens  
and/or cover.  
Maintenance and do-it-yourself 8-27  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
WHEELS AND TIRES  
If you have a flat tire, see “FLAT TIRE” in  
the “6. In case of emergency” section.  
TIRE PRESSURE  
Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS)  
This vehicle is equipped with the Tire Pressure  
Monitoring System (TPMS). It monitors tire  
pressure of all tires except the spare. When  
the low tire pressure warning light is lit, one or  
more of your tires is significantly under-inflated.  
The TPMS will activate only when the vehicle is  
driven at speeds above 16 MPH (25 km/h).  
Also, this system may not detect a sudden drop  
in tire pressure (for example a flat tire while  
driving).  
SDI2391  
SDI2392  
Map light  
Cargo light  
For more details, see “Low tire pressure warning  
light” in the “2. Instruments and controls”  
section, “TIRE PRESSURE MONITORING SYS-  
TEM (TPMS)” in the “5. Starting and driving”  
section and “TIRE PRESSURE MONITORING  
SYSTEM (TPMS)” in the “6. In case of  
emergency” section.  
Tire inflation pressure  
Check the pressure of the tires (including  
the spare) often and always prior to long  
distance trips. The recommended tire  
pressure specifications are shown on the  
Tire and Loading Information label under  
the “Cold Tire Pressure” heading. The Tire  
SDI1845  
Ceiling light  
8-28 Maintenance and do-it-yourself  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
and Loading Information label is affixed to  
the driver side center pillar. Tire pressures  
should be checked regularly because:  
not load your vehicle beyond  
this capacity. Overloading your  
vehicle may result in reduced  
tire life, unsafe operating condi-  
tions due to premature tire fail-  
ure, or unfavorable handling  
characteristics and could also  
lead to a serious accident. Load-  
ing beyond the specified capa-  
city may also result in failure of  
other vehicle components.  
.
.
Most tires naturally lose air over time.  
Tires can lose air suddenly when driven  
over potholes or other objects or if the  
vehicle strikes a curb while parking.  
The tire pressures should be checked  
when the tires are cold. The tires are  
considered COLD after the vehicle has  
been parked for 3 or more hours, or driven  
less than 1 mile (1.6 km) at moderate  
speeds.  
.
.
Before taking a long trip, or  
whenever you heavily load your  
vehicle, use a tire pressure  
gauge to ensure that the tire  
pressures are at the specified  
level.  
Incorrect tire pressure, including un-  
der inflation, may adversely affect tire  
life and vehicle handling.  
For additional information re-  
garding tires, refer to “Important  
Tire Safety Information” (US) or  
“Tire Safety Information” (Cana-  
da) in the Warranty Information  
Booklet.  
WARNING  
.
.
Improperly inflated tires can fail  
suddenly and cause an accident.  
The Gross Vehicle Weight rating  
(GVWR) is located on the F.M.V.  
S.S./C.M.V.S.S. certification la-  
bel. The vehicle weight capacity  
is indicated on the Tire and  
Loading Information label. Do  
Maintenance and do-it-yourself 8-29  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
originally installed on the vehicle at  
the factory.  
4
* Cold tire pressure: Inflate the tires to  
this pressure when the tires are cold.  
Tires are considered COLD after the  
vehicle has been parked for 3 or  
more hours, or driven less than 1 mile  
(1.6 km) at moderate speeds. The  
recommended cold tire inflation is set  
by the manufacturer to provide the  
best balance of tire wear, vehicle  
handling, driveability, tire noise, etc.,  
up to the vehicle’s GVWR.  
5
* Tire size — see “TIRE LABELING”  
later in this section.  
6
* Spare tire size or compact spare tire  
size (if so equipped)  
SDI2503  
Tire and Loading Information label  
2
* Vehicle load limit: See “VEHICLE  
LOADING INFORMATION” in the “9.  
Technical and consumer information”  
section.  
1
* Seating capacity: The maximum num-  
ber of occupants that can be seated  
in the vehicle.  
3
* Original size: The size of the tires  
8-30 Maintenance and do-it-yourself  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
tion shown on the Tire and Loading  
Information label.  
5. Add air to the tire as needed. If too  
much air is added, press the core of the  
valve stem briefly with the tip of the  
gauge stem to release pressure. Re-  
check the pressure and add or release  
air as needed.  
6. Install the valve stem cap.  
7. Check the pressure of all other tires,  
including the spare.  
SDI1949  
SDI1575  
COLD TIRE  
Example  
SIZE  
INFLATION  
PRESSURE  
Checking the tire pressure  
1. Remove the valve stem cap from the  
tire.  
TIRE LABELING  
Federal law requires tire manufacturers to  
place standardized information on the side-  
wall of all tires. This information identifies  
and describes the fundamental character-  
istics of the tire and also provides the tire  
identification number (TIN) for safety stan-  
dard certification. The TIN can be used to  
identify the tire in case of a recall.  
P195/60R15 230 kPa,  
FRONT  
ORIGINAL  
TIRE  
87H  
P195/55R16 230 kPa,  
86V 33 PSI  
P195/60R15 230 kPa,  
33 PSI  
2. Press the pressure gauge squarely onto  
the valve stem. Do not press too hard or  
force the valve stem sideways, or air will  
escape. If the hissing sound of air  
escaping from the tire is heard while  
checking the pressure, reposition the  
gauge to eliminate this leakage.  
REAR  
ORIGINAL  
TIRE  
87H  
33 PSI  
P195/55R16 230 kPa,  
86V  
33 PSI  
3. Remove the gauge.  
SPARE  
TIRE  
420 kPa,  
60 PSI  
T125/70D15  
4. Read the tire pressure on the gauge  
stem and compare it to the specifica-  
Maintenance and do-it-yourself 8-31  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
5. Two-digit number (16): This number is  
the wheel or rim diameter in inches.  
6. Two- or three-digit number (94): This  
number is the tire’s load index. It is a  
measurement of how much weight each  
tire can support. You may not find this  
information on all tires because it is not  
required by law.  
7. H: Tire speed rating. You should not  
drive the vehicle faster than the tire  
speed rating.  
SDI1606  
SDI1607  
Example  
Example  
1
2
* Tire size (example: P215/60R16  
* TIN (Tire Identification Number) for a  
new tire (example: DOT XX XX XXX  
XXXX)  
94H)  
1. P: The “P” indicates the tire is designed  
for passenger vehicles. (Not all tires  
have this information.)  
1. DOT: Abbreviation for the “Department  
of Transportation”. The symbol can be  
placed above, below or to the left or  
right of the Tire Identification Number.  
2. Three-digit number (215): This number  
gives the width in millimeters of the tire  
from sidewall edge to sidewall edge.  
2. Two-digit code: Manufacturer’s identifi-  
cation mark  
3. Two-digit number (60): This number,  
known as the aspect ratio, gives the  
tire’s ratio of height to width.  
3. Two-digit code: Tire size  
4. Three-digit code: Tire type code (Op-  
tional)  
4. R: The “R” stands for radial.  
8-32 Maintenance and do-it-yourself  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
TYPES OF TIRES  
5. Three-digit code: Date of Manufacture  
load rating as the factory installed  
tire.  
6. Four numbers represent the week and  
year the tire was built. For example, the  
numbers 3103 means the 31st week of  
2003. If these numbers are missing,  
then look on the other sidewall of the  
tire.  
WARNING  
6
* Term of “tubeless” or “tube type”  
.
When changing or replacing tires,  
be sure all four tires are of the same  
type (Example: Summer, All Season  
Indicates whether the tire requires an  
inner tube (“tube type”) or not  
(“tubeless”).  
or Snow) and construction.  
A
7
* The word “radial”  
NISSAN dealer may be able to help  
you with information about tire type,  
size, speed rating and availability.  
3
* Tire ply composition and material  
The word “radial” is shown, if the tire  
has radial structure.  
The number of layers or plies of  
rubber-coated fabric in the tire.  
.
Replacement tires may have a lower  
speed rating than the factory  
equipped tires, and may not match  
the potential maximum vehicle  
speed. Never exceed the maximum  
speed rating of the tire.  
Tire manufacturers also must indicate  
the materials in the tire, which include  
steel, nylon, polyester, and others.  
8
* Manufacturer or brand name  
Manufacturer or brand name is  
shown.  
4
* Maximum permissible inflation pres-  
Other tire-related terminology:  
sure  
.
.
Replacing tires with those not ori-  
ginally specified by NISSAN could  
affect the proper operation of the  
TPMS.  
In addition to the many terms that are  
defined throughout this section, Intended  
Outboard Sidewall is (1) the sidewall that  
contains a whitewall, bears white lettering  
or bears manufacturer, brand and/or model  
name molding that is higher or deeper than  
the same molding on the other sidewall of  
the tire, or (2) the outward facing sidewall  
of an asymmetrical tire that has a particular  
side that must always face outward when  
mounted on a vehicle.  
This number is the greatest amount  
of air pressure that should be put in  
the tire. Do not exceed the maximum  
permissible inflation pressure.  
For additional information regard-  
ing tires, refer to “Important Tire  
Safety Information” (US) or “Tire  
Safety Information” (Canada) in the  
Warranty Information Booklet.  
5
* Maximum load rating  
This number indicates the maximum  
load in kilograms and pounds that  
can be carried by the tire. When  
replacing the tires on the vehicle,  
always use a tire that has the same  
Maintenance and do-it-yourself 8-33  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Never exceed the maximum speed rating of the  
tire.  
your vehicle. Use chain tensioners when re-  
commended by the tire chain manufacturer to  
ensure a tight fit. Loose end links of the tire  
chain must be secured or removed to prevent  
the possibility of whipping action damage to the  
fenders or underbody. If possible, avoid fully  
loading your vehicle when using tire chains. In  
addition, drive at a reduced speed. Otherwise,  
your vehicle may be damaged and/or vehicle  
handling and performance may be adversely  
affected.  
All season tires  
NISSAN specifies all season tires on some  
models to provide good performance all year,  
including snowy and icy road conditions. All  
Season tires are identified by ALL SEASON  
and/or M&S (Mud and Snow) on the tire  
sidewall. Snow tires have better snow traction  
than All Season tires and may be more appro-  
priate in some areas.  
If you install snow tires, they must be the same  
size, brand, construction and tread pattern on all  
four wheels.  
For additional traction on icy roads, studded  
tires may be used. However, some U.S. states  
and Canadian provinces prohibit their use.  
Check local, state and provincial laws before  
installing studded tires. Skid and traction cap-  
abilities of studded snow tires, on wet or dry  
surfaces, may be poorer than that of non-  
studded snow tires.  
Summer tires  
NISSAN specifies summer tires on some  
models to provide superior performance on dry  
roads. Summer tire performance is substantially  
reduced in snow and ice. Summer tires do not  
have the tire traction rating M&S on the tire  
sidewall.  
Tire chains must be installed only on the  
front wheels and not on the rear wheels.  
Never install tire chains on a TEMPORARY USE  
ONLY spare tire.  
TIRE CHAINS  
Use of tire chains may be prohibited according  
to location. Check the local laws before instal-  
ling tire chains. When installing tire chains, make  
sure they are the proper size for the tires on your  
vehicle and are installed according to the chain  
manufacturer’s suggestions. Use only SAE  
Class S chains. Class “S” chains are used on  
vehicles with restricted tire to vehicle clearance.  
Vehicles that can use Class “S” chains are  
designed to meet the SAE standard minimum  
clearances between the tire and the closest  
vehicle suspension or body component required  
to accommodate the use of a winter traction  
device (tire chains or cables). The minimum  
clearances are determined using the factory  
equipped tire size. Other types may damage  
Do not use tire chains on dry roads. Driving with  
tire chains in such conditions can cause damage  
to the various mechanisms of the vehicle due to  
some overstress.  
If you plan to operate your vehicle in snowy or  
icy conditions, NISSAN recommends the use of  
SNOW tires or ALL SEASON tires on all four  
wheels.  
Snow tires  
If snow tires are needed, it is necessary to select  
tires equivalent in size and load rating to the  
original equipment tires. If you do not, it can  
adversely affect the safety and handling of your  
vehicle.  
Generally, snow tires will have lower speed  
ratings than factory equipped tires and may not  
match the potential maximum vehicle speed.  
8-34 Maintenance and do-it-yourself  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Wheel nut tightening torque:  
80 ft-lb (108 N·m)  
The wheel nuts must be kept tigh-  
tened to the specification at all times.  
It is recommended that wheel nuts be  
tightened to the specification at each  
tire rotation interval.  
WARNING  
.
.
After rotating the tires, check  
and adjust the tire pressure.  
SDI1662  
SDI1663  
Retighten the wheel nuts when  
the vehicle has been driven for  
600 miles (1,000 km) (also in  
cases of a flat tire, etc.).  
1. Wear indicator  
CHANGING WHEELS AND TIRES  
2. Wear indicator location mark  
Tire wear and damage  
Tire rotation  
NISSAN recommends rotating the tires  
every 7,500 miles (12,000 km). (See “FLAT  
TIRE” in the “6. In case of emergency”  
section for tire replacing procedures.)  
.
.
Do not include the spare tire or  
any other small size spare tire in  
the tire rotation.  
WARNING  
For additional information re-  
garding tires, refer to “Important  
Tire Safety Information” (US) or  
“Tire Safety Information” (Cana-  
da) in the Warranty Information  
Booklet.  
.
Tires should be periodically in-  
spected for wear, cracking, bul-  
ging or objects caught in the  
tread. If excessive wear, cracks,  
bulging or deep cuts are found,  
the tire(s) should be replaced.  
As soon as possible, tighten the wheel  
nuts to the specified torque with a  
torque wrench.  
.
The original tires have built-in  
tread wear indicators. When  
Maintenance and do-it-yourself 8-35  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
.
When a spare tire is mounted or a  
wheel is replaced, the TPMS will not  
function and the low tire pressure  
warning light will flash for approxi-  
mately 1 minute. The light will  
remain on after 1 minute. Contact  
your NISSAN dealer as soon as  
possible for tire replacement and/  
or system resetting.  
wear indicators are visible, the  
tire(s) should be replaced.  
WARNING  
.
Tires degrade with age and use.  
Have tires, including the spare,  
over 6 years old checked by a  
qualified technician, because  
some tire damage may not be  
obvious. Replace the tires as  
necessary to prevent tire failure  
and possible personal injury.  
.
The use of tires other than those  
recommended or the mixed use of  
tires of different brands, construc-  
tion (bias, bias-belted or radial), or  
tread patterns can adversely affect  
the ride, braking, handling, ground  
clearance, body-to-tire clearance,  
tire chain clearance, speedometer  
calibration, headlight aim and bum-  
per height. Some of these effects  
may lead to accidents and could  
result in serious personal injury.  
.
.
Replacing tires with those not ori-  
ginally specified by NISSAN could  
affect the proper operation of the  
TPMS.  
.
.
Improper service of the spare  
tire may result in serious perso-  
nal injury. If it is necessary to  
repair the spare tire, contact a  
NISSAN dealer.  
Do not install a damaged or de-  
formed wheel or tire even if it has  
been repaired. Such wheels or tires  
could have structural damage and  
could fail without warning.  
.
If the wheels are changed for any  
reason, always replace with wheels  
which have the same off-set dimen-  
sion. Wheels of a different off-set  
could cause premature tire wear,  
degrade vehicle handling character-  
istics and/or interference with the  
brake discs/drums. Such interfer-  
ence can lead to decreased braking  
efficiency and/or early brake pad/  
shoe wear. See “WHEELS AND  
TIRES” in the “9. Technical and  
consumer information” section of  
this manual for wheel off-set dimen-  
sions.  
For additional information re-  
garding tires, refer to “Important  
Tire Safety Information” (US) or  
“Tire Safety Information” (Cana-  
da) in the Warranty Information  
Booklet.  
.
.
The use of retread tire is not re-  
commended.  
For additional information regard-  
ing tires, refer to “Important Tire  
Safety Information” (US) or “Tire  
Safety Information” (Canada) in the  
Warranty Information Booklet.  
Replacing wheels and tires  
When replacing a tire, use the same size, tread  
design, speed rating and load carrying capacity  
as originally equipped. (See “SPECIFICA-  
TIONS” in the “9. Technical and consumer  
information” section for recommended types  
and sizes of tires and wheels.)  
8-36 Maintenance and do-it-yourself  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Wheel balance  
.
Tire tread of the TEMPORARY USE  
ONLY spare tire will wear at a faster  
rate than the standard tire. Replace  
the spare tire as soon as the tread  
wear indicators appear.  
WARNING  
Unbalanced wheels may affect vehicle handling  
and tire life. Even with regular use, wheels can  
get out of balance. Therefore, they should be  
balanced as required.  
.
The TEMPORARY USE ONLY spare  
tire should be used for emergency  
use. It should be replaced with the  
standard tire at the first opportunity  
to avoid possible tire or differential  
damage.  
.
.
Do not use the spare tire on other  
vehicles.  
Wheel balance service should be per-  
formed with the wheels off the vehicle.  
Spin balancing the wheels on the vehicle  
could lead to mechanical damage.  
Do not use more than one spare tire  
at the same time.  
.
.
Drive carefully while the TEMPOR-  
ARY USE ONLY spare tire is in-  
stalled. Avoid sharp turns and  
abrupt braking while driving.  
For additional information regarding tires, refer  
to “Important Tire Safety Information” (US) or  
“Tire Safety Information” (Canada) in the War-  
ranty Information Booklet.  
CAUTION  
Periodically check spare tire infla-  
tion pressure. Always keep the  
pressure of the TEMPORARY USE  
ONLY spare tire at 60 psi (420 kPa,  
4.2 bar).  
.
.
Do not use tire chains on a TEM-  
PORARY USE ONLY spare tire. Tire  
chains will not fit properly and may  
cause damage to the vehicle.  
Care of wheels  
See “CLEANING EXTERIOR” in the “7. Ap-  
pearance and care” section for details about  
care of the wheels.  
Because the TEMPORARY USE  
ONLY spare tire is smaller than the  
original tire, ground clearance is  
reduced. To avoid damage to the  
vehicle, do not drive over obstacles.  
Also do not drive the vehicle  
through an automatic car wash  
since it may get caught.  
.
.
With the TEMPORARY USE ONLY  
spare tire installed do not drive your  
vehicle at speeds faster than 50  
MPH (80 km/h).  
Spare tire  
When a spare tire is mounted (TEMPORARY  
USE ONLY), the TPMS will not function.  
Observe the following precautions if the TEM-  
PORARY USE ONLY spare tire must be used,  
otherwise your vehicle could be damaged or  
involved in an accident.  
When driving on roads covered with  
snow or ice, the TEMPORARY USE  
ONLY spare tire should be used on  
the rear wheels and original tire  
used on the front wheels (drive  
wheels). Use tire chains only on  
the front (original) tires.  
Maintenance and do-it-yourself 8-37  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
MEMO  
8-38 Maintenance and do-it-yourself  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
9 Technical and consumer information  
¯
Capacities and recommended fuel/lubricants ............ 9-2  
Fuel recommendation ...................................... 9-3  
Engine oil and oil filter recommendation............... 9-5  
Air conditioning system refrigerant and lubricant  
recommendations........................................... 9-6  
Specifications.................................................... 9-7  
Engine......................................................... 9-7  
Wheels and tires............................................ 9-7  
Dimensions and weights .................................. 9-8  
For Krom models ......................................... 9-13  
Vehicle loading information ................................. 9-14  
Terms........................................................ 9-14  
Vehicle load capacity .................................... 9-15  
Securing the load......................................... 9-17  
Loading tips................................................ 9-17  
Measurement of weights ................................ 9-18  
Towing a trailer................................................ 9-18  
Flat towing ..................................................... 9-18  
Continuously Variable Transmission (CVT).......... 9-19  
Manual Transmission..................................... 9-19  
Uniform tire quality grading................................. 9-19  
Treadwear .................................................. 9-19  
Traction AA, A, B and C ................................ 9-19  
Temperature A, B and C................................ 9-19  
Emission control system warranty......................... 9-20  
Reporting safety defects (US only) ....................... 9-20  
Readiness for Inspection/Maintenance (I/M) test...... 9-21  
Event Data Recorders (EDR) .............................. 9-22  
Owner’s Manual/Service Manual order information ... 9-22  
In the event of a collision ............................... 9-22  
When traveling or registering your vehicle in  
another country.................................................. 9-8  
Vehicle identification ........................................... 9-8  
Vehicle Identification Number (VIN) plate ............. 9-8  
Vehicle identification number (chassis number)...... 9-9  
Engine serial number ...................................... 9-9  
F.M.V.S.S./C.M.V.S.S. certification label ............... 9-9  
Emission control information label .................... 9-10  
Tire and loading information label..................... 9-10  
Air conditioner specification label  
(if so equipped) ........................................... 9-10  
Installing front license plate ................................ 9-11  
¯
Except for Krom models................................. 9-11  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
CAPACITIES AND RECOMMENDED  
FUEL/LUBRICANTS  
The following are approximate capacities. The actual refill capacities may be a little different. When refilling, follow the procedure  
instructed in the “8. Maintenance and do-it-yourself” section to determine the proper refill capacity.  
Capacity (Approximate)  
Imp measure  
Recommended specifications  
US measure  
13-1/4 gal  
Liter  
50  
Fuel  
11 gal  
See “FUEL RECOMMENDATION” later in this section.  
Engine oil*1  
Drain and refill  
With oil filter change  
4-3/8 qt  
4 qt  
3-5/8 qt  
3-3/8 qt  
4.1  
3.8  
.
.
Engine oil with API Certification Mark*2  
Viscosity SAE 5W-30  
Without oil filter change  
Cooling system  
CVT model  
MT model  
7-1/2 qt  
7-1/4 qt  
6-1/4 qt  
6 qt  
7.1  
6.8  
With reservoir  
50% Genuine NISSAN Long Life Antifreeze/Coolant or equivalent  
50% Demineralized or distilled water  
Reservoir  
3/4 qt  
—
5/8 qt  
—
0.7  
—
Continuously Variable Transmission (CVT) fluid  
Manual Transmission (MT) gear oil  
Brake and clutch fluid  
Genuine NISSAN CVT Fluid NS-2*3  
—
—
—
Genuine NISSAN gear oil (Chevron Texaco ETL8997B) 75W-80 or equivalent*4  
Genuine NISSAN Super Heavy Duty Brake Fluid*5 or equivalent DOT 3  
NLGI No. 2 (Lithium soap base)  
Refill to the proper oil level according to the instructions in  
the “8. Maintenance and do-it-yourself” section.  
Multi-purpose grease  
—
—
—
—
—
—
Air conditioning system refrigerant  
Air conditioning system lubricants  
Window washer fluid  
HFC-134a (R-134a)*6  
—
—
—
NISSAN A/C System Oil Type R or exact equivalent  
Genuine NISSAN Windshield Washer Concentrate Cleaner & Antifreeze or equivalent  
1-1/4 gal  
1 gal  
4.5  
*1: For additional information, see “ENGINE OIL” in the “8. Maintenance and do-it-yourself” section for changing engine oil.  
*2: For additional information, see “ENGINE OIL AND OIL FILTER RECOMMENDATION” later in this section.  
*3: Use only Genuine NISSAN CVT Fluid NS-2. Using transmission fluid other than Genuine NISSAN CVT Fluid NS-2 will damage the CVT, which is not covered by the NISSAN new vehicle limited  
warranty.  
*4: If Genuine NISSAN gear oil is not available, API GL-4, Viscosity SAE 75W-80 may be used as a temporary replacement. Replace with Genuine NISSAN gear oil as soon as it is available.  
*5: Available in mainland U.S.A. through a NISSAN dealer.  
*6: For additional information, see “VEHICLE IDENTIFICATION” later in this section for air conditioner specification label.  
9-2 Technical and consumer information  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
and vehicle performance. Ask your service  
station manager if the gasoline meets the  
WWFC specifications.  
(MTBE may, however, be added up to  
15%.)  
FUEL RECOMMENDATION  
Use unleaded regular gasoline with an octane  
rating of at least 87 AKI (Anti-Knock Index)  
number (Research octane number 91).  
.
If a methanol blend is used, it should  
contain no more than 5% methanol  
(methyl alcohol, wood alcohol). It  
should also contain a suitable amount  
of appropriate cosolvents and corro-  
sion inhibitors. If not properly formu-  
lated with appropriate cosolvents and  
corrosion inhibitors, such methanol  
blends may cause fuel system damage  
and/or vehicle performance problems.  
At this time, sufficient data is not  
available to ensure that all methanol  
blends are suitable for use in NISSAN  
vehicles.  
Reformulated gasoline  
Some fuel suppliers are now producing refor-  
mulated gasolines. These gasolines are specially  
designed to reduce vehicle emissions. NISSAN  
supports efforts towards cleaner air and sug-  
gests that you use reformulated gasoline when  
available.  
CAUTION  
.
.
.
Using a fuel other than that speci-  
fied could adversely affect the emis-  
sion control system, and may also  
affect warranty coverage.  
Gasoline containing oxygenates  
Under no circumstances should a  
leaded gasoline be used, because  
this will damage the three-way cat-  
alyst.  
Some fuel suppliers sell gasoline containing  
oxygenates such as ethanol, MTBE and metha-  
nol with or without advertising their presence.  
NISSAN does not recommend the use of fuels  
of which the oxygenate content and the fuel  
compatibility for your NISSAN cannot be readily  
determined. If in doubt, ask your service station  
manager.  
If any driveability problems such as engine  
stalling and difficult hot-starting are experienced  
after using oxygenate-blend fuels, immediately  
change to a non-oxygenate fuel or a fuel with a  
low blend of MTBE.  
Do not use E-85 fuel in your vehicle.  
Your vehicle is not designed to run  
on E-85 fuel. Using E-85 fuel can  
damage the fuel system compo-  
nents and is not covered by the  
NISSAN new vehicle limited war-  
ranty.  
If you use oxygenate-blend gasoline, please take  
the following precautions as the usage of such  
fuels may cause vehicle performance problems  
and/or fuel system damage.  
Take care not to spill gasoline during  
refueling. Gasoline containing oxygenates  
can cause paint damage.  
Gasoline specifications  
.
The fuel should be unleaded and have  
an octane rating no lower than that  
recommended for unleaded gasoline.  
E-85 fuel  
NISSAN recommends using gasoline that meets  
the World-Wide Fuel Charter (WWFC) speci-  
fications where it is available. Many of the  
automobile manufacturers developed this spe-  
cification to improve emission control system  
E-85 fuel is a mixture of approximately 85% fuel  
ethanol and 15% unleaded gasoline. E-85 can  
only be used in a Flexible Fuel Vehicle (FFV). Do  
not use E-85 fuel in your vehicle. U.S. govern-  
ment regulations require fuel ethanol dispensing  
.
If an oxygenate-blend, other than  
methanol blend is used, it should  
contain no more than 10% oxygenate.  
Technical and consumer information 9-3  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
pumps to be identified by a small, square,  
orange and black label with the common  
abbreviation or the appropriate percentage for  
that region.  
damage. If any of the above symptoms are  
encountered, have your vehicle checked at a  
NISSAN dealer.  
However, now and then you may notice  
light spark knock for a short time while  
accelerating or driving up hills. This is not a  
cause for concern, because you get the  
greatest fuel benefit when there is light  
spark knock for a short time under heavy  
engine load.  
Aftermarket fuel additives  
NISSAN does not recommend the use of any  
aftermarket fuel additives (for example, fuel  
injector cleaner, octane booster, intake valve  
deposit removers, etc.) which are sold commer-  
cially. Many of these additives intended for gum,  
varnish or deposit removal may contain active  
solvent or similar ingredients that can be harmful  
to the fuel system and engine.  
CAUTION  
.
Your vehicle is not designed to run  
on E-85 fuel. Using E-85 fuel in a  
vehicle not specifically designed for  
E-85 fuel can damage fuel system  
components and is not covered by  
the NISSAN new vehicle limited  
warranty.  
Octane rating tips  
Using unleaded gasoline with an octane  
rating lower than recommended can cause  
persistent, heavy “spark knock”. (Spark  
knock is a metallic rapping noise.) If  
severe, this can lead to engine damage. If  
you detect a persistent heavy spark knock  
even when using gasoline of the stated  
octane rating, or if you hear steady spark  
knock while holding a steady speed on  
level roads, have a NISSAN dealer correct  
the condition. Failure to correct the condi-  
tion is misuse of the vehicle, for which  
NISSAN is not responsible.  
.
.
E-85 is a mixture of approximately  
85% fuel ethanol and 15% unleaded  
gasoline.  
U.S. government regulations require  
ethanol dispensing pumps to be  
identified by a small, square, orange  
and black label with the common  
abbreviation or the appropriate per-  
centage for that region.  
Incorrect ignition timing will result in spark  
knock, after-run and/or overheating, which may  
cause excessive fuel consumption or engine  
9-4 Technical and consumer information  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Oil viscosity  
The engine oil viscosity or thickness changes  
with temperature. Because of this, it is important  
to select the engine oil viscosity based on the  
temperatures at which the vehicle will be  
operated before the next oil change. Choosing  
an oil viscosity other than that recommended  
could cause serious engine damage.  
Selecting the correct oil filter  
Your new NISSAN vehicle is equipped with a  
high-quality genuine NISSAN oil filter. When  
replacing, use a genuine NISSAN oil filter or its  
equivalent for the reason described in “Change  
intervals”.  
STI0505  
1. API certification mark  
2. API service symbol  
tional Lubricant Standardization and Approval  
Committee (ILSAC) certification and SAE vis-  
cosity standard. These oils have the API  
certification mark on the front of the container.  
Oils which do not have the specified quality  
label should not be used as they could cause  
engine damage.  
Change intervals  
The oil and oil filter change intervals for your  
engine are based on the use of the specified  
quality oils and filters. Using an engine oil and  
filter other than the specified quality, or exceed-  
ing recommended oil and filter change intervals  
could reduce engine life. Damage to the engine  
caused by improper maintenance or use of  
incorrect oil and filter quality and/or viscosity is  
not covered by the NISSAN new vehicle limited  
warranty.  
ENGINE OIL AND OIL FILTER RE-  
COMMENDATION  
Selecting the correct oil  
It is essential to choose the correct grade,  
quality, and viscosity engine oil to ensure  
satisfactory engine life and performance, see  
“CAPACITIES AND RECOMMENDED FUEL/  
LUBRICANTS” earlier in this section. NISSAN  
recommends the use of an energy conserving oil  
in order to improve fuel economy.  
Oil additives  
NISSAN does not recommend the use of oil  
additives. The use of an oil additive is not  
necessary when the proper oil type is used and  
maintenance intervals are followed.  
Your engine was filled with a high quality engine  
oil when it was built. You do not have to change  
the oil before the first recommended change  
interval. Oil and filter change intervals depend  
Oil which may contain foreign matter or has  
been previously used should not be used.  
Select only engine oils that meet the American  
Petroleum Institute (API) certification or Interna-  
Technical and consumer information 9-5  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
upon how you use your vehicle.  
The refrigerant HFC-134a (R-134a) in your  
NISSAN vehicle will not harm the earth’s ozone  
layer. Although this refrigerant does not affect  
the earth’s atmosphere, certain governmental  
regulations require the recovery and recycling of  
any refrigerant during automotive air condition-  
ing system service. A NISSAN dealer has the  
trained technicians and equipment needed to  
recover and recycle your air conditioning system  
refrigerant.  
Operation under the following conditions may  
require more frequent oil and filter changes.  
.
repeated short distance driving at cold  
outside temperatures  
.
.
.
driving in dusty conditions  
extensive idling  
stop and go commuting  
Contact a NISSAN dealer when servicing your  
air conditioning system.  
Refer to the “NISSAN Service and Maintenance  
Guide” for the maintenance schedule.  
AIR CONDITIONING SYSTEM RE-  
FRIGERANT AND LUBRICANT RE-  
COMMENDATIONS  
The air conditioning system in your  
NISSAN vehicle must be charged with the  
refrigerant HFC-134a (R-134a) and the oil,  
NISSAN A/C system oil Type R or the exact  
equivalents.  
CAUTION  
The use of any other refrigerant or oil  
will cause severe damage to the air  
conditioning system and will require  
the replacement of all air conditioner  
system components.  
9-6 Technical and consumer information  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
SPECIFICATIONS  
WHEELS AND TIRES  
Road wheel  
ENGINE  
Model  
MR18DE  
Type  
Size  
Offset in (mm)  
1.65 (42)  
Type  
Gasoline, 4-cycle, DOHC  
4-cylinder, in-line  
3.307 6 3.193 (84.0 6 81.1)  
109.65 (1,798)  
Cylinder arrangement  
Bore 6 Stroke  
Displacement  
Firing order  
Steel  
15 6 6J  
16 6 6J  
15 6 4T  
in (mm)  
cu in (cm3)  
Aluminum  
T-type  
1.65 (42)  
1.38 (35)  
1-3-4-2  
Tire  
Idle speed  
rpm  
No adjustment is necessary.  
Ignition timing (B.T.D.C.)  
Spark plug  
degree/rpm  
Standard  
in (mm)  
Pressure PSI  
(kPa) [Cold]  
Type  
Size  
FXE20HR-11  
0.043 (1.1)  
Timing chain  
P195/60R15  
87H  
Spark plug gap (Normal)  
Camshaft operation  
Conventional  
T-type  
33 (230)  
60 (420)  
P195/55R16  
86V  
This spark ignition system complies with the Canadian standard ICES-002.  
T125/70D15  
Technical and consumer information 9-7  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
WHEN TRAVELING OR  
REGISTERING YOUR VEHICLE IN  
ANOTHER COUNTRY  
VEHICLE IDENTIFICATION  
When planning to travel in another coun-  
try, you should first find out if the fuel available is  
suitable for your vehicle’s engine.  
DIMENSIONS AND WEIGHTS  
Overall length  
in (mm)  
156.7 (3,980)*1  
156.5 (3,975)*2  
157.8 (4,010)*1, *3  
157.5 (4,000)*2, *3  
Using fuel with an octane rating that is too low  
may cause engine damage. All gasoline vehicles  
must be operated with unleaded gasoline.  
Therefore, avoid taking your vehicle to areas  
where appropriate fuel is not available.  
Overall width  
Overall height  
in (mm) 66.7 (1,695)  
in (mm)  
66.1 (1,680)  
65.0 (1,650)*3  
When transferring the registration of your  
vehicle to another country, state, province  
or district, it may be necessary to modify the  
vehicle to meet local laws and regulations.  
Front tread  
in (mm) 58.1 (1,475)  
in (mm) 58.3 (1,480)  
Rear tread  
Wheelbase  
in (mm)  
99.6 (2,530)  
Gross Vehicle  
Weight Rating  
(GVWR)  
The laws and regulations for motor vehicle  
emission control and safety standards vary  
according to the country, state, province or  
district; therefore, vehicle specifications may  
differ.  
lb (kg)  
STI0457  
See the F.M.V.S.S. or  
C.M.V.S.S. certification  
label on the driver’s  
side center pillar.  
VEHICLE IDENTIFICATION NUMBER  
(VIN) PLATE  
Gross Axle  
Weight Rating  
(GAWR)  
The vehicle identification number plate is at-  
tached as shown. This number is the identifica-  
tion for your vehicle and is used in the vehicle  
registration.  
When any vehicle is to be taken into  
another country, state, province or district  
and registered, its modifications, transpor-  
tation, and registration are the responsi-  
bility of the user. NISSAN is not  
responsible for any inconvenience that  
may result.  
Front  
Rear  
lb (kg)  
lb (kg)  
*1: With front license plate bracket  
*2: Without front license plate bracket  
¯
*3: Krom model  
9-8 Technical and consumer information  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
STI0637  
STI0466  
STI0448  
VEHICLE IDENTIFICATION NUMBER  
(chassis number)  
ENGINE SERIAL NUMBER  
F.M.V.S.S./C.M.V.S.S. CERTIFICATION  
LABEL  
The number is stamped on the engine as shown.  
The vehicle identification number is located as  
shown.  
The Federal/Canadian Motor Vehicle Safety  
Standards (F.M.V.S.S./C.M.V.S.S.) certification  
label is affixed as shown. This label contains  
valuable vehicle information, such as: Gross  
Vehicle Weight Ratings (GVWR), Gross Axle  
Weight Rating (GAWR), month and year of  
manufacture, Vehicle Identification Number  
(VIN), etc. Review it carefully.  
Remove the cover to access the number.  
Technical and consumer information 9-9  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
STI0638  
STI0494  
STI0639  
EMISSION CONTROL INFORMATION  
LABEL  
TIRE AND LOADING INFORMATION  
LABEL  
AIR CONDITIONER SPECIFICATION  
LABEL (if so equipped)  
The emission control information label is at-  
tached to the underside of the hood as shown.  
The cold tire pressure is shown on the Tire and  
Loading Information label affixed to the pillar as  
shown.  
The air conditioner specification label is at-  
tached to the underside of the hood as shown.  
9-10 Technical and consumer information  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
INSTALLING FRONT LICENSE PLATE  
¯
EXCEPT FOR Krom MODELS  
Use the following steps to mount the license  
plate:  
Before mounting the license plate, confirm that  
the following parts are enclosed in the plastic  
bag.  
.
.
.
.
License plate bracket  
J-nut 6 2  
Screw 6 2  
Screw grommet 6 2  
1. Park the vehicle on flat, level ground.  
A
2. Locate the center position  
on the lower  
*
part of the air duct. Measure straight down  
from the edge where the bumper and air  
B
duct meet to the aligning holes  
, keeping  
*
the tape measure lined up with the center  
position.  
B
*
3. Mark the holes  
with a felt-tip pen.  
B
4. Carefully drill the two aligning holes  
*
using a 0.39 in (10 mm) drill bit at the  
marked locations. (Be sure that the drill  
only goes through the bumper fascia.)  
C
5. Line up the bosses  
or license plate  
*
bracket with the holes and hold the license  
plate bracket in place.  
STI0647  
Technical and consumer information 9-11  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
D
*
6. Mark the center of the holes  
tip pen.  
with a felt-  
7. Carefully drill the two pilot holes using a  
0.39 in (10 mm) drill bit at the marked  
locations. (Be sure that the drill only  
goes through the bumper fascia.)  
8. Insert grommets into the hole on the fascia.  
9. Insert a flat-blade screwdriver into the  
grommet hole to add a 908 turn onto the  
E
*
part  
.
10. Insert a J-nut into the license plate bracket  
before placing the license plate bracket on  
the fascia.  
11. Install the license plate bracket with the  
screws.  
12. Install the license plate with bolts that are  
not longer than 0.55 in (14 mm).  
9-12 Technical and consumer information  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
¯
FOR Krom MODELS  
Use the following steps to mount the license  
plate:  
Before mounting the license plate, confirm that  
the following parts are enclosed in the vinyl bag.  
.
.
.
.
License plate bracket  
J-nut 6 2  
Screw 6 4  
Screw grommet 6 4  
1. Park the vehicle on flat, level ground.  
2. Temporarily place the license plate bracket  
A
while aligning points  
of the front bumper  
in the license plate  
*
B
fascia with holes  
bracket.  
*
A
B
3. Confirm that points  
and  
are aligned.  
*
*
Hold the license plate bracket and mark the  
C
points  
on the bumper facia through the  
*
D
center of the holes  
with a felt-tip pen.  
*
4. Remove the license plate bracket.  
A
5. Carefully drill two shallow pilot holes  
*
C
and  
using a 0.39 in (10 mm) drill bit at  
*
the marked locations. (Be sure that the  
drill only goes through the fascia, or  
damage to the nut may occur.)  
STI0648  
6. Insert grommets into the hole on the fascia.  
Technical and consumer information 9-13  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
VEHICLE LOADING INFORMATION  
7. Insert a flat-blade screwdriver into the  
.
.
GVWR (Gross Vehicle Weight Rating)  
- maximum total combined weight of the  
unloaded vehicle, passengers, luggage,  
hitch, trailer tongue load and any other  
optional equipment. This information is  
located on the F.M.V.S.S./C.M.V.S.S.  
label.  
grommet hole to add a 908 turn onto the  
WARNING  
E
*
part  
.
.
It is extremely dangerous to ride  
in a cargo area inside the vehi-  
cle. In a collision, people riding  
in these areas are more likely to  
be seriously injured or killed.  
8. Insert a J-nut into the license plate bracket  
before placing the license plate bracket on  
the fascia.  
9. Install the license plate bracket with the  
screws.  
GAWR (Gross Axle Weight Rating) -  
maximum weight (load) limit specified  
for the front or rear axle. This informa-  
tion is located on the F.M.V.S.S./C.M.V.  
S.S. label.  
.
.
Do not allow people to ride in  
any area of your vehicle that is  
not equipped with seats and  
seat belts.  
10. Install the license plate with bolts that are  
not longer than 0.55 in (14 mm).  
Be sure everyone in your vehicle  
is in a seat and using a seat belt  
properly.  
.
.
GCWR (Gross Combined Weight Rat-  
ing) - The maximum total weight rating  
of the vehicle, passengers, cargo, and  
trailer.  
TERMS  
Vehicle Capacity Weight, Load limit,  
Total load capacity - maximum total  
weight limit specified of the load  
(passengers and cargo) for the vehicle.  
This is the maximum combined weight  
of occupants and cargo that can be  
loaded into the vehicle. If the vehicle is  
used to tow a trailer, the trailer tongue  
weight must be included as part of the  
cargo load. This information is located  
on the Tire and Loading Information  
label.  
It is important to familiarize yourself with the  
following terms before loading your vehicle:  
.
Curb Weight (actual weight of your  
vehicle) - vehicle weight including:  
standard and optional equipment,  
fluids, emergency tools, and spare tire  
assembly. This weight does not in-  
clude passengers and cargo.  
.
GVW (Gross Vehicle Weight) - curb  
weight plus the combined weight of  
passengers and cargo.  
9-14 Technical and consumer information  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
.
Cargo capacity - permissible weight of  
cargo, the subtracted weight of occu-  
pants from the load limit.  
VEHICLE LOAD CAPACITY  
Do not exceed the load limit of your vehicle  
shown as “The combined weight of occu-  
pants and cargo” on the Tire and Loading  
Information label. Do not exceed the  
number of occupants shown as “Seating  
Capacity” on the Tire and Loading Informa-  
tion label.  
To get “the combined weight of occupants  
and cargo”, add the weight of all occu-  
pants, then add the total luggage weight.  
Examples are shown in the following  
illustration.  
Technical and consumer information 9-15  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
4. The resulting figure equals the available  
amount of cargo and luggage load  
capacity. For example, if the XXX  
amount equals 1400 lbs. and there will  
be five 150 lb. passengers in your  
vehicle, the amount of available cargo  
and luggage load capacity is 650 lbs.  
(1400 − 750 (5 x 150) = 650 lbs) or  
(640 − 340 (5 x 70) = 300 kg.)  
5. Determine the combined weight of  
luggage and cargo being loaded on  
the vehicle. That weight may not safely  
exceed the available cargo and luggage  
load capacity calculated in Step 4.  
Before driving a loaded vehicle, confirm  
that you do not exceed the Gross Vehicle  
Weight Rating (GVWR) or the Gross Axle  
Weight Rating (GAWR) for your vehicle.  
(See “MEASUREMENT OF WEIGHTS”  
later in this section.)  
STI0447  
Also check tires for proper inflation pres-  
sures. See the Tire and Loading Information  
label.  
2. Determine the combined weight of the  
driver and passengers that will be riding  
in your vehicle.  
Steps for determining correct load limit  
1. Locate the statement “The combined  
weight of occupants and cargo should  
never exceed XXX kg or XXX lbs” on  
your vehicle’s placard.  
3. Subtract the combined weight of the  
driver and passengers from XXX kg or  
XXX lbs.  
9-16 Technical and consumer information  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
a sudden stop or collision, unse-  
cured cargo could cause personal  
injury.  
WARNING  
.
.
Properly secure all cargo with  
ropes or straps to help prevent it  
from sliding or shifting. Do not  
place cargo higher than the  
seatbacks. In a sudden stop or  
collision, unsecured cargo could  
cause personal injury.  
.
.
The child restraint top tether strap  
may be damaged by contact with  
items in the cargo area. Secure any  
items in the cargo area. Your child  
could be seriously injured or killed  
in a collision if the top tether strap is  
damaged.  
Do not load your vehicle any  
heavier than the GVWR or the  
maximum front and rear  
GAWRs. If you do, parts of your  
vehicle can break, tire damage  
could occur, or it can change the  
way your vehicle handles. This  
could result in loss of control  
and cause personal injury.  
Do not load your vehicle any heavier  
than the GVWR or the maximum  
front and rear GAWRs. If you do,  
parts of your vehicle can break, tire  
damage could occur, or it can  
change the way your vehicle han-  
dles. This could result in loss of  
control and cause personal injury.  
SIC4141  
SECURING THE LOAD  
There are tie down hooks located in the cargo  
area as shown. The tie down hooks can be used  
to secure cargo with ropes or other types of  
straps.  
.
Overloading not only can short-  
en the life of your vehicle and  
the tire, but can cause unsafe  
vehicle handling and longer  
braking distances. This may  
cause a premature tire failure,  
which could result in a serious  
accident and personal injury.  
Failures caused by overloading  
are not covered by the vehicle’s  
LOADING TIPS  
Do not apply a total load of more than 7 lb  
.
The GVW must not exceed GVWR or  
GAWR as specified on the F.M.V.S.S./  
C.M.V.S.S. certification label.  
A
(3 kg) to a single hook  
or 22 lb (10 kg)  
*
B
to a single hook  
when securing cargo.  
*
WARNING  
.
Do not load the front and rear axle to  
the GAWR. Doing so will exceed the  
GVWR.  
.
Properly secure all cargo with ropes  
or straps to help prevent it from  
sliding or shifting. Do not place  
cargo higher than the seatbacks. In  
Technical and consumer information 9-17  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
TOWING A TRAILER  
FLAT TOWING  
Do not tow a trailer with your vehicle.  
Towing your vehicle with all four wheels on the  
ground is sometimes called flat towing. This  
method is sometimes used when towing a  
vehicle behind a recreational vehicle, such as a  
motor home.  
warranty.  
MEASUREMENT OF WEIGHTS  
Secure loose items to prevent weight shifts  
that could affect the balance of your  
vehicle. When the vehicle is loaded, drive  
to a scale and weigh the front and the rear  
wheels separately to determine axle loads.  
Individual axle loads should not exceed  
either of the Gross Axle Weight Ratings  
(GAWR). The total of the axle loads should  
not exceed the Gross Vehicle Weight  
Rating (GVWR). These ratings are given  
on the vehicle certification label. If weight  
ratings are exceeded, move or remove  
items to bring all weights below the ratings.  
CAUTION  
.
.
.
Failure to follow these guidelines  
can result in severe transmission  
damage.  
Whenever flat towing your vehicle,  
always tow forward, never back-  
ward.  
DO NOT tow any Continuously Vari-  
able Transmission (CVT) vehicle  
with all four wheels on the ground  
(flat towing). Doing so WILL DA-  
MAGE internal transmission parts  
due to lack of transmission lubrica-  
tion.  
.
For emergency towing procedures  
refer to “TOWING YOUR VEHICLE”  
in the “6. In case of emergency”  
section of this manual.  
9-18 Technical and consumer information  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
UNIFORM TIRE QUALITY GRADING  
DOT (Department Of Transportation) Quality  
Grades: All passenger car tires must conform to  
federal safety requirements in addition to these  
grades.  
CONTINUOUSLY VARIABLE TRANS-  
MISSION (CVT)  
WARNING  
To tow a vehicle equipped with a Continuously  
Variable Transmission (CVT), an appropriate  
vehicle dolly MUST be placed under the towed  
vehicle’s driving wheels. Always follow the dolly  
manufacturer’s recommendations when using  
their product.  
The traction grade assigned to this tire  
is based on straight-ahead braking  
traction tests, and does not include  
acceleration, cornering, hydroplaning,  
or peak traction characteristics.  
Quality grades can be found where applicable  
on the tire sidewall between tread shoulder and  
maximum section width. For example:  
Treadwear 200 Traction AA Temperature A  
TEMPERATURE A, B AND C  
MANUAL TRANSMISSION  
TREADWEAR  
The temperature grades A (the highest), B, and  
C, representing the tire’s resistance to the  
generation of heat and its ability to dissipate  
heat when tested under controlled conditions on  
a specified indoor laboratory test wheel. Sus-  
tained high temperature can cause the material  
of the tire to degenerate and reduce tire life, and  
excessive temperature can lead to sudden tire  
failure. The grade C corresponds to a level of  
performance which all passenger car tires must  
meet under the Federal Motor Vehicle Safety  
Standard No. 109. Grades B and A represent  
higher levels of performance on the laboratory  
test wheel than the minimum required by law.  
.
Always tow with the manual transmission in  
Neutral.  
The treadwear grade is a comparative rating  
based on the wear rate of the tire when tested  
under controlled conditions on a specified  
government test course. For example, a tire  
graded 150 would wear one and one-half  
(1 1/2) times as well on the government course  
as a tire graded 100. The relative performance  
of tires depends upon actual conditions of their  
use, however, and may depart significantly from  
the norm due to variations in driving habits,  
service practices and differences in road char-  
acteristics and climate.  
.
Your vehicle speed should never exceed 70  
MPH (112 km/h) when flat towing your  
vehicle.  
.
After towing 500 miles, start and idle the  
engine with the transmission in Neutral for  
two minutes. Failure to idle the engine after  
every 500 miles of towing may cause  
damage to the transmission’s internal parts.  
TRACTION AA, A, B AND C  
The traction grades, from highest to lowest, are  
AA, A, B and C. Those grades represent the  
tire’s ability to stop on wet pavement as  
measured under controlled conditions on spe-  
cified government test surfaces of asphalt and  
concrete. A tire marked C may have poor  
traction performance.  
WARNING  
The temperature grade for this tire is  
established for a tire that is properly  
inflated and not overloaded. Excessive  
speed, under-inflation, or excessive  
Technical and consumer information 9-19  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
EMISSION CONTROL SYSTEM  
WARRANTY  
REPORTING SAFETY DEFECTS (US  
only)  
Your NISSAN is covered by the following  
emission warranties.  
If you believe that your vehicle has a defect  
which could cause a crash or could cause  
injury or death, you should immediately  
inform the National Highway Traffic Safety  
Administration (NHTSA) in addition to  
notifying NISSAN.  
loading, either separately or in combi-  
nation, can cause heat build-up and  
possible tire failure.  
For US:  
.
.
Emission Defects Warranty  
Emissions Performance Warranty  
If NHTSA receives similar complaints, it  
may open an investigation, and if it finds  
that a safety defect exists in a group of  
vehicles, it may order a recall and remedy  
campaign. However, NHTSA cannot be-  
come involved in individual problems be-  
tween you, your dealer, or NISSAN.  
Details of these warranties may be found with  
other vehicle warranties in your Warranty In-  
formation Booklet which comes with your  
NISSAN. If you did not receive a Warranty  
Information Booklet, or it has become lost, you  
may obtain a replacement by writing to:  
.
Nissan North America, Inc.  
Consumer Affairs Department  
P.O. Box 685003  
To contact NHTSA, you may call the  
Vehicle Safety Hotline toll-free at 1-888-  
327-4236 (TTY: 1-800-424-9153); go to  
http://www.safercar.gov; or write to: Ad-  
ministrator, NHTSA, 400 Seventh Street,  
SW., Washington, D.C. 20590. You can  
also obtain other information about motor  
vehicle safety from http://www.safercar.  
gov.  
Franklin, TN 37068-5003  
For Canada:  
Emission Control System Warranty  
Details of this warranty may be found with other  
vehicle warranties in your Warranty Information  
Booklet which comes with your NISSAN. If you  
did not receive a Warranty Information Booklet,  
or it has become lost, you may obtain a  
replacement by writing to:  
You may notify NISSAN by contacting our  
Consumer Affairs Department, toll-free, at  
1-800-NISSAN-1 (1-800-647-7261).  
.
Nissan Canada Inc.  
5290 Orbitor Drive  
Mississauga, Ontario,  
L4W 4Z5  
9-20 Technical and consumer information  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
READINESS FOR INSPECTION/  
MAINTENANCE (I/M) TEST  
Due to legal requirements in some states/areas  
or provinces, your vehicle may be required to be  
in what is called the “ready condition” for an  
Inspection/Maintenance (I/M) test of the emis-  
sion control system.  
Continuously Variable Transmission models)  
or the shift lever in the N (Neutral) position  
(for Manual Transmission models).  
WARNING  
Always drive the vehicle in a safe and  
prudent manner according to traffic  
conditions and obey all traffic laws.  
9. Turn the engine off.  
10. Repeat steps 1 through 8 at least one more  
time.  
The vehicle is set to the “ready condition” when  
it is driven through certain driving patterns.  
Usually, the “ready condition” can be obtained  
by ordinary usage of the vehicle.  
1. Start the engine. Allow the engine to idle  
until the engine coolant temperature gauge  
needle points between the C and H (normal  
operating temperature).  
If step 1 through 7 is interrupted, repeat the  
preceding step. Any safe driving mode is  
acceptable between steps. Do not stop the  
engine until step 7 is completed.  
If a powertrain system component is repaired or  
the battery is disconnected, the vehicle may be  
reset to a “not ready condition”. Before taking  
the I/M test, check the vehicle’s inspection/  
maintenance test readiness condition. Place the  
ignition switch in the ON position without  
starting the engine. If the Malfunction Indicator  
Light (MIL) comes on steady for 20 seconds and  
then blinks for 10 seconds, the I/M test  
condition is “not ready”. If the MIL does not  
blink after 20 seconds, the I/M test condition is  
“ready”.  
2. Accelerate the vehicle to 55 MPH (88  
km/h), then quickly release the accelerator  
pedal completely and keep it released for at  
least 10 seconds.  
3. Quickly depress the accelerator pedal for a  
moment, then drive the vehicle at a speed of  
53 to 60 MPH (86 to 96 km/h) for at least 9  
minutes.  
4. Stop the vehicle. Leave the engine running.  
5. Accelerate the vehicle to 35 MPH (55 km/h)  
and maintain the speed for 20 seconds.  
If the MIL indicates the vehicle is in a “not ready”  
condition, drive the vehicle through the following  
pattern to set the vehicle to the “ready condi-  
tion”. If you cannot or do not want to perform the  
driving pattern, a NISSAN dealer can conduct it  
for you.  
6. Repeat steps 4 and 5 at least 10 times.  
7. Accelerate the vehicle to 55 MPH (88 km/h)  
and maintain the speed for at least 3  
minutes.  
8. Stop the vehicle. Place the transmission  
selector lever in the P (Park) position (for  
Technical and consumer information 9-21  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
OWNER’S MANUAL/SERVICE  
MANUAL ORDER INFORMATION  
EVENT DATA RECORDERS (EDR)  
This vehicle is equipped with an Event Data  
Recorder (EDR). The main purpose of an EDR is  
to record, in certain crash or near crash-like  
situations, such as an air bag deployment or  
hitting a road obstacle, data that will assist in  
understanding how a vehicle’s systems per-  
formed. The EDR is designed to record data  
related to vehicle dynamics and safety systems  
for a short period of time, typically 30 seconds  
or less. The EDR in this vehicle is designed to  
record such data as:  
Genuine NISSAN Service Manuals for this  
model year and prior can be purchased. A  
genuine NISSAN Service Manual is the best  
source of service and repair information for your  
vehicle. This manual is the same one used by the  
factory trained technicians working at a NISSAN  
dealer. Genuine NISSAN Owner’s Manuals can  
also be purchased.  
ment, could combine the EDR data with the type  
of personally identifying data routinely acquired  
during a crash investigation.  
To read data recorded by an EDR, special  
equipment is required and access to the vehicle  
or the EDR is needed. In addition to the vehicle  
manufacturer and NISSAN dealer, other parties,  
such as law enforcement, that have the special  
equipment, can read the information if they have  
access to the vehicle or the EDR. EDR data will  
only be accessed with the consent of the vehicle  
owner or lessee or as otherwise required or  
permitted by law.  
In the USA:  
For current pricing and availability of genuine  
NISSAN Service Manuals contact:  
.
.
.
How various systems in your vehicle were  
operating;  
1-800-450-9491  
www.nissan-techinfo.com  
Whether or not the driver and passenger  
safety belts were buckled/fastened;  
For current pricing and availability of genuine  
NISSAN Owner’s Manuals contact:  
How far (if at all) the driver was depressing  
the accelerator and/or brake pedal; and,  
1-800-247-5321  
In Canada:  
.
.
How fast the vehicle was traveling.  
Sounds are not recorded.  
To purchase a copy of a genuine NISSAN  
Service Manual or Owner’s Manual for this  
model year and prior please contact a NISSAN  
dealer. For the phone number and location of a  
NISSAN dealer in your area call the NISSAN  
Information Center at 1-800-387-0122 and a  
bilingual NISSAN representative will assist you.  
These data can help provide a better under-  
standing of the circumstances in which crashes  
and injuries occur.  
NOTE: EDR data are recorded by your vehicle  
only if a nontrivial crash situation occurs; no data  
are recorded by the EDR under normal driving  
conditions and no personal data (e.g. name,  
gender, age and crash location) are recorded.  
However, other parties, such as law enforce-  
IN THE EVENT OF A COLLISION  
Unfortunately, accidents do occur. In this  
unlikely event, there is some important informa-  
9-22 Technical and consumer information  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
tion you should know.  
Why should you take a chance?  
In over 40 states, the law says you must be  
advised if non-genuine parts are used to repair  
your vehicle. And some states have enacted  
laws that restrict insurance companies from  
authorizing the use of non-genuine collision  
parts during the new vehicle warranty. These  
laws help protect you, so you can take action to  
protect yourself.  
Many insurance companies routinely authorize  
the use of non-genuine collision parts in order to  
cut costs, among other reasons.  
Insist on the use of Genuine NISSAN  
Collision Parts!  
If you want your vehicle to be restored using  
parts made to NISSAN’s original exacting  
specifications — if you want to help it to last  
and hold its resale value, the solution is simple.  
Tell your insurance agent and your repair  
shop to only use Genuine NISSAN Colli-  
sion Parts. NISSAN does not warrant non-  
NISSAN parts, nor does NISSAN’s warranty  
apply to damage caused by a non-genuine part.  
It’s your right!  
If you should need further information visit us at:  
www.nissanusa.com (for U.S. customers) or  
www.nissan.ca (for Canadian customers)  
Using Genuine NISSAN Parts can help protect  
your personal safety, preserve your warranty  
protection and maintain the resale value of your  
vehicle. And if your vehicle was leased, using  
Genuine NISSAN Parts may prevent or limit  
unnecessary excess wear and tear expenses at  
the end of your lease.  
NISSAN designs its hoods with crumple zones  
to minimize the risk that the hood will penetrate  
the windshield of your vehicle in an accident.  
Non-genuine (imitation) parts may not provide  
such built-in safeguards. Also, non-genuine  
parts often show premature wear, rust and  
corrosion.  
Technical and consumer information 9-23  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
MEMO  
9-24 Technical and consumer information  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
10 Index  
Audio system. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-13  
Steering wheel audio controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-41  
Autolight system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-24  
Automatic  
Air conditioner. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-10  
Door locks. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-5  
Average fuel consumption. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-9  
Average speed . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-9  
Avoiding collision and rollover . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-5  
A
C
ABS (Anti-lock Braking System). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-26  
Advanced air bag system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-50  
Air bag system  
Cabin air filter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-12  
Capacities and recommended fuel/lubricants . . . . . 9-2  
Car phone or CB radio. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-44  
Cargo light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-40  
Catalytic converter, Three way catalyst . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-2  
CD care and cleaning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-41  
Ceiling light. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-39  
Child restraints. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-23  
Booster seats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-39  
Installation using LATCH . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-28  
Installation using the seat belts. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-33  
Precautions on child restraints. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-23  
Top tether strap . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-26  
Child safety. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-15  
Child safety rear door lock. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-6  
Chimes, Audible reminders . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-17  
Circuit breaker, Fusible link . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-21  
Cleaning exterior and interior . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-2, 7-5  
Clock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-28  
Clutch fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-11  
Cockpit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-2  
Cold weather driving . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-29  
Advanced air bag system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-50  
Front passenger air bag and status light . . . . 1-51  
Front-seat mounted side-impact  
supplemental air bag system. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-54  
Roof-mounted curtain side-impact  
supplemental air bag system. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-54  
B
Air bag warning labels. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-57  
Air bag warning light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-57, 2-14  
Air cleaner housing filter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-16  
Air conditioner  
Back door . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-22  
Battery . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-13  
Battery replacement, Intelligent Key . . . . . . . . . . 8-23  
Battery replacement, Keyfob . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-22  
Battery saver system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-25  
Variable voltage control system. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-15  
Before starting the engine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-12  
Bluetooth® Hands-Free Phone System . . . . . . . . . . 4-44  
Booster seats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-39  
Brake  
Anti-lock Braking System (ABS). . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-26  
Brake and clutch fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-11  
Brake system. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-26  
Parking brake operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-20  
Warning light. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-11  
Break-in schedule. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-22  
Brightness control, Instrument panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-26  
Bulb check/instrument panel. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-10  
Bulb replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-25  
Air conditioner operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-6  
Air conditioner service. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-12  
Air conditioner specification label . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-10  
Air conditioning system refrigerant and  
lubricant recommendations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-12, 9-6  
In-cabin microfilter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-12  
Alarm, How to stop alarm  
(see vehicle security system) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-19  
Alcohol, drugs and driving . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-6  
Antenna. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-42  
Anti-lock Braking System (ABS). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-26  
Anti-lock braking system (ABS) warning light . . . 2-10  
Appearance care  
Exterior appearance care. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-2  
Interior appearance care . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-5  
Armrest . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-12  
Audible reminders . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-17  
Audio operation precautions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-13  
Command  
(See Bluetooth® Hands-Free Phone System) . . . 4-50  
Compact Disc (CD) player  
(See audio system) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-26, 4-31, 4-37  
Continuously Variable Transmission (CVT)  
fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-11  
Controls, Steering wheel audio controls . . . . . . . . . 4-41  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Coolant  
Capacities and recommended fuel/  
Capacities and recommended fuel/lubricants . 9-2  
Changing engine coolant. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-8  
Changing engine oil and filter. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-9  
Checking engine coolant level. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-8  
Checking engine oil level. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-9  
Coolant temperature gauge. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-6  
Engine block heater . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-30  
Engine compartment check locations . . . . . . . . . . 8-6  
Engine cooling system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-7  
Engine oil. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-9  
Engine oil and oil filter recommendation . . . . . . . 9-5  
Engine oil viscosity . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-5  
Engine serial number . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-9  
Engine specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-7  
If your vehicle overheats. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-11  
Starting the engine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-12  
Event Data Recorders (EDR) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-22  
Exhaust gas (carbon monoxide) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-2  
Engine coolant . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-7  
Engine oil. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-9  
Window washer fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-12  
lubricants . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-2  
Changing engine coolant. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-8  
Checking engine coolant level. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-8  
Corrosion protection. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-6  
Cruise control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-20  
Cup holders . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-31  
FM-AM radio with Compact Disc (CD)  
player . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-25  
FM-AM-SAT radio with Compact Disc (CD)  
player . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-35  
Fog light switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-27  
Front manual seat adjustment. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-3  
Front passenger air bag and status light . . . . . . . . 1-51  
Front seat, Front seat adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-3  
Front-seat active head restraints . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-9  
Fuel  
CVT, Driving with CVT  
(Continuously Variable Transmission). . . . . . . . 5-7, 5-14  
D
Daytime running light system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-25  
Defroster switch, Rear window and outside  
mirror defroster switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-23  
Dimensions and weights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-8  
Door open warning light. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-11  
Drive belt . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-15  
Driving  
Capacities and recommended fuel/  
lubricants . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-2  
Distance to empty . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-8  
Fuel economy . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-23  
Fuel octane rating. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-3  
Fuel recommendation. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-3  
Fuel-filler cap. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-24  
Fuel-filler door. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-24  
Gauge . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-7  
Fuses . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-20  
Fusible links . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-21  
F
Cold weather driving . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-29  
Driving with CVT  
(Continuously Variable Transmission). . . . 5-7, 5-14  
Driving with manual transmission . . . . . . . . 5-8, 5-18  
Precautions when starting and driving . . . . . . . . . 5-2  
F.M.V.S.S./C.M.V.S.S. certification label. . . . . . . . . . . . 9-9  
Filter  
Air cleaner housing filter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-16  
Changing engine oil and filter. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-9  
Flashers (See hazard warning flasher switch) . . . 2-27  
Flat tire. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-2  
Flat towing. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-18  
Floor mat cleaning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-5  
Fluid  
G
E
Gas cap . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-24  
Gauge . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-4  
Engine coolant temperature gauge. . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-6  
Fuel gauge . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-7  
Odometer. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-5  
Speedometer. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-5  
Tachometer. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-6  
Trip computer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-8  
Economy, Fuel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-23  
Electric power steering system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-25  
Electric power steering warning light . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-12  
Emission control information label . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-10  
Emission control system warranty . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-20  
Engine  
Brake and clutch fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-11  
Capacities and recommended fuel/  
lubricants . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-2  
Continuously Variable Transmission (CVT)  
Before starting the engine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-12  
Break-in schedule. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-22  
fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-11  
10-2  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
General maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-2  
Glove box. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-33  
Key operating range . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-12  
Key operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-13  
P position selecting warning light . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-14  
Remote keyless operation. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-17  
Interior light replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-27  
Interior lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-38  
iPod® connecting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-33  
iPod® player operation. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-39  
ISOFIX child restraint. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-24  
Light  
Air bag warning light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-57  
Bulb replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-25  
Cargo light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-40  
Ceiling light. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-39  
Fog light switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-27  
Headlight switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-23  
Headlights bulb replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-26  
Indicator lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-15  
Interior lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-38  
Map lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-38  
Replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-25  
H
Hands-Free Phone System, Bluetooth®. . . . . . . . . . 4-44  
Hazard warning flasher switch. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-27  
Head restraints. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-6  
Headlights  
Bulb replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-26  
Headlight switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-23  
Heater  
Engine block heater . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-30  
Heater and air conditioner operation . . . . . . . . . . . 4-6  
Hood release. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-21  
Hook  
Luggage hook. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-34  
Utility hooks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-35  
Horn . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-28  
J
Jump starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-8  
Warning/indicator lights and audible  
reminders . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-10  
K
Lights, Exterior and interior light replacement ... 8-27  
Loading information  
(See vehicle loading information). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-14  
Lock  
Automatic door locks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-5  
Back door lock. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-22  
Door locks. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-4  
Power door lock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-4  
Low fuel warning light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-12  
Low tire pressure warning light. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-13  
Keyless entry  
(See remote keyless entry system) . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-6  
With Intelligent Key system  
(See Intelligent Key system) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-17  
Keys. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-2  
For Intelligent Key system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-10  
I
Ignition switch  
L
(with Intelligent Key system) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-9  
(without Intelligent Key system). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-7  
Key positions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-8  
Immobilizer system. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-19  
In-cabin microfilter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-12  
Indicator lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-15  
Inside mirror . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-26  
Inspection/maintenance (I/M) test . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-21  
Instrument brightness control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-26  
Instrument panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-3  
Intelligent Key system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-10  
Intelligent Key system warning light . . . . . . . . . . 2-12  
Labels  
Low tire pressure warning system (See tire  
pressure monitoring system (TPMS)) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-3  
Luggage hooks. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-34  
Air bag warning labels. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-57  
Air conditioner specification label . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-10  
Emission control information label . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-10  
Engine serial number . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-9  
F.M.V.S.S./C.M.V.S.S. certification label. . . . . . . . 9-9  
Tire and Loading information label . . . . 8-30, 9-10  
Vehicle identification number (VIN) . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-8  
LATCH system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-24  
License plate, Installing front license plate. . . . . . . 9-11  
M
Maintenance  
Battery . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-13  
General maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-2, 8-2  
Inside the vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-3  
Maintenance precautions. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-5  
10-3  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Maintenance requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-2  
Outside the vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-2  
Seat belt maintenance. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-22  
Malfunction indicator light (MIL) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-15  
Manual air conditioner . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-6  
Manual front seat adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-3  
Map lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-38  
Mechanical key (Intelligent Key system). . . . . . . . . . . . 3-4  
Meter  
Trip computer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-8  
Meters and gauges . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-4  
Instrument brightness control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-26  
Mirror  
Overdrive OFF switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-16  
Overheat, If your vehicle overheats. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-11  
Owner’s Manual/Service Manual order  
FM-AM-SAT radio with Compact Disc  
(CD) player . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-35  
Steering wheel audio controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-41  
Rapid air pressure loss. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-6  
Readiness for inspection/maintenance (I/M)  
information. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-22  
test. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-21  
P
Rear center seat belt . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-20  
Rear door lock, Child safety rear door lock. . . . . . . . 3-6  
Rear seats. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-4  
Rear window and outside mirror defroster  
switch. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-23  
Rear window wiper and washer switch . . . . . . . . . . 2-22  
Rearview monitor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-2  
Recorders, Event data. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-22  
Registering your vehicle in another country. . . . . . . . 9-8  
Remote keyless entry function, For Intelligent  
Key system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-17  
Panic alarm. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-8, 3-18  
Parking  
Parking brake operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-20  
Parking on hills. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-24  
Phone  
Bluetooth® Hands-Free Phone System . . . . . . 4-44  
Car phone or CB radio. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-44  
Power  
Electric power steering system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-25  
Power door lock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-4  
Power outlet. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-31  
Power windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-36  
Precautions  
Audio operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-13  
Braking precautions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-26  
Child restraints. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-23  
Cruise control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-20  
Maintenance. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-5  
Seat belt usage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-12  
Supplemental restraint system. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-44  
When starting and driving. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-2  
Push starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-10  
Push-button ignition switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-9, 5-10  
Inside mirror . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-26  
Outside mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-27  
Monitor, Rearview monitor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-2  
Remote keyless entry system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-6  
Reporting safety defects (US only). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-20  
Rollover . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-5  
N
New vehicle break-in . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-22  
NISSAN Vehicle Immobilizer System. . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-19  
S
O
Safety  
Child seat belts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-15  
Reporting safety defects (US only). . . . . . . . . . . 9-20  
Satellite radio operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-36  
Seat adjustment  
Front manual seat adjustment. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-3  
Front seats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-3  
Seat belt(s)  
Odometer. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-5  
Off-road recovery . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-5  
Oil  
Capacities and recommended fuel/  
lubricants . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-2  
Changing engine oil and filter. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-9  
Checking engine oil level. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-9  
Engine oil. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-9  
Engine oil viscosity . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-5  
Outside air temperature display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-7  
Outside mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-27  
Child safety. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-15  
Infants. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-15  
Injured persons. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-16  
Larger children . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-15  
R
Radio . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-13  
Car phone or CB radio. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-44  
10-4  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Precautions on seat belt usage. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-12  
Pregnant women. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-16  
Rear center seat belt . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-20  
Seat belt cleaning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-6  
Seat belt extenders . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-22  
Seat belt hooks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-19  
Seat belt maintenance. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-22  
Seat belt warning light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-14  
Seat belts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-12  
Seat belts with pretensioners. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-56  
Shoulder belt height adjustment. . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-19  
Small children . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-15  
Three-point type . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-16  
Seat(s), Seats. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-2  
Security system, Vehicle security system . . . . . . . . 2-17  
Precautions when starting and driving . . . . . . . . . 5-2  
Push starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-10  
Starting the engine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-12  
Status light, Front passenger air bag . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-51  
Steering  
Electric power steering system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-25  
Steering wheel switch for audio controls . . . . 4-41  
Tilting steering column . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-25  
Storage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-31  
Sun visors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-26  
Supplemental air bag warning labels. . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-57  
Supplemental air bag warning light . . . . . . . 1-57, 2-14  
Supplemental restraint system. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-44  
Theft (NISSAN Vehicle Immobilizer System),  
Engine start . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-19  
Three-way catalyst. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-2  
Tilt steering column. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-25  
Tire pressure, Low tire pressure warning  
light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-13  
Tires  
Flat tire. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-2  
Low tire pressure warning system. . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-3  
Tire and Loading information label . . . . 8-30, 9-10  
Tire chains. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-34  
Tire dressing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-4  
Tire pressure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-28  
Tire pressure monitoring system  
(TPMS) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-3, 6-2  
Precautions on supplemental restraint  
system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-44  
Switch  
Tire rotation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-35  
Types of tires. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-33  
Uniform tire quality grading . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-19  
Wheel/tire size . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-7  
Wheels and tires. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-28  
Top  
Security system  
(NISSAN Vehicle Immobilizer System),  
Engine start . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-19  
Audio control steering wheel switch . . . . . . . . . 4-41  
Autolight switch. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-24  
Fog light switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-27  
Hazard warning flasher switch. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-27  
Headlight switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-23  
Overdrive OFF switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-16  
Power door lock switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-5  
Rear window and outside mirror defroster  
switch. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-23  
Turn signal switch. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-26  
Vehicle dynamic control (VDC) off switch ... 2-28  
Selector lever  
Shift lock release . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-17  
Servicing air conditioner. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-12  
Shift lock release  
Transmission . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-17  
Shifting  
Tether strap child restraints . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-26  
Towing  
Flat towing. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-18  
Tow truck towing. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-12  
Towing a trailer. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-18  
TPMS, Tire pressure monitoring system . . . . . . . . . . . 5-3  
TPMS, Tire pressure warning system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-2  
Trailer towing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-18  
Transmission  
CVT  
(Continuously Variable Transmission). . . . 5-7, 5-14  
Manual transmission . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-8, 5-18  
Shoulder belt height adjustment, For front  
seats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-19  
Spare tire. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-37, 9-7  
Spark plugs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-16  
Speedometer. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-5  
Starting  
T
Tachometer. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-6  
Temperature display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-7  
Temperature gauge, Engine coolant  
Continuously Variable Transmission (CVT)  
fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-11  
Driving with CVT  
(Continuously Variable Transmission). . . . 5-7, 5-14  
temperature gauge. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-6  
Before starting the engine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-12  
Jump starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-8  
Driving with manual transmission . . . . . . . . 5-8, 5-18  
10-5  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Transmission selector lever lock release . . . . . 5-17  
Transmitter (See remote keyless entry system). . . . 3-6  
Tire pressure monitoring system  
(TPMS) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-3, 6-2  
Windshield wiper and washer switch . . . . . . . . 2-20  
Wiper blades. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-17  
Warning/indicator lights and audible  
reminders . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-10  
Transmitter, With Intelligent Key system  
(See Intelligent Key system) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-17  
Warning labels, Air bag warning labels . . . . . . . . . . 1-57  
Warning light  
Traveling or registering your vehicle in another  
country. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-8  
Trip computer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-8  
Turn signal switch. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-26  
Air bag warning light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-57, 2-14  
Anti-lock braking system (ABS) warning  
light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-10  
Brake warning light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-11  
Door open warning light. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-11  
Electric power steering warning light . . . . . . . . 2-12  
Intelligent Key system warning light . . . . . . . . . . 2-12  
Low fuel warning light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-12  
Low tire pressure warning light. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-13  
Seat belt warning light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-14  
Warranty, Emission control system warranty. . . . . 9-20  
Washer switch  
Rear window wiper and washer switch . . . . . . 2-22  
Windshield wiper and washer switch . . . . . . . . 2-20  
Washing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-2  
Waxing. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-3  
Weights (See dimensions and weights) . . . . . . . . . . . 9-8  
Wheel/tire size . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-7  
Wheels and tires. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-28  
Care of wheels. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-3  
Cleaning aluminum alloy wheels. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-4  
Window washer fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-12  
Window(s)  
U
Underbody cleaning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-3  
Uniform tire quality grading . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-19  
V
Variable voltage control system. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-15  
Vehicle  
Dimensions and weights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-8  
Identification number (VIN). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-8  
Information display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-7  
Loading information. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-14  
Recovery (freeing a stuck vehicle). . . . . . . . . . . . 6-15  
Security system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-17  
Vehicle dynamic control (VDC) off switch . .. 2-28  
Vehicle dynamic control (VDC) system . . . . . . 5-28  
Ventilators . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-5  
Voice command  
(See Bluetooth® Hands-Free Phone System) . .. 4-50  
W
Cleaning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-3  
Power windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-36  
Windshield wiper and washer switch . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-20  
Wiper  
Warning  
Hazard warning flasher switch. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-27  
Lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-10  
Rear window wiper and washer switch . . . . . . 2-22  
Rear window wiper blade . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-19  
10-6  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
MEMO  
10-7  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
GAS STATION INFORMATION  
ENGINE OIL RECOMMENDATION:  
FUEL RECOMMENDATION:  
.
.
Engine oil with API Certification Mark  
Viscosity SAE 5W-30  
Use unleaded regular gasoline with an octane  
rating of at least 87 AKI (Anti-Knock Index)  
number (Research octane number 91).  
See “CAPACITIES AND RECOMMENDED  
FUEL/LUBRICANTS” in the “9. Technical and  
consumer information” section for engine oil and  
oil filter recommendation.  
CAUTION  
.
Using a fuel other than that speci-  
fied could adversely affect the emis-  
sion control systems, and may also  
affect warranty coverage.  
COLD TIRE PRESSURES:  
The label is typically located on the driver side  
center pillar or on the driver’s door. For  
additional information, see “WHEELS AND  
TIRES” in the “8. Maintenance and do-it-  
yourself” section.  
.
.
Under no circumstances should a  
leaded gasoline be used, since this  
will damage the three way catalyst.  
Do not use E-85 fuel in your vehicle.  
Your vehicle is not designed to run  
on E-85 fuel. Using E-85 fuel can  
damage the fuel system compo-  
nents and is not covered by the  
NISSAN new vehicle limited war-  
ranty.  
NEW VEHICLE BREAK-IN PROCE-  
DURES RECOMMENDATION:  
During the first 1,200 miles (2,000 km) of  
vehicle use, follow the recommendations out-  
lined in the “BREAK-IN SCHEDULE” in the “5.  
Starting and driving” section of this Owner’s  
Manual. Follow these recommendations for the  
future reliability and economy of your new  
vehicle.  
For additional information, see “CAPACITIES  
AND RECOMMENDED FUEL/LUBRICANTS”  
in the “9. Technical and consumer information”  
section.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  

Multi Tech Systems Network Card RAS96 User Manual
Multi Tech Systems Network Card RJ 45 User Manual
Nikon Camera Lens COOLPIX 5000 User Manual
Oki Printer 4400 User Manual
Omega Thermostat HCTB 3020 User Manual
Optimus Stereo Receiver 31 3040 User Manual
Panasonic Projection Television PT 50LCZ70 User Manual
Panasonic Switch 15000 User Manual
Panasonic Time Clock KX FL421 User Manual
Patton electronic Network Card PATTON 2707 I User Manual